Mind Control Secrets: How To Get Others To Do What You Want, And Have Them Think It Was Their Idea!

Mind Control Secrets How to Get Others to Do What You Want, and Have Them Think It Was Their Idea!

By William D. Horton, Psy. D. © 2009 William D. Horton. All rights reserved.

Table of Contents What People Are Saying ...................................................... v Prologue ............................................................................. vii Authors Note .......................................................................ix An Introduction to Mind Control Secrets .......................... 1 The Brain and the Mind ...................................................... 9 Rapport: The First Key....................................................... 25 Communication Styles: The Second Key .......................... 37 The Third Key: Effective Listening and Putting It Together ............................................................................. 65 Strategies ............................................................................ 83 Anchoring......................................................................... 111 Information Gathering .................................................... 143 Beliefs ............................................................................... 167 Changing with Logical Levels ......................................... 179 Calibration........................................................................ 191 Reframing for Change!.................................................... 221 The Fourth Key: Turning Your Fear into Power and Controlling Your Internal State .................................................................... 231 Twenty-One-Day Exercise ................................................ 243

iii

Mind Control Secrets Putting It Together—Einstein’s Brain ............................ 249 Remote Brain Control ..................................................... 253 An Examination of Obama’s Use of Hidden Hypnosis Techniques in his Speeches ............................ 257 Mk Ultra ........................................................................... 395 Glossary of Common NLP Terms.................................... 429 Bio ..................................................................................... 441

iv

What People Are Saying If NLP is something that you thirst to use and apply in business, or in everyday life, then you want to pick up Mind Control 101 today! Wil Horton collects a treasure trove of NLP techniques and strategies designed to influence and persuade others into one easy-to-read text. Where else are you going to get this many practical applications for this little investment. Get it today! —Richard Alexander, Master Hypnotist, NLP Trainer It was a summer afternoon in Chicago. 1995. Across from me was Dr. William Horton. We talked NLP, influence, everything there was to talk about motivating others to do things they need to be doing in life. Ten years later after having taken two divergent paths to teach others how to persuade and how to master the art of mind control, we meet again here, in Dr. Horton’s new book on Mind Control. His desire for all techniques and strategies to be used to help people be better, be happier, be healthier shines through a vast array of tools you can use to influence others. You’ll learn how to anchor resourceful states in others, build rapport, and even get a list of Dr. Horton’s “bypass words.” I’ll save that surprise for you. Where else are you going to get all of the NLP techniques designed to influence others crystallized into one workable tome? They are here. NLPers in particular will enjoy this journey because it will be like coming home. What Dr. Horton does so well is make some of the more seemingly complex elements of NLP easy to understand and far more importantly apply. v

Mind Control Secrets Enjoy your journey and take this book with you on all of yours. The only problem I have with this book is I wish I would have written it! —Kevin Hogan, author of The Science of Influence and The Psychology of Persuasion

vi

Prologue “Mind control” is a term filled with mystery, intrigue, and fun. Control of the mind . . . what does it mean, really! So-called experts have been writing and arguing about the mind for as long as people have been able to communicate. The elusive and mystical control we seek is possible. In Mind Control, Dr. William Horton takes us closer to the practical application of mental discipline for ourselves. Dr. Horton applies NLP communication techniques (special language to structure change in the mind) so that we can manage and control of others. This control takes the form of better understanding of what we see feel and hear as other talk to us. We are afforded the opportunity through these techniques to use the best possible angle while talking with others. In our culture, control can be regarded as a negative term. Here we use it as a positive action. When we say control, we really refer to the control of our own thoughts, our own state of mind, and the way we communicate. Dr. Horton uses his ability to break down systems and processes to share a new understanding of the function of the mind as we interact with the people around us. Can you imagine your life in a world where people simply do what you ask them to do? The processes outlined in this book will install the skills needed for maximum success. Self-control and mental discipline give you the ability to have more success in any part of your journey through career and personal goals. Personal relationships become more rewarding. You have an easy time controlling money. Your ability to retain information grows. This is all possible

vii

Mind Control Secrets because you are choosing the way you communicate with yourself and the other players in your life. Imagine a life where you control your emotional reactions to the obstacles you encounter on your path to success. See yourself as an individual who can consider the effects your reactions have on others. Hear your own thoughts as they become useful to your goals. You can have all of this and more. All you must do is master the techniques in this book. Even more exciting news awaits you. With the techniques you learn, you can enable others to reach their dreams and goals in a more effective manner. It’s easy to remember times in your life when you wanted other people to simply do what you have asked them to do. What if you knew exactly how to talk and act to get others to take action? The more you understand “mind control,” the easier your interactions with other people become. As you remember each technique in this book, you will enjoy Dr. Horton’s unique take on the material and his passion for life itself. —Elsom Eldrige, author of The Obvious Expert, Founder of The International Guild of Professional Consultants

viii

Authors Note As I read the edited manuscript for this book, I am reminded that I am one of the luckiest men in the world. A little over 20 years ago I was exposed to the technology in this book and it not only saved my life, it gave me a life worth living. I was caught in a cycle of addiction and self destruction that I, with my limited thought processes, could not escape. I have done nothing special to have the opportunity to live the life I currently have. I have a beautiful home, a beautiful wife, a successful daughter, and I have had more success financially in one month than I thought possible. I just returned from a trip to Asia teaching the techniques outlined in this book. The idea that a man who at one point was living in a run-down trailer and could not stop drinking and other self destructive behaviors could, in a relatively short period of time, become a licensed psychologist, author and world traveled speaker on Hypnosis, NLP and Mind Control boggles my mind and fills me with a gratitude I can never repay. The magic does not stop there; these techniques have also allowed me to overcome a severe physical injury where I was told I would always have a limp and my athletic days were over, I’ve since become a 4th-degree black belt in karate and have won tournaments and medals in various competitions. Today I ran an 8:45 mile, not bad for someone told they could never do this! None of this would have been possible without the techniques I have outlined in this book. I pray that you read and take in the information and that you use it to live the life you deserve. It is one of my primary missions to share this information with as many people as I can. I have taught ix

Mind Control Secrets thousands of students and always learn new things. I know that you too will one day be able to share with me new and wonderful applications of the technology you are about to learn. I hope to see you on the road to happy destiny! William Horton, Psy.D, CAC, CMI

x

Chapter 1

An Introduction to Mind Control Secrets The human mind is a remarkable thing, but we often take it for granted; we don’t give it the full respect it deserves. I guess this is largely because the mind is capable of taking care of itself. It usually doesn’t demand any attention from us, so we don’t give it any. What if we did, though? What if we stopped for a minute or two and thought about the range of activities going on in the human mind, and the amazing faculties that our minds have? Only a reflection along these lines helps us understand what a wonderful entity the human mind is. Our minds are capable of carrying out so many routine activities like thinking, feeling, remembering, calculating, analyzing, and reasoning. Oh! The list could go on and on and on. Apart from this, we’re also capable of doing so many other things that are totally alien to the rest of creation. For example, we can enjoy music, appreciate beauty in many forms and create beautiful works of art…all things only humans are capable of doing. Isn’t it these finer qualities that distinguish man from beast? All this is, of course, thanks to the human mind. All of us have been endowed with a mind. However, if the human mind is capable of such an astounding range of qualities, it makes one wonder whether we’ve actually tapped its potential. Forget about tapping it to the fullest possible extent; do we use even a third of the potential our minds have?

1

Mind Control Secrets Pondering a question like this opens up another avenue of thought: If the human mind is capable of so many activities and functions, and if the human mind is so powerful, can’t this power be used to exercise some degree of power over other human minds? It seems logical enough, doesn’t it? Most of us don’t use even a fraction of our mind’s faculties. So if some of us start doing that, if we start directing and focusing our mental energy toward the minds of others—which, mind you, function in very similar patterns to our minds—can’t we exercise a sort of mind control over them? If this concept interests you, then you’re in luck, because this book is completely dedicated to the use and development of mind power. Believe me; you’ll be surprised at the amount of power you can exercise over others! Hold on a second, though. We’re not talking about looking at the guy standing across the street and being able to control his mind to such an extent that he turns toward you and starts waving his hand or clucking like a chicken. That kind of thing only happens in comics, cartoons, and movies! No, we’re talking about something more practical. We’re talking about using mind power so you can talk convincingly to a person and effectively bring that person to your line of thinking. Who would want to do that? Well, a lot of people would, indeed, love to do just that—and they succeed! Take, for instance, a single day in your life. How many people do you meet in a day? Out of that, how many of those people do you talk to? You may not be a salesman, but trust me when I tell you that all of us do a lot of marketing in the course of our daily lives. We try to sell our ideas; we try to sell our thoughts; we try to sell our feelings, our desires, our likes and our dislikes. When two people meet 2

An Introduction to Mind Control Secrets and start talking, there’s bound to be an exchange of different views. So, how do we get others to accept our views? How do we sell our opinions? How do we bring others to accept our ideas? Mind you, the people I’m talking about aren’t necessarily strangers. They can be members of your immediate family—your parents, your kids, your spouse, your siblings—or they could be your teachers, your friends, or your neighbors. They could also be people you do daily business with, like the postman or the grocer or the shopkeeper or the maid, or even your colleagues or your boss. All these transactions give rise to situations that may end in one of three ways: • •

•

The “win-lose” situation, in which one party wins and the other party loses. The “lose-lose” situation, in which neither party wins—it’s like a tug-of-war in which both parties hold on strongly to their views and, together, they get nowhere. Finally, there is the “win-win” situation, in which both parties are convinced that each got the best out of the situation.

Let’s discuss the situation in which one party eventually wins…the “win-lose” situation. The other party, in effect, loses. However, when the two people part ways, the second party leaves with the conviction that he or she won the struggle. This happens when you use your mental faculties to get the better of others, but they’re unaware of the end result. They beat a graceful retreat and feel good about it, so much so that, though you got your way, they believe they got theirs! That is precisely what mind power is all about. 3

Mind Control Secrets This is a technique worth learning. It will be of immense help to you in tackling the different situations you face in life. After all, how many times in life have others gotten the better of you? How many times over the years have you had to negotiate and then left feeling that you got a raw deal? In the course of this program, you’ll learn how to use the techniques of neuropsychogenics and neurolinguistic programming (NLP) to develop mind control. Before we really hit the road, though, here’s an eye-opener about NLP.

What Is NLP? As we said, NLP is neurolinguistic programming…but what’s that? Simply put, NLP is a unique model of how people learn, motivate themselves and change their behavior to achieve excellence in any endeavor. Throughout history a perplexing question of mankind has been, “Why are some people more successful than others?” While the complex explanation involves the interplay between genes, physical environment, and socioeconomic and cultural indicators, the simple explanation involves programming. The term, neurolinguistic programming, was coined by author and founder of general semantics Alfred Habdank Skarbek Korzybski. Richard Bandler and John Grinder then brought it to the public. From their trainings, this science has grown to what we know today. These men are to be commended on advancing this art and science of the human mind. In the early 1970s, a team of scientists at the University of California at Santa Cruz set out to answer the question of why people with similar backgrounds in education, training and experience were not similarly successful. They wanted to explore what they called “the secrets of effective people”

4

An Introduction to Mind Control Secrets and wanted to “model human excellence.” What they discovered was that, while people’s backgrounds were similar, the brain wiring—or programming—was distinctly different. What developed out of this research was the field of neurolinguistic programming. Neurolinguistic programming rests on the premise that thought patterns are largely responsible for an individual’s success or failure; that preconceived thoughts and mental conditioning effect our social interactions and accomplishments. The theory is that if you remodel your negative thoughts, you can change your personal situation. So, NLP is an integration of neurology, psychology, linguistics, cybernetics, and systems theory: •

•

•

Neuro—because our experiences, both conscious and subconscious, are derived through and from our senses and central nervous system. Linguistic—because our mental processes are also coded, organized, given meaning and transformed through language. Programming—because people interact as a system in which experience and communication are composed of sequences of patterns or “programs.”

The functions of NLP include letting you model or copy human excellence and helping you become adept at whatever you want to do. NLP helps you become a better communicator in terms of: • • • •

Business consultation Parenting Management Nursing 5

Mind Control Secrets • • • • • • •

Negotiation Public Speaking Education Sports Performance Counseling Therapy Relationships

NLP can: • • • • • •

change past impact on a client turn a poor speller to a good speller assist a business person to gain rapport nonverbally and handle meetings efficiently help an athlete improve concentration be used as a method of therapy can serve as a process of teaching people to use their brains

Most therapy is remedial. That is, it’s directed toward solving problems of the past. NLP, on the other hand, studies excellence and teaches skills that promote positive changes, which in turn generate new possibilities and opportunities. This Mind Control program is designed to equip you with all that you need to become a master of mind power. We’ve written it in a very simple, lucid style, with no stone left unturned in terms of rendering all scientific jargon into layman’s lingo, because we want you to understand these methods completely. This book can help even a beginner become a master in no time! That said, let’s proceed to the first step toward exercising mind control. First, you need to open your senses, because you, and your ability to learn, will be only as good as the information 6

An Introduction to Mind Control Secrets you allow in. We want you to allow more information to enter into your awareness. The first step is to practice opening your senses. Try the following.

Sensory Acuity Exercises Kinesthetic (Sense of Touch) First, find your center for the sense of feeling. You need to get in touch with a time when you were really in tune with your body during a physical activity such as working out, dancing, sports, etc. The focus should be on your feeling center. Take several items and feel them. Use normal everyday items such as an apple, a pencil, a newspaper or some cloth. Enter into the feeling of the experience of touching it. Close your eyes and repeat the last step. Imagine expanding your sense of touch so you’re ten times more sensitive. Stay in your center and think of some states of feeling… happy, sad, energetic, depressed, etc. Repeat the above and see how it alters your experience. Now, go through a day and stay focused on your sense of touch/feeling.

Auditory First, you’ll focus on your center of hearing. Think of a time when you were really in tune with your sense of hearing, such as listening to music, the sounds of nature, etc. Keep your focus on this auditory center as you listen to sounds. Do this in several places. At home, listen for the background sounds you normally screen out…fans, air conditioning, or the sound of the Television in another room. Notice how you can expand your hearing. Next, do this in

7

Mind Control Secrets a public place and do the same; notice how you can hear others’ conversations. Listen closely in your conversations. Notice if your hear more. Listen for inflections, tone, pace and rhythm. Really listen to the people you normally screen out. Spend the day expanding your hearing; you’ll be surprised at the results!

Visual Now you’ll focus on your center for the sense of vision. Think of a time when you were visually in tune with your body at a movie, while looking at a painting, etc. Look at several items and imagine your vision expanding. Notice all the little things you normally skim over. Watch a movie or TV show, and watch the sides, not just the center. We naturally are drawn to the center, so notice how it may change your experience of the film. Watch a movie you like and force yourself to do this. Focus on what you see when you’re talking to someone. See how it changes your communications. Then focus approximately three to four feet behind the person you are conversing with. Your senses are, in many ways, the gatekeepers for your mind. When you attune your senses to your environment, you’ll be amazed at how many details you pick up on…and how easy it is to use those details to practice mind control. So, now that you’ve mastered this sensory acuity, let’s take a look at the power contained in your amazing mind.

8

Chapter 2

The Brain and the Mind The brain and the mind have different jobs. In order to understand how “mind control” works, you need to understand what is occurring inside your head (and your subject’s head) as you use NLP to achieve the best results possible.

The Brain The brain is a tangible thing. You know where it is, roughly what it looks like and what it’s made of. It has properties that dictate how it functions, and we know what those properties are. One of them, the one that is most important for mind control, is subconscious communication. The human brain is a miraculous tool that is made up of a very unique structure. There is nothing that compares to the brain; its integral working is amazingly flexible. Imagine how efficient each structure needs to be for all the operations it carries out. Think for just a moment about all the things that your brain does in an hour. It’s amazing. The makeup of the brain is another fascinating factor. About 78 percent of the brain is made up of water, with the remaining 22 percent composed of fat and protein. Here’s some more information on how your amazing brain separates its processes: Nerve fibers cover the top of the brain and carry narrow bands or paths. 9

Mind Control Secrets Underneath this nerve fiber cover is the layer that’s known for processing sensory data. Next is the area of the brain that pairs sensory information with feelings and thoughts Below this is the last layer, the Limbic system, which regulates feelings and allows the body to remain in a state of homeostasis. Auditory, visual, motor and somatosensory processes make up the associative center of the brain. The occipital (visual), parietal (spatial), temporal (speech) and frontal (organization) areas of the brain all serve different functions. Finally, the brain is divided into two hemispheres: the left for linear processing and the right for spatial and negative affect. The brain is made up of all this, of billions of neurons, dendrites and nerve fibers, yet is only two percent of the human body weight.

Neurogenesis Another fascinating function of the brain is neurogenesis. Simply described, neurogenesis is the creation of new nerve connections in the brain. These nerve connections are somewhat similar to the hardwiring of a computer. While the computer relies on hardware composed of digital

10

The Brain and the Mind circuitry, the human brain relies on hardware composed of neural circuitry composed of billions of nerve cells (neurons) that form a complex nervous system. These neurons assess the human environment and react accordingly by sending chemical messages to each other through electrical impulses. These messages form the basis of our learning, productivity, behavior and very survival. Neurogenesis is essential to success in humans. Since we often look to scientific studies of other species to explain processes in humans, let me share a fascinating study of canaries. Frederick Nottebohm’s studies, performed in the early 1990s, illustrate the importance of neurogenesis in songbirds. The songbird depends on its beautiful melodies to attract a mate and produce offspring, ensuring its lineage. In his studies, Nottenbohm discovered that, in order to sing these complex melodies, the male birds continually generated new brain cells in their song centers. In fact, approximately one percent of the birds’ neurons are newly created in the song center each day. Because human behavior is so individually varied, we can’t assess the daily potential of new neural connections in exactly the same way, but just compare the canary brain capacity to that of a human and imagine the possibilities! While you may have heard the statement that humans use only 10 percent of their brains, this isn’t exactly true. The correct statement is that humans use only 10 percent of their neurons at any given time (due to the sheer volume and task specifications). However, this means that the more new neural connections you build, the greater the productivity you can expect from your active 10 percent.

11

Mind Control Secrets

The Brain as Computer We previously compared the brain’s neural circuitry to the hardwiring of a computer. Let’s explore this comparison a bit more. Both the computer and the human brain have massive information processing abilities that are based on the transmission of electrical signals, and each has a memory that can grow and learn to accommodate changing needs. However, both can also become damaged with faulty programming information. For a computer, this faulty information comes in the form of viruses; for the human brain it is negativity. Fortunately, both systems can be changed and modified to correct this damage. However, there is a fundamental difference between computer hardware and the human neurological system. The difference is that, while hardware may vastly vary from computer to computer, every person possesses the same neural hardware. There is a common, basic, physical neurology with billions of neurons processing approximately 40,000 bits of information per second, aiding the brain in reasoning, learning and memory. In the absence of a disease process, or physical damage or defect, we all possess the same neural hardware. Consider this carefully: every human being shares the same neural hardware. So, if we all share the same hardware, then we all share the same potential! Imagine…all of this from an organ that weighs only three pounds! That’s only the physical make-up of the brain. The functions are even more unimaginable. The level at which our brain operates dictates how we feel, how we behave and how we perform. There are four levels of brain activity, known as beta, alpha, theta, and delta. There’s been a lot of research into the four levels of brain activity, which we’ll go over in a minute. Basically, the 12

The Brain and the Mind mind control state is attained by taking your brain from beta, which it’s probably in right now, to either the alpha or theta states, depending on what you want to achieve. Beta state is the home to logic, analysis, and reason. You’re awake, alert, and in a normal state of consciousness. You are experiencing sight, sound, smell, taste and touch. It significantly affects the brain’s ability to store information and memories, and access creativity, focus and concentration. Beta state only makes up approximately 12 percent of our total conscious being, but we spend about 90 percent of our day stuck in this state. It’s no surprise, then, that it’s also where we get most of our tension and negative thinking. Alpha state is the strongest and most prominent brain state. It’s also the best state to be in when preparing for competition and for decision making. Alpha state is a state of calm, relaxation, and lucidity. You must be in alpha state to modify, add, and delete “programs” for behavior modification. You can also control dreams while in this state. You’re in alpha in the approximate twenty minutes or so while you are falling, but not quite, asleep. Theta state is where you end up after leaving alpha state when you fall asleep, but before you’re sleeping deeply. This is the state of active dreaming and rapid eye movement. It’s also the level you can reach when you are hypnotized by someone else, and where deep programming can take place. It is a state of deep relaxation and clear mental imagery. Delta state is the deepest state of deep, dreamless sleep. This is where healing and recovery in the body and brain can take place. The body is completely at rest. If we all have the same potential shouldn’t we all be equally successful? Again, programming is the underlying answer to why some people are more successful than others. 13

Mind Control Secrets Most of us have heard the old axiom of, “It’s not what you have but how you use it.” This rings true in brain neurology. The actual wiring of your brain—the number of neural connections—depends on your individual programming. Too often, mental resources are underutilized and the wiring is subsequently damaged through faulty programming. Proper programming involves positive nurturing input. Until the last decade, the prevailing scientific theory of neurology was that the human brain could not establish new neural connections. In other words, what you are born with is what you have and, as you age, they will die. It’s now known that the more than one hundred billion neurons of the brain are geared to reinvest in themselves. Positive, enriched environments stimulate the brain to create more neural connections. The more you learn, the more you become capable of learning. You can actually rewire, or reprogram, your brain! You can do this at any age; the more you stimulate it, the more it grows!

The Conscious Mind Think of yourself as having two minds: your conscious mind and your subconscious mind. Your conscious mind is your thinking, awake state of awareness, yet it comprises a remarkably paltry 12 percent of your mind. Mind control happens when you bypass the 12 percent conscious mind and get to the power center. But first, let’s review. Your conscious mind has five functions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Analysis Rationalization Willpower Functional memory Voluntary body functions 14

The Brain and the Mind

Analysis Your conscious mind is logical because it is analytical. Its job is to study your problems and solve them. This is the place where people try to influence with logical reasoning. True mind control experts understand this is the least effective use of influence.

Rationalization This part of your mind tells you why you do things, gives you reasons to do things and helps you understand. The problem is, it’s usually wrong, because true motivation for behavior and responses comes from a much deeper part of our mind, a place we don’t normally have access to with our conscious mind. Think of smokers. Most say they smoke because it relaxes them. That’s not really why, but it’s the rationalization their brain told them. It’s a tidy, neat, logical answer. Not a complete answer, and certainly not correct, but logical.

Willpower This is what makes you stop and think before doing something. The problem here is that the conscious mind really isn’t good at this function. (If it were, there would be a lot of therapists, counselors and hypnotists out of jobs!)

Functional Memory The short-term memory, your functioning memory, is usually all you need to get through life. That’s why, even though in third grade you needed to know how to get from your classroom to the bathroom, decades later you can’t even remember where your third-grade classroom was. The brain drops (but doesn’t totally “lose”) the stuff that we don’t need to survive on a day-to-day basis.

15

Mind Control Secrets

Voluntary Body Functions As long as you aren’t physically impaired by injury, illness or other physical conditions, your brain tells your legs, “Hey, let’s go,” and they go. Your brain tells your hand to keep away from that hot stove, so you don’t touch it. However, if you tried to control your internal bodily functions that are normally on autopilot—like digestion and blood pressure—unless you’ve been trained to do this, you normally can’t unless you access them through some form of hypnosis. Remember, your conscious mind makes up approximately 12 percent of your entire mind. That’s not a lot! So somewhere else, there must be some pretty exciting stuff going on with which we need to learn how to communicate.

The Subconscious Mind The key to mind control is the subconscious mind. That 88 percent of your mind is the power center; it’s the motherboard of your body. Just like with a computer’s wiring, as long as it’s working properly, you never know it’s there. If it wasn’t there, though, nothing else could happen. Its single most significant characteristic is that it literally runs your life without you knowing it. The problem is that many people spend too much time listening to that loud and obnoxious 12 percent instead of tapping into the true power center. Like an iceberg, the subconscious is hidden beneath deep, dark waters, with only a small part showing on the surface. Our mind was meant to function differently, but we don’t understand it. We’re like a monkey pounding away on a keyboard with no comprehension as to how the computer works. Sometimes the monkey gets lucky and something good happens.

16

The Brain and the Mind Of the people who do know how to tap into the subconscious, many have made it a point to present it as a huge, mystical secret that takes years of patience to master. The truth is, it’s just a matter of knowing the way to activate it. The key to mind control is simple: • •

•

•

•

The subconscious mind cannot think, reason or argue. So what does it do? It FEELS. The subconscious mind is the emotional center of your being. Control someone’s emotions, and you control THEM. Many times, your emotions are actually out of sight, buried beneath your conscious mind or disguised by rationalization. Your subconscious mind controls who you are, how you respond, and what you believe. You (usually) don’t stop and think about your beliefs when you respond to a situation. But your responses are based upon your belief system. Your habits are a function of your subconscious mind. When you repeat the same action over and over, eventually it will become a habit. A habit is an automatic response. It is an action that starts in the conscious mind and, through repetition, shifts into the realm of the subconscious, like using a turn signal (for some of us). The subconscious mind is a huge storage unit for all memories, thoughts, dreams, fantasies and experiences, whether real or imagined. The subconscious simply records everything; it doesn’t make judgments as to reality. The subconscious protects you from real and imagined dangers. This is good to keep you safe, but bad because it’s how phobias take root.

17

Mind Control Secrets

Putting Them Together The conscious and subconscious minds work together. Your subconscious mind holds all your long-term memories. While your subconscious influences how your conscious mind works and acts, it can be programmed (or reprogrammed) to do what you want it to do. The conscious mind is the active master; it shows the effect of who you are. It thinks, perceives, exerts will and is aware; it instigates activity and can be objective. The subconscious mind acts like a servant but is really the source of who you are. It controls your feelings, blindly records your experiences and thoughts, is the source of your personal power and is totally subjective. Mind control is about taking control of the subconscious mind. This is very powerful, because if a suggestion is allowed to travel from your conscious to your subconscious mind, then it has the power to change your beliefs and behaviors. First, though, a suggestion has to make it through the critical factor of the conscious mind. That is the part of the conscious mind that works to protect the status quo of your subconscious mind. It’s the part of you that keeps you from believing every single thing you are told; it keeps you from getting manipulated. It acts as a filter to make sure what you’re hearing is in agreement with what’s already stored. Political and religious debates really bring critical factor to the forefront. But how can you break through that filter to get through to the subconscious mind? Mind control bypasses the critical factor of the conscious mind to allow you to access the subconscious and focus the mind to accept new positive information such as suggestions.

18

The Brain and the Mind Now, if that was all there was to mind control, we’d always be able to control others. That’s not the case. We need to use several tools to bypass the critical factor and obtain the success we want. Example: A great example of this was in the 2004 presidential election. President Bush and the Republicans constantly used the terms “September 11” or “9-11 changed everything.” I remember a question about education and how to fund college scholarships. Without missing a beat, the Vice President replied, “Well, we have to remember 9-11 changed the world; we have to defeat the terrorists, and there are bad people who want to kill us. The Democrats would rather talk to them and find out why they hate us.” He then answered something about education. But why mention 9-11 and terrorists? FEAR! It elicited a state; then he could link it to whatever he wanted. This is a great use of bypassing the critical factors and moving people. Start to look for examples of this in the real world!

Using Your Brain to Achieve Your Goals Everyone wants to succeed and be the best they can be, so what’s holding most people back? Most don’t bother to try “mind control” on themselves! Many people speak a good game; they understand that they must have goals and dreams to achieve the money, freedom and great lifestyle that they desire. When it actually comes to planning and having the correct goals, though, people often fail

19

Mind Control Secrets miserably. For most, their goal consists of only the things that they desire, not true, long-lasting goals. You might wonder why there’s a problem with that. It’s simple. When your goals are only driven by immediate or short-term desires, you’ll be left feeling frustrated and disappointed when you don’t achieve them. The key is to focus on personality and behavioral changes when setting goals. If you change the way you think about your goals, you’ll succeed. If, on the other hand, you’re only looking for that $100,000 car, you may be disappointed. When you set goals, you must reach for the stars (which is the easy part). You must then be truly committed to what you desire. FOCUSED ATTENTION IS VITAL! If you get frustrated because success doesn’t fall in your lap, you’ll spend the rest of your days agitated. You’ll never accomplish anything productive. Think about it this way; if you really want something, you know you have to continue working until you achieve it. If a person wants to succeed in business, yet isn’t willing to make the necessary contacts, give countless hours and work hard, how far do you think he will get? Not very far! To achieve goals, you have to be able to “think outside the box.” You have to be willing to work for it and change your thinking. You must be willing to step outside your comfort level and push ahead. Failure is not an option.

Setting Yourself Up For Success I’m sure you’ve heard stories of the extraordinary power or strength of a mother whose child was in danger? Do you know why she was able to achieve that “goal” of protecting her child? It’s because, when a person’s goal is a necessity, that person’s thinking changes. When people are

20

The Brain and the Mind required to achieve their goals, they stand up to the pressure and go the extra mile to ensure they complete the necessary actions. This is because there is a sense or urgency and need. This is an excellent quality in the human mind, because it allows us to see the fact that we can control our motivation and programming. Your potential for success lies in your “self talk”…the words you feed yourself every day. You must set yourself up for success. The excuses and “will do tomorrows” have to cease. There needs to be a sense of urgency in completing your goal. Do you think if a person told you that he would kill your loved one if you didn’t lose weight or bring him a million dollars, that you wouldn’t achieve that goal? You bet you would! The stakes would be raised and you would require more of yourself. You’d also give yourself positive feedback by telling yourself you must achieve, or else. There are few individuals in this world who are incapable of achieving success in their lives. When it becomes a “must” to succeed, people pull all the stops and jump all the hurdles. The best way to accomplish this is to raise the stakes and give yourself the credit you deserve. Don’t sell yourself short; this is why people fail. They give themselves negative feedback and give up because they feel they simply can’t meet the expectations of the goal. This is where frustration comes in. They eventually give up and look for a new goal. Instead of a “should,” your goal has to become a “must.” If it doesn’t, you’re in danger of failing.

Think About Your Past Achievements Think back to the events in your life and your past goals. What was your mindset, why was it achieved, and did you give up along the way? The chances are that there was a

21

Mind Control Secrets point in time when you thought about throwing in the towel, but didn’t. For some reason, your goal was a “must” to you. It may have been a job, money or the act of drawing someone to your point of view, but you achieved it. Use that example and draw from the behavior. When it came time to file your taxes, did you get it done? The answer is yes, because you knew if you didn’t, you’d have to answer to the taxman (a subject I truly know). Think about your education. You knew that if you didn’t finish, you’d spend the rest of your days making minimum wage or, worse, digging a ditch. It was a requirement (must) and you knew that, no matter what the obstacle, you must overcome it. It’s no different with the goals you set in life; you must tell yourself you have no choice. There’s no room for quitting or “tomorrow.” It must be done today. Take a few minutes and think of the things you want to accomplish, but have been putting off. Be honest with yourself and give no slack. Don’t start making excuses; that’s the reason you haven’t succeeded before today. List these three things, and then we will look at how to get the ball rolling. 1. 2. 3.

Raise the Bar on Your Acceptance Level When we dream, we generally dream big--like owning a high dollar home or car—but when we set our goals, we settle. Sure, we’d like to make $10,000 a month, but we’re willing to settle for $3,000 a month. Why is this? We sell ourselves short, every time. If we settle, then we don’t reach for any other expectations. If we don’t reach for further expectations, we’ll be left settling for the rest of our lives. 22

The Brain and the Mind If, on the other hand, we’re satisfied with $3,000 per month but continue on to achieve that $10,000 per month and more, we’ll achieve the higher amount. People gravitate toward their goals, especially when they feel they must. Think about it this way; when you’re short on cash for the month, but the bills haven’t been paid and the cabinets are bare, you pull some over-time or take on a second job. You know you must achieve another $500 dollars, or your family will go hungry and your electricity will be shut off. That is not an acceptable option. So, regardless of how tired or worn out you are, you continue on to achieve that goal. You’ve raised your expectation level and are telling yourself you can’t settle for what you have today.

Change Your Language Give up words such as should, would, could and if. They can no longer be a part of your goal or dreams. Instead, “I wish” becomes “I will.” It may sound trivial or silly, but it truly works. Look at people like Donald Trump, Bill Clinton, Oprah and others who have achieved the ultimate success in their lives. Do you hear their speech? Is it “I wish I could have”? NO! They speak as if everything is a work in progress, because it is. They continually reach for higher standards and dreams. They don’t settle and they don’t sell themselves short. You must foster your creativity, be good to yourself and allow yourself to grow. If you don’t grow as a person, your dreams and goals will go right out the window. Creating a positive self-esteem and identity is one of the most important feats in achieving success. Instead of telling yourself that you’ll do that tomorrow, tell yourself it will be completed today. No more settling or giving excuses for why you can’t achieve a goal. There’s no choice; it has become a must. Could of, would of and should of are gone from your vocabulary. 23

Mind Control Secrets If you raise the bar on your inner dialog, it will bring it to new levels. You’ll respond more to those things that you MUST do, so start using “must” language with your internal dialog. I also suggest you adopt the phrase, “Failure is not an option.” When Cortez landed in the New World, he burned the boats so his men knew they couldn’t fail. Try that inner attitude on for a change!

24

Chapter 3

Rapport: The First Key We start with the relatively simple concept of rapport. Put simply, establishing rapport is getting a person to trust you. “Is that important?” you ask. Of course it is. Let’s take a look at the situation this way. Go back in time, maybe to the prehistoric era, when cavemen roamed the earth. If you could conjure up images of the Flintstones, it certainly would help you get a clearer picture of what I’m talking about. In those days, survival was indeed a very crucial issue. With the threats from wild animals on the one hand, and the forces of nature on the other, it was survival of the fittest! That apart, there was also a lot of fear arising from the existence of other cavemen. Man had not yet become a social animal, and there was a lot of hostility among the cavemen. Each caveman regarded another as a threat to his own survival…his food, his domain, and yes, his mate, too! Of course, they had not yet begun living together, and so the first instinct was to attack one another. When two cavemen met, it was a question of who should attack and kill first. Killing meant the survival of the killer. They didn’t have an established language; their speech probably consisted mostly of grunts and sounds. Gradually, though, they started accepting the fact that they could be friends and that there was safety in numbers. However, how could each know whether the other caveman they met was hostile or friendly? It’s quite easy to picture the scene. Caveman Ugg is on his way to the local caveman shopping mall (looking out for 25

Mind Control Secrets a beast to clobber for dinner), when all at once he comes across this other caveman, Caveman Ogg. They spot each other and freeze. They eye each other from a distance. Ugg is dressed in deerskin while Ogg is dressed in bearskin—clearly signs of different cultures! As they advance, their hearts race. Each one suspects the other’s motives and wonders if the other is going to attack. Apparently, neither wants to start the fight that could end in loss of life. Once they come within a safe distance, they start circling each other like they’ve seen animals do. They scan each other for signs of weapons. Each one has a sharp flint in his hand. After a while of circling, there is no sign of attack. So what do they do? Both decide that there is not much danger. In an instant, they both drop their weapons and advance toward each other with exposed palms indicating they are unarmed. This process of building trust, when each party feels there is no threat from the other, is what’s called building rapport. It’s a concept that came into existence during the time of the cavemen and continues to this very day. Of course, today’s conditions are very different. We usually don’t start attacking strangers we meet on the way to work. But one thing is still the same: we still don’t trust most of the people we confront! Maybe distrust was handed down by cavemen, or maybe it’s because there are just too many con men and swindlers walking around today. Whatever the reason, trust is not something that comes easily. The funny thing is, we’re more likely to trust a person who has been introduced to us by a common friend than a person we meet directly. This process of trust-building is rapport.

26

Rapport: The First Key Before we go on, just a reminder: the ‘t’ in rapport is silent—the word is pronounced “rappor.” Got it?

Establishing Rapport When we talk about “mind control,” we must understand the importance of rapport. Rapport is the first and most important step toward building a relationship. Unlike the cavemen, we don’t walk about with weapons that we can throw down to show others we mean them no harm. We have to use more subtle ways to convince them of this. Rapport in modern terms means meeting people on their terms, not yours. This is where you establish trust and credibility. To do this, you must first be able to meet people on their conditions, because people tend to have the “What’s in it for me?” idea running in the background. This is a mistake most of us make; we always try to judge others by our level of thinking, when it is much easier to use to their level of thinking. Most people are driven by profit motives, profit meaning not just money, but benefit to themselves, their family, etc. All you have to do is convince them that not only do they have nothing to lose from this transaction, but that, on the contrary, they have a lot to gain. This might seem very difficult at first glance. How do you convince a person they have a lot to gain from a relationship with you when you apparently don’t have much to offer? The secret to remember is that you don’t really have to give the person something in terms of material goods. There’s a lot more a person can offer. You can call it the dynamics of social relationships, if you wish. You can give a person a lot without parting with your material goods and money. As a matter of fact, people are looking for people

27

Mind Control Secrets like you, people who have a lot to offer. Give it to them, and you will have them eating out of your hand. Here’s how to do it. We all know that a lot of, if not most, communication takes place in a nonverbal manner. You don’t even have to open your mouth and speak to get an idea across. You can depend on body language to do it for you. Why not use this to our advantage? How many times have you heard that it’s not just what you say but how you say it that matters? Keep this in mind and you’ll find things are a whole lot easier. You should also remember that, from now on, you’re moving toward becoming an expert communicator. Whatever you’re doing is now no longer the product of the unconscious; rather, you’re working on the conscious level. The other person, by contrast, is not fully aware of what’s happening. You are working on their unconscious mind. The person will then have no idea what hit them. Before the person can actually think of what happened, you will have your wish fulfilled. Rapport Key: People like others who are like them. This does not necessarily mean there should be a physical similarity between two people. It can have the same effect if two people are in fact doing the same things like standing or sitting in the same positions, assuming the same postures and talking about a topic on which they mutually agree. • • •

Have you ever yawned because someone else yawned? When a friend stubs his toe, do you flinch and make the same type of face? Have you ever looked up because others were looking up?

28

Rapport: The First Key • •

Have you ever started itching because you watched someone else scratch? Have you ever ended up picking up a Southern accent because you were talking to someone from the South a tad too long?

Mirroring and Matching The most basic level of rapport is physically mirroring the person you are targeting. When you mirror someone, you’re simply offering that person a reflection of himself or herself. As a matter of fact, you’ve been “mirroring” all your life. This is how you learned as a child. You learned verbal communication by going through three stages: babbling, mirroring, and echolalia. You AUTOMATICALLY will mirror anyone you have a rapport with. This doesn’t really come out of a conscious effort, but is rather spontaneous. This simple technique has a super-powerful impact because of the way people respond to their own behavior. It’s quite remarkable how people take a cue from somebody who apparently is trying to imitate them. There’s an old saying that goes, “Imitation is the sincerest form of flattery.” How true that really is! All of us seek approval and appreciation, and what better way to show appreciation than to do and say like the other person is doing or saying? When you offer back to your target their own behavior, they relate to it on a subconscious level and experience a sense of unity. There is little in life as satisfying as seeing a reflection of ourselves in another. This is one of the most powerful tools in mind control. When you see a couple of friends at a coffee shop in conversation, chances are you’ll find them sitting in the same

29

Mind Control Secrets position and making the same movements and gestures. If you are in a relationship (and you’re getting along), you will notice how you and your partner sit in the same physical position if you’re in close proximity with each other. You will also breathe with them. In physics, there is a law called “entrainment,” which states that if two items in motion are in close enough proximity, they will synchronize. If you put two grandfather clocks in the same room, for instance, their pendulums will eventually swing together. This seems also to work for living creatures. I remember being in New York City teaching this concept. During a break, I had a few of the students look around the room as we drank our coffee. You could plainly see that the people engaged in conversation were mirroring and matching each other to the point of having nearly all the same gestures and movements. They had known each other for only a few hours, and yet had established a common bond (learning mind control techniques), thereby establishing a very natural rapport with each other. Later that day, while walking to dinner with several of the students, we saw several examples of this natural occurrence: •

•

•

Two NYPD officers talking at a coffee shop, both leaning against the wall, gesturing with the hand not holding coffee. A couple in love, sitting on a park bench in intimate conversation, their movements perfectly synchronized. Two cab drivers in a very loud, animated conversation on directions to an address.

Since this happens in nature, let’s speed up this phenomenon.

30

Rapport: The First Key What you want to do is present to your target’s subconscious mind a mirror image of herself. This puts your target at ease at a subconscious level, since rapport is natural in friendship, and it speeds up the rapport process. First you want to match physically your target’s stance. You assume the same position as they maintain, sitting the same way or standing the same way. • • • •

Breathe at the same rate as they do. If they lean slightly, you lean the same way. If they cross their legs, you cross yours. If they adjust their clothes in some way, you adjust yours in like manner.

You have to be careful about something very important: your targets must not feel that you are trying to consciously mimic them or are in any way making fun of them. So how can you match them without making it too obvious? That’s easy! Try this: 1. Slow down your responses. Wait about one to three seconds before matching their action or posture. 2. Keep your focus on your target; never mind if the movement is not natural to you. If your target does it, then you do it. If you’re focused on how you feel, you are not focused on your target. Your internal state is not important. Only the goal of establishing rapport matters. Try this as an experiment. The next time you’re in a conversation with someone and you feel there’s a rapport, lean against a wall or lean back and continue talking.

31

Mind Control Secrets Watch what happens. A few seconds later, the other person will lean as well. Then cross your arms…the other will follow suit. The more you are in rapport, the more mirroring and matching will occur. Once you are in complete rapport, you’re in a position to persuade the other to do as you wish.

A Word of Caution! Now that you’re aware of this powerful tool, you will begin to understand why it’s so important that you be careful and aware of the messages you’re transmitting to your target nonverbally! If you are in rapport, the people you are communicating with will mirror your: • • • •

Frustration Hatred Anger Disbelief (in them, yourself, or a product)

I stress this because we see this all the time. In fact, historically, leaders have taken societies to war by having the populace mirror their feelings. Of course, this can also happen very subtly. Once, while teaching a class, I received some bad news. Even though I tried to not let my anger show, the class suddenly took on a very negative tone. The students were mirroring my internal state. I’d spent a great deal of time getting into rapport with the class, and now it was coming right back at me! It renewed my respect for this technology, which indicates that people will mirror their environment.

32

Rapport: The First Key

Exercises to Master Rapport Breathing: Mirroring someone’s breathing is subtle because breathing itself is such an extremely subconscious process. When you mirror and match another person this way, it’s almost impossible to detect, because it’s something we all have to do. Pick some targets (people) to match breathing with, in: • • •

A coffee shop A business meeting A party

Physical Posture: As stated before when people are in rapport, they mirror each other. When you do this consciously, you move into the area of gaining trust and confidence at will. To achieve this, you must practice being able to mirror and match others at will. The following steps will help you to get the hang of it. 1. Start in an easy place—your workplace preferably. 2. Pick and choose people you know rather well and mirror and match them in a conversation—you’re doing this anyway, but now move into the conscious level. 3. Pick a coworker you know the least and start a conversation, physically mirror and match the other person, maintain your focus on him/her. 4. Start a conversation with your boss and do the same. Note: Stay away from controversial subjects at this level. 33

Mind Control Secrets Now you are ready to move into a social setting. Start a conversation with someone in a coffee shop or restaurant, using the mirror and match technique.

Special Bonus: Remote Rapport Targeting To prove the power of this technology, go to a public place again, like, say, a coffee shop. Pick a target. Once you have the target spotted, get into the other’s peripheral vision (off to the side) and begin to mirror and match from a distance. This is especially fun at a coffee shop. Sit the way the other does. Breathe with the other. The other takes a sip; you take a sip (have the same kind of drink, if possible). You will be amazed at how, before long, your target will start a conversation with you. The other person will be drawn to you. The following story will illustrate the efficacy of this technique: I was driving down from Chicago to Florida to teach an advanced mind control class. On the way, I decided to test my “targeting” skills. I stopped at a Waffle House about midnight. I picked a person sitting at the counter. He was not like me at all physically. He was a big man (belly way over belt!) with long hair pulled back into a ponytail and a full beard, a leather vest, and a trucker’s wallet (the type with a chain to the belt). I’m short, in shape, short-haired, and clean shaven, and I was wearing dress slacks and a sport shirt. Opposites, if you will! After sitting for a while, I assumed the same physical posture as my target. I noticed my target was reading a paper while he drank his coffee and ate. I had a magazine, so I pretended to be reading it. He turned a page; I did also. If he took a bite of food, I would. He took a drink of coffee; of course, I did too.

34

Rapport: The First Key He refilled his coffee, so I got the waitress to refill my cup. About this time he started a conversation. He asked who I drove for (he assumed I, too, was a trucker). I just said I was on my way to a seminar. He looked at my reading material and asked if it was a martial arts seminar. I just nodded; as we talked, I kept the focus on him and on what he wanted from life. I knew I needed to test the level of rapport. As we talked more, my target stated that after this cup he was going to pull out and get back on the road. As he drank his coffee, every time he took a sip, I would also, only a very small sip. When his cup was empty, mine was still half full. I picked up my coffee and, taking a deep gulp, said it was good and that I would have one more. My target looked around, looked at his watch, and said, “I think I will have one more, too—have to drive late anyway! Could use the coffee.” He was in rapport and wanted to stay that way, so his conscious mind rationalized why he would stay (maybe this is why it is hard to get out of a bar with friends!). Before our conversation was over, he told me all of his personal problems, including a prostrate problem that caused sexual dysfunction. I state this because guys do not talk about this difficulty easily, except with close friends… even then, rarely. He stated it as if he knew me for years. When I suggested he see a hypnotist, he answered that he would. This again reminded me of the power of rapport and mind technology. Amazed? Practice these skills and see how much more you will be amazed!

35

Chapter 4

Communication Styles: The Second Key The goal here is to learn how your target thinks! Now that you know how to get into a subconscious rapport with someone, you need to know the secret to decoding their thoughts. When you begin to think about how people think, the process of how your mind works really becomes important. Many of us start to think about all the things psychology has taught us in recent years. Unconscious motives and the theories Freud, Jung and all the other great psychological minds have come up with in the last one hundred years come to our minds. I know all of this is great information, but it’s of little use to any of us who want to quickly influence people to our way of thinking (and acting). What you want is a quick way to decode what’s going on in your target’s head. Right? Well, the process of discerning that is what is called “neuropsychogenics.” We want to know, quickly, how a person’s mind is processing information. As for the why, which constitutes the deep psychological theories, we shall leave that to the researchers! I’ve hypnotized well over seventy-five thousand people, fifty thousand of those in the last three years. While I was doing this, I researched what worked in the real world. What I found was startling: people think in very simple ways. This is not to say people are simple—no! We are not! We each have a complex psychological makeup that affords 37

Mind Control Secrets us options relative to how we respond to the world. At the same time, how we really think is rather simple. The way people process information is very basic. You have five senses…visual, auditory, kinesthetic (feeling), olfactory (smell), and gustatory (taste). These are your only senses, and these are what your brain uses to process information. It’s logical to project that this is how other people will also process information. Most of the people you’ll ever deal with process information primarily in one of three ways: 1. Visual (seeing) 2. Auditory (hearing) 3. Kinesthetic (feeling) We use all of these to communicate, but there’s usually a predominant way in which a person likes to think and communicate. If you know how your target thinks and communicates, it puts you into a deeper level of rapport, thus causing the other to open up to your influence, i.e., to your way of thinking. I’d bet if you monitor most of your friends, especially your closest friends, you’d find you use the same communication styles. This is natural. You don’t have to work at communicating with them, because you’re already on the same wavelength. It sounds good to all of you, or it just feels right talking to them. See if any of the following apply to you, or to someone you know: Visual people are those who: •

Speak fast (remember, a picture is worth a thousand words!) they also use broken sentences and may 38

Communication Styles: The Second Key

• • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • •

jump ahead and finish your statements. Gesture a lot with their hands. Use a lot of pointed movements. Breathe shallow and fast; they may even get breathless if speaking on a subject they like. Are very mindful of how they look—colorful, and like to match (would rather look good than be comfortable!). Look up a lot with their eyes. Socialize a lot—like being seen in the right places at the right time! Are neat freaks. Are impatient. Are result-oriented—get the job done. Use SHOW ME as their watch words! Think very fast (speed of light versus speed of sound). Love graphs, charts, visual presentations, EYE CANDY. Like short clear, concise presentations that get to the point. Hate being interrupted—they may lose their thoughts. Ask questions that stimulate visual responses—“How will this look to the others?” Are keen on: “Can you see this happening? Would you like to see our information?” Use visual words: look, see clear, sharp, focus.

Auditory people: • • •

Speak slower and are rhythmic. Like long conversations. Tug at their ears or touch their mouths. 39

Mind Control Secrets • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Have deeper breathing, mid-chest range. Are more casual in dress—no bright colors, but still like to “match”! Are slower in their thought process but are more deliberate in their thinking. Like to talk things over with others as well as with themselves to check on how it sounds. Love animals, have a kinship with nature. Look to the sides a lot. Would rather live in the quite countryside than in a city. At a party, will huddle with others to talk. Like soothing music at work. Are good at handling people. Are more open to both sides of an argument. May over-explain things! Need to be told what to do. Need to be listened to. Do not like charts and graphs. Use a lot of stories and metaphors Can be talked out of things by others. Use auditory words: hear, talk, discuss, cry, buzz.

Kinesthetic people: • • • • • • •

Speak very slowly and deliberately. Touch chest or rub chin, use gestures that draw you in. Look down. Breathe slow and deep. Are very casual in dress, comfort being the key. Need to apply feeling to thoughts (“I am not sure how I feel about this”). “Huggy,” and may be moody. 40

Communication Styles: The Second Key • • • • • • •

Like parties where they feel comfortable. Make great counselors and brilliant business people. Like hands-on learning. Can read through manipulative presentations and people. Do not like graphs or charts. May be one step ahead of others in negotiations. Use feeling words: touch, grasp, handle, dig in.

To make it even easier, nature has given us a cue to find out how our target is processing information. In neuropsychogenics we call it the EYE-MOVEMENT PATTERN. This is simply automatic, unconscious eye movement that usually accompanies a particular thought process, indicating the accessing of one or more of the three primary sensory representational systems. Of course, when people are talking, they’re also thinking. In the process of thinking and talking, they move their eyes in what are known as eye-movement patterns. These movements appear to be signals of their attempts to gain access to internally stored or internally generated information in their brains. This information is encoded in the speaker’s mind in one of the representational systems. When a person “goes inside,” or retreats within, to retrieve a memory or to create a new thought, the person “makes pictures,” and/or “talks to herself,” and/or “has feelings and kinesthetic sensations.” With a little bit of practice, eye-movement patterns are easily observable behavior. When you watch people talking—and, of course, simultaneously thinking—you’ll notice that their eyes are constantly in motion, darting back and forth, up and down, occasionally glancing at objects and people, but just as much “focused” on inner experiences. As previously stated, these movements are signals of 41

Mind Control Secrets the way they are thinking. In the descriptions that we will be discussing, “looking” would refer to the movements of a person’s eyes in the direction indicated, “left” meaning toward the speaker’s left, and “right” toward his/her right. It would be helpful to keep in mind that this accessing behavior represents “looking” internally; i.e., during the moment of information retrieval, people are generally not conscious of external visual stimuli. Rather, they are concentrating on internally stored or generated images, sounds, words, and feelings. Please observe also that the words in parentheses in each category indicate the kind of information being accessed. Internationally famous therapist Virginia Satir discovered that the eyes move as they access memories and came up with Eye-Accessing Movements. • • •

How you ask the question determines where your eyes will go. How people move their eyes tells you what part of their brain they are accessing. You process information internally either visually, auditorily or kinesthetically, olfactorily or gustatorily.

A small percentage of people are reversed. Some say if you are left-handed, then your eye-accessing movements are reversed. This also varies from nation to nation. The French, for instance, use more gustatory and olfactory accessing than we do. The easiest way to remember these is: • • •

If you look up, you are making pictures. If you look side to side, you are making sounds. If you look down, you are either talking to yourself or accessing a feeling. 42

Communication Styles: The Second Key Until you get used to it, just remember: pictures, sounds, feelings. Then learn each side. The diagram illustrates the direction of a person’s eye-accessing movements as you are facing the person, that is, your left is the other’s right. When we process information internally, the process itself can be visual, auditory, or kinesthetic. It is possible to access the meaning of a word in any one, or in a combination of the three primary sensory channels. Vc

Visual Constructed:

Ac

Auditory Constructed:

K

Kinesthetic:

43

Seeing images of things never seen before, or seeing things differently than they were seen before. Questions include: “What will you look like at ninety?” Hearing sounds not heard before. Questions include: “What would your name sound like backward?” “How would a dog barking, a car horn, and children playing sound?” Feeling emotions, tactile sensations (sense of touch), or proprioceptive feeling (feelings of muscle movement). Questions include: “Is your nose cold now?” “What does it feel like to run?”

Mind Control Secrets Vr

Ar

Ad

V

Visual Remembered:

Seeing images of things seen before, in the same way they were seen before. Questions include: “What does your coat look like?” Auditory Remembered: Remembering sounds heard before. Questions include: “What’s the last thing I said?” “What does your alarm clock sound like?” Auditory Digital: Talking to oneself. Questions include: “Say something to yourself that you often say.” “Recite the Pledge of Allegiance.” Visual: The blank stare is visual—either constructed or remembered.

To keep this as simple as possible while you’re learning this, it is best to focus on the fact that if your target looks up, they are making a picture. If they look to the sides, they are making sounds. If they look down, they are talking to themselves or feeling something. A good example of how you can use eye-accessing cues is in the case of a car sale. A salesman might stress different features to a customer depending on the customer’s primary representational system in order to “step into his model of the world.” For an auditory customer, the salesman could stress the thud of the reinforced doors, the upscale stereo system,

44

Communication Styles: The Second Key the whisper-quiet ride. To a visual customer, the salesman would stress the clean, sleek lines, the clear view of the scenery through the large tinted windows and sunroof, and might ask them to picture themselves behind the wheel. A kinesthetic person might respond more to the feel of the full grain leather seats, the thought of the wind in their hair, and the warm sun on their face through the sunroof as they drive along the highway. You also have to stress that even though they have a primary system, you should try to appeal to all systems, because we all use more than one. This would also take into account another person who might be involved in the decision making process, i.e., the spouse or parent accompanying the buyer. Consider an example from your personal life. An auditory husband might leave socks on the floor, dishes on the table, shoes in the corner, newspapers here and there. A visual wife might feel that she married a total slob who doesn’t appreciate her effort to create a pleasant, tidy house. “If he loved me,” she would think, “he would care that I spend all day cleaning.” On the other hand, the auditory husband may come home from work and sit down to read the newspaper. Meanwhile, the wife has the food processor running, the TV is on, and one teenager is blasting the CD player while the other is teasing a barking dog. The husband, who is auditory and trying to engage a visual task, screams, “Can’t I get some peace and quiet in my own home?” Again misunderstandings can occur. It might save a trip to the divorce court if both partners realized that: •

To this wife, the visual appearance of the home or her clothes or the lawn is important to her, though it makes little impression on an auditory person. 45

Mind Control Secrets •

To this husband, the bombardment caused by of all these sounds at once would be like a visual person watching a laser show in an electrical storm!

Just understanding differences can make things run much smoother. Finally, the situation of teenagers coming home late and the parents asking where they’ve been is one way to utilize eye-movement cues. If the teenager looks up and left, they are visually remembering and telling you where they were. If they look up and right (visual construct), it is possible they are fabricating a story that you would accept. It doesn’t necessarily mean that they are lying, but it may be that the parent ought to ask a few more questions. Eye-Accessing Cues—A Coworker For this exercise, ask a coworker (or business associate) to sit opposite you in a comfortable chair as you ask the following fifteen questions. Next to each question, note the eye-accessing cues you observed by writing beside each question the abbreviations in bold below:

Vc Vr V Ac Ar

Visual Constructed—movement up and to the person’s right Visual Remembered—movement up and to the person’s left Visual—movement straight ahead and eyes defocused Auditory Constructed—movement sideways to the person’s right Auditory Remembered—movement sideways to the person’s left

46

Communication Styles: The Second Key K Ad

Kinesthetic—movement down and to the person’s right Auditory Digital—movement down and to the person’s left

Example: How does your car’s engine sound? Ar 1. Think of your favorite song and hum it to yourself. _____ 2. Which is colder, your right or your left hand? _____ 3. What would you look like if you weighed fifteen pounds less? _____ 4. Who was the first person you saw yesterday? _____ 5. Think about the last time someone cut you off when you were driving your car. _____ 6. What does a car alarm sound like? _____ 7. What does your mother’s voice sound like? _____ 8. When you are feeling sad, what lifts your spirits? _____ 9. How much is 125 divided by 5? _____ 10. Who was the last person you spoke with before you came here? _____ 11. Recite “Mary had a little lamb” silently. _____ 12. What does it sound like when the television is on, the phone rings, and someone knocks on the door? _____ 13. Think about the last time you felt proud of something you did. _____ 14. What color are the walls in your bedroom? _____ 15. Imagine what a purple dog would look like. _____

47

Mind Control Secrets Representational Systems Overview Seeing (Visual) Eyes

These people look up to their right or left, unfocused.

Gestures

Their gestures are quick and angular, and include pointing.

Breathing

High, shallow, and quick.

Speech

Fast.

Words

The words that capture their attention include: See, look, imagine, reveal, perspective. They prefer pictures, diagrams, movies.

Hearing (Auditory) Eyes

These people look down to the left and may appear “shifty-eyed.”

Gestures

Their gestures are balanced, touching one’s face (i.e., rubbing the chin).

Breathing and

Mid-chest, rhythmic.

Speech

Speak rhythmically.

Words

The words that capture their attention include:

48

Communication Styles: The Second Key Hear, listen, ask, tell, clicks, in-tune. They prefer lists, summaries, quotes, readings.

Feeling (Kinesthetic) Eyes

These people look down to the right.

Gestures

Their gestures are rhythmic, touching their chest basically true for men)—Clinton.

Breathing and

Deep, slow with pauses.

Speech

Speak slowly.

Words

The words that capture their attention include: Feel, touch, grasp, catch on, contact.

Presentations

Toward [Goals]: achieve, attain, gain. Away from [Problems]: avoid, relieve, out.

To be more persuasive with all groups, make the representation BIGGER, CLOSER, MORE COLORFUL, 3-D, MOVIE. The following lists are predicates in language (verbs, adverbs, and adjectives) that have specific representational systems. A way of detecting the primary (most commonly used) representational system a person has in consciousness is by listening to the language, the sentences generated, and noticing the predicates used. 49

Mind Control Secrets

Visual See Picture Perceive Notice Look Show Appear Clear Pretty Colorful Hazy Observe Flash Focus Bright Scene Perspective Imagine View Vista Horizon Make a scene Tunnel vision Plainly see See eye-to-eye Mind’s eye Bird’s-eye view Catch a glimpse Bright future In light of Audtitory Sound

50

Communication Styles: The Second Key Hear Discuss Listen Talk Call on Quiet Inquire Noisy Loud Outspoken Articulate Scream Pronounce Remark Resonate Harmony Shrill Oral Whimper Mention Tongue-tied Ring a bell Loud and clear Idle talk To tell the truth Word for word Rap session Unheard of

Feel Relax Grasp

51

Mind Control Secrets Handle Stress Pressure Smooth Clumsy Rough Hard Grip Warm Rush Firm Euphoric Clammy Touch Calm Dull Burning Stinging Get the drift Boils down to Hang in there Sharp as a tack Slipped my mind Pull some strings Moment of panic Smooth operator Get the drift Think Decide Understand Know Develop Prepare Activate

52

Communication Styles: The Second Key Manage Repeat Advise Indicate Consider Motivate Unspecified Plan Anticipate Create Generate Deduce Direct Achieve Accomplish Initiate Conclude New knowledge Creative option Aware of Intensify Incorporate Differentiate Represent

Olfactory/Gustatory Smell Fragrant Stink Reek Aroma Pungent Sour

53

Mind Control Secrets Sweet Acrid Musty Fresh Bland Stale Fresh Bitter Salty Nutty Delicious Salivate Spoiled Sniff Smokey Bitter pill Fish notion Once you learn these, you can transpose them to their representational system. Don’t be like the therapist who says, “Get in touch with your feelings,” when the client is visual. Women like therapy more than men because they are more feelings-oriented (kinesthetic). It is harder for men to “get in touch” with their feelings. A person can also be thinking feelings and talking pictures. A nationally-known motivational speaker and expert in the psychology of peak performance, Tony Robbins, is auditory but represents himself visually on stage. Always communicate in the other person’s world. Use their terminology. Mirror their words, tonality, speed, etc. Using sales is all that therapy is . . . asking questions. Talk their language. Step into their model of the world.

54

Representational Systems Chart: Seeing (Visual) (60 percent) Eyes:

Look up to their left or right or may appear unfocused

Gestures:

Are quick and angular, include pointing

Breathing and speech

High, shallow, and speak quick, staccato

Words:

Visual terms: see, look, imagine, reveal perspective

Presentations:

Prefer pictures, diagrams, movies (eye candy) graphs, data

Hearing (Auditory) (25 percent) Eyes:

Level left and right, down to the left (may appear shifty)

Gestures:

Rhythmic, touching one’s face, (i.e., rubbing the chin), ears, mouth

Breathing and speech:

Midchest, rhythmic

Words:

Auditory terms: hear, listen, ask, tell, click

Presentations:

Prefer lists, summaries, quotes, readings

55

Mind Control Secrets Feeling (Kinesthetic) (15 percent) Eyes:

Down and to the right; look down a lot

Gestures:

Rhythmic, touching the chest, in close

Breathing and Speech:

Deep, slow, with pauses

Words:

Feeling words: feel, touch, grasp, catch on, contact

Presentations:

Toward (goals); achieve, attain, gain Away from (problems); avoid, relieve, out

Unspecified When you use unspecified terms, the person will fill in is the blank using her own representational system. If I say “think,” and you are visual, you will fill in with visual terms. Again, we all use all three, but there is usually one that is predominant. It may change by context. Someone may be visual at work and kinesthetic at home. (A kinesthetic, by the way, will drive a visual crazy.) Representational systems are the most powerful tool you can use to influence people. Observe how a person moves their eyes, listen to their language, step into their world. Rapport = Really All People Prefer Others Resembling Themselves. People like people who are like themselves. If you hear someone representing visually, feed back visually.

56

Communication Styles: The Second Key Training hint: If you ask, “Are there any questions?” with your hands pointing down, it will subconsciously discourage any questions. If you ask the same question with hands pointing up, you will encourage questions. Identifying Predicates—Coworker All of us use predicates that indicate our preferred representational systems, and your coworkers are no exception. For today, listen to the predicates used by a coworker with whom you spend a lot of time, and write down each predicate you hear. When you’ve finished, add the number of words from each system to determine the preferred representational system. Get the Drift—Represent I remember being in a situation that showed how this can be lifesaving learning. As consultant to the management of a steel mill, I was trying to see how best to help the employees comply with what the employers expected of them. While I was at it, an employee with twenty years on the job was being counseled about his drinking. He was told that he needed to stop drinking and start attending AA meetings regularly. Failing that, he faced the risk of being fired. The counselor, who was not mirroring him—in fact, was “in his face,” directly across from him—was asking him (in a very authoritative manner) how he felt about his drinking habit, and what feelings stopped him from attending AA meeting. The client responded that he did not see that he really had a problem with drinking, and, as such, he just could not see himself going to AA. The counselor responded even before the man was finished, “How will you feel when you’re fired from your job,

57

Mind Control Secrets and out on the street, after being twenty years on the job? Won’t this make you feel bad?” The client responded, “I just do not see anything like this happening at all. I can’t see myself out of work.” This went on for a while before they asked for my input. I started by mirroring the client; I then asked what it would take him to “see” himself going to AA. I also had him imagine SEEING himself cleaning out his locker, as he SAW the guards waiting to escort him out the gate for the last time. I asked him, “Can you SEE how your drinking has made the company SHOW you the door?” The client slumped in his chair, his eyes teared up, and he asked, “Does it really look that bad? Is the future really that dark?” I replied, “Darker than you now SEE! It is your choice to LOOK NOW at your drinking as something fine, when we all SEE a problem, a problem that will SEE you put out on the street.” “What can I do?” he asked. Now he was ready to be influenced and controlled, but he had to SEE the options and penalties. All I did was use this technology to help this man. What the counselor did was OK; in fact it would have been brilliant if the worker had been a feeling person. The client was not resistant; the counselor was. Here are some exercises to help you master decoding your target’s communication style and representational systems. Exercise 1: Celebrity Interviews Good interviewers are able to probe people with insightful questions. Watch shows that feature well-known public figures as they respond to questions. I suggest you tape a

58

Communication Styles: The Second Key few shows, like Larry King and Oprah Winfrey, and watch them. • • •

With the sound turned down, watch for eye movements. Do you notice any patterns? Now turn up the sound and listen to the words. Do they match the eye movements? Look for any down-right eye movements to tough questions.

Exercise 2: Game Shows These shows have ordinary, real people in different situations, especially shows that make the people think and retrieve information. “Jeopardy,” and “Who Wants to Be a Millionaire?” are good, to name two. Tape them, and again: • •

Watch for eye-movement cues Listen for predicate words.

Exercise 3: Controversial Subjects Some shows delight in the pitfalls of human conditions—Jerry Springer and the like. Watch these shows and repeat the above exercises. I also suggest you watch shows like “Meet the Press” and “Crossfire.” The results are, well, eye-openers! Life Application Here’s a story submitted by a student illustrating the power of this technology and ways to practice it in real life: After having recently completed some of the rapport skills that Dr. Horton teaches through his beginner tape series, this is what I came up with. What makes my story all the more interesting, I believe, is the fact that:

59

Mind Control Secrets 1. I have been practicing combat martial arts for thirty years and could’ve used those skills instead of the rapport skills under the circumstances, and 2. I was with my four-year old boy on the day I used my rapport skills INSTEAD of my martial arts fighting skills. When I look back on it now, I realize that it was a blessing, given the fact I would never want my son to experience witnessing his father engaged in the violent act of seriously harming anyone, much less a dangerous ex-felon who might pull out a knife or a gun and try and really hurt his father or anyone else. Twenty minutes after getting on a city bus headed for downtown Los Angeles with my four-year-old son, two men got on board and sat down across from us and started sharing in hushed tones experiences about their prison lives and some of the violent crimes they had committed. I glanced over a few times, just enough to notice the telltale signs of men who’ve done serious time behind bars: multiple prison tattoos done with pen ink, large upperbody mass and smaller leg development, prison tans, vacant eyes with cruel expressions, and hard faces. All the signs I’ve learned about from the time I’ve spent around Orange County Sheriffs and prison guards (including a brother-inlaw) who I’ve spoken to, personally trained, or visited at their workplaces. Having just started learning neuro-psychogenics, it hadn’t yet occurred to me that I could use what I was learning in “real life” and it was not just a clinical or therapeutic situation. I was still relying on all my other “life” skills that had taken care of me up to now. In fact, I was learning NPG to promote my Pain Management/Pain Control Practice that I was struggling to get off the ground, and had spoken 60

Communication Styles: The Second Key to Dr. Horton about ways that NFNLP could help me launch my business. The idea of using rapport skills to “connect” with someone that I would only normally “connect” with on a combat level was beyond the grasp of my mind. I quickly went through some options: Switching seats is out because the bus was overcrowded and people were in fact standing as well as sitting. There were still ten or fifteen stops to go before we got to my wife’s workplace, which put us too far away to walk (he’s a sixty-pound four-year-old, which is a little heavy to carry very far). Even if we did get off the bus now, it was a bad part of town to walk through, much less wait around to catch another bus. The fact that both of these guys were wearing army fatigue jackets and it was over ninety degrees outside didn’t escape my attention, either. Then it came to me—something in the tapes that Dr. Horton referred to as “Targeting.” I could start mirroring and matching their physiology. It didn’t matter which one, and it didn’t make sense to do both men because “targeting” doesn’t work like that. “I’ve got to pick just one,” I told myself, so I selected the man closest to me and noticed how he was sitting. I crossed my ankles like I was a mirror reflection of him, and did the same with my arms. Whenever he moved, I waited a few seconds and then I readjusted my posture to match his. Then the bus stopped and he actually got off, leaving me with his “friend,” who I immediately began pacing. I mirrored his movement at first, and then I matched it. Why mirror then match? It provided me with an opportunity to get into his particular rhythm gracefully. After just a few minutes, I began noticing the rise-andfall rhythm of his shoulders and thought I would make an effort to mirror his breathing patterns. He also had a habit of folding his arms across his chest, which made it easier to 61

Mind Control Secrets calibrate his breathing. Before I knew it, I was pacing his physiology INCLUDING his breathing. He even looked at his watch a few times, after which I looked at mine. Ten, maybe fifteen minutes went by, and the bus slowly emptied out as my son and I approached our destination. People got away from this “mean-looking” guy as quickly as possible. I sat there, using my rapport skills, confident, very confident, that I was actually connecting with this ex-con on an unconscious level. And before I thought of testing to see if we were in rapport by leading him, guess what! Three stops before I was to get off the bus with my son— are you ready?— he leans forward and actually manages what I’ll consider a smile—showing four upper teeth and all! And, like we’re cell mates, he asks me, “Hey, man, does this bus go all the way into Venice?” “I’m pretty sure it does” was my response, but I made sure to answer after a brief hesitation, because I wanted him to think I was really reading a newspaper I had been pretending to read to mirror the magazine he was reading. “Thanks, man.” He then glanced at my son, winked at him, and then went back to his magazine. The wink unnerved me a little, I have to admit, but better a wink than an icy stare, right? For those readers who don’t understand hard-core violent prison types—when you’re in their presence (especially if there are two or more of them!)—the response I got from this man speaks volumes about the rapport I achieved with him in the short period of time I paced him. You would have had to be there to get the full effect, and reading my words, short of a VAKOG novella, doesn’t do the experience justice. All I can say is, I was initially ready to go into combat mode based on my instincts, and I ended up using rapport techniques! You be the judge.

62

Communication Styles: The Second Key Did I use combat rapport skills? Absolutely! Just like the combat martial arts I practice. Only it’s taken me thirty years to achieve the skill level I’m at today with my mind and body as it pertains to martial arts. Whereas it literally took me as long as it takes to watch the “rapport” part of the tapes to learn the rapport skills that I used on the bus that day. I had to write this to let everyone know that I am just a beginner, and all I did was “paint by numbers” with what Dr. Horton taught.

63

Chapter 5

The Third Key: Effective Listening and Putting It Together Now that you understand the basics of both rapport and communication styles, it’s time to put them together. When you mirror and match someone physically, you also want to match their language and eye movements. This helps further deepen your level of rapport. When you do this consciously, you make your target feel comfortable, almost as though the two of you have known each other for years. IMPORTANT NOTE: Although being liked can be a by-product of rapport, it is important to remember that rapport is much more than simply being liked. To become a master of mental science, one who easily and fully establishes rapport with others, you must become an exquisite partner in the communication dance. To seek rapport with others is to invite them to dance, and then influence them in a manner that is persuasive, decisive, and, at the same time, smooth and elegant throughout the interaction, even as you reach a mutually desirable outcome. You might find it useful to think of rapport as how responsive the other person is to you and your positive intentions. You create rapport by being responsive to the other person through pacing and mirroring that person’s verbal and nonverbal behavior. The most basic rule of human nature is that people are primarily interested in talking about themselves and what 65

Mind Control Secrets they want. They are not really interested in what you think or want. To master rapport, you must accept the fact that you have to meet and accept people for who they are, not what you think they are or should be. A person’s thoughts are usually governed by self-interest. Rapport skills give you the upper hand in skillfully getting your way, though in a very subtle manner. When you let people talk about themselves or something they are passionate about, they will be deeply interested and will ultimately think you’re a genius and great conversationalist! To do this, you must learn to give up words like I, me, and mine. These must become the smallest part of your vocabulary. Consciously pick your words, because your target is the important thing on which to focus. If you give up the satisfaction you get from talking about yourself, and the pleasure you get from using I, me, mine, your personal power will increase exponentially. This will take some practice. It’s normal to talk about yourself but, as you learn this technique, you’ll easily master this skill. Also, you must understand one universal trait of all human beings, a trait so strong, it makes us do a lot of the things that we do, both good and bad. This is the DESIRE TO FEEL IMPORTANT and BE RECOGNIZED. The more important you make people feel, the more they will respond to you. Pretend everyone you meet has a huge, bright sign around their neck that says: “MAKE ME FEEL IMPORTANT!” The power of mirroring and matching allows you this special opportunity. Rapport skills will enhance your life and make you a great communicator. People will want to do what you want them to do. When people tell me they have problems with rapport techniques, their biggest problem

66

The Third Key: Effective Listening and Putting It Together is that they start with the techniques but then veer into talking about themselves. This kills rapport.

Exercises to Make People Glad They Talked to You! Imagine that someone of great importance, like the president, a famous movie star, or perhaps your personal idol, just came through the door. What would your initial reaction be? Most people do a quick intake of air, a slight gasp. This quick intake of air is how we show HONOR and RESPECT at the subconscious level. When you first meet someone, and every time after that, take a moment to acknowledge that person in this way, then act pleased to meet them. This will make them feel noticed, respected and important (Bill Clinton was a master at this skill, and so was Ronald Reagan. People wanted to be around them). Here are some exercises to ingrain these skills in your subconscious: 1. Exercise 1: Go to a coffee shop or restaurant and start a conversation with someone who is unlike you—the last person you would normally talk to. Use your rapport skills and focus on them; get them to talk to you (remember to talk little or none about you). 2. Exercise 2: At work, target someone from a distance, make contact after a few minutes, and again mirror and match at all levels and see where this takes you. 3. Exercise 3: Go to a department store, look for an obscure item, and ask an attendant for help. As you 67

Mind Control Secrets are being assisted, turn on your rapport skills. Ask them how they came to work there, where they are going next, etc. 4. Exercise 4: Get one of the goals you had in mind when buying this book. Now go and use your skills in this area. Here are some tips to help you listen as you work at building rapport skills. The first step in developing good listening skills is to become aware of why listening is important in your professional life and personal relationships. The second step is to practice using active listening skills. People have a tendency to think of listening as a passive activity, when the opposite is true. I had the opportunity to be the only non-law-enforcement person to attend the Federal Bureau of Investigation’s Crisis (Hostage) Negotiation course at the FBI Academy. The heart of this course is the concept of active listening. What’s interesting to those of us studying this field is that these negotiators deal daily with getting others to do what they want. They’ve found that the key lies in truly listening to the target and getting them to reveal the information the negotiator needs. The natural drawback is that most people have the desire to talk too much. We’re trained in most fields to gather information, then make a decision and move on. We don’t spend enough time letting the other person tell their story. Hostage negotiators have found it more effective to “talk the person out.” This calls for tremendous patience in listening in order to formulate a plan for the safe release of the hostages. 68

The Third Key: Effective Listening and Putting It Together Let’s take a cue from these experts and make this a part of our skills!

Guidelines for Good Listening • • • • • • •

Remember the rule to make them “feel important”! Never interrupt when the other person is speaking. Allow the speaker to complete his thought. Eliminate distractions. Maintain eye contact with the speaker, without giving the impression of “staring.” Show interest by pulling your chair closer and leaning forward. Keep your posture aligned with that of your target— mirror and match. Give verbal and nonverbal responses to what the speaker is saying.

Listening is a skill that improves with practice, but common obstacles to good listening can impede your progress. It seems obvious that having the television set on during a conversation would be a distraction and an obstacle to good listening. Our own attitudes and personality traits can also become obstacles to listening. We must take an honest look at ourselves and how we deal with the world in order to remove these obstacles. People who tend to be mistrustful, or who take a combative stance toward others, may find it difficult to engage in healthy and open listening. The same is true for people who get gratification from pleasing others or other forms of dependency…it becomes difficult to truly hear what people are trying to say when a person hears only what she needs to hear.

69

Mind Control Secrets

Common Obstacles to Listening • •

• •

•

• •

Being Judgmental: You listen only to gain support for the negative images you already have. Rehearsing: You actively create your argument against the speaker’s point of view as it is being presented. Mind Reading: You may disregard what the speaker is saying and try to surmise what she really means. Advising: Giving advice, instead of just listening, to make yourself feel needed. (Or it may be a way of distancing yourself from the speaker’s true feelings.) Pleasing: You’re so concerned about being nice and placating that you won’t hesitate to interrupt to agree just to maintain peace. However, it prevents you from hearing what the speaker needs to say. Filtering: You hear some things the speaker says, but not everything. Deflecting: You redirect by changing the subject or telling a joke when the topic is uncomfortable for you.

Again, we’re talking about active listening. True listening is more than passively being quiet while the speaker talks. It is half of an active collaborative method of communication. The first level of listening is attentive listening. For this type of listening, we convey that we are genuinely interested in the speaker’s point of view and what he has to say. The second level of listening is active listening. This type of listening assumes that communication is a two-way process, which involves giving feedback or reflecting the speaker. Active listening requires the listener to paraphrase, clarify, and give feedback. 70

The Third Key: Effective Listening and Putting It Together Paraphrasing is a vital component of active listening. By restating in your own words what the speaker said, you’re able to correct misconceptions as they occur and overcome the obstacles to listening. The speaker feels she has been heard and is understood. Clarifying provides more depth to the listening process than exclusively using paraphrasing. The purpose of clarifying is to ask questions, in an empathic and helpful way, about what the speaker is saying. Clarifying tells the speaker you’re really interested and want to know more about specific areas. Giving feedback involves providing your own thoughts on what the speaker has said, while avoiding the obstacles to good listening. This gives the speaker another opportunity to see you understand him. When we listen well to the speaker, we not only show that person care and respect, but we also show we’re open to the world around us.

Listening to Children Childhood is when people develop a level of self-esteem that may be with them throughout their lifetime. Indeed, a child who has been listened to is much more likely to develop a positive self-image than one who has not been heard. Listening to children makes them feel they matter! Children need to be heard, too. Use the following listening techniques to address the special needs of children: 1. Pay special attention as the child talks to you. Maintain good eye contact and eliminate distractions…all distractions. Children can tell by your reply whether or not they have your full attention.

71

Mind Control Secrets 2. Listen with due patience. Listen as if you have plenty of time. A child’s vocabulary is often limited. Frequently repetitive in their use of words, it may take them longer to express their ideas. 3. 3. Children sometimes need encouragement to talk. Children are generally inexperienced in the art of conversation, so the adult will have to ask some questions. A child is more willing to open up when he feels an adult is really attentive. 4. Listen to the child’s nonverbal messages. Children communicate not only through words, but also through their body language, facial expressions, tone of voice, energy levels and changes in behavior. Pay attention to the cues and respond in the way that is best for the child. 5. Pay attention to the child’s mood, and be sure the time and setting is right for the child to talk. Sometimes a child just wants to play or be left alone. Being playful with a child who wishes to play may also encourage them to open up. One of the most important principles of good communication is that success is measured according to whether what you do works! Another thing that will help you sharpen your listening and communication skills at this level is to eliminate negatives from your vocabulary.

What Does “Don’t” Mean? There is a stupid question if there ever was one! Everyone knows “don’t” means “do not.” So, is this a trick question or what? Let’s find out.

72

The Third Key: Effective Listening and Putting It Together Don’t think of Santa Claus! I have the feeling you now have an internal picture of the little man with a long white beard wearing the famous red suit. Or you heard Santa’s voice, internally, saying, “Merry Christmas! Ho! Ho! Ho!” You may have had a feeling of the fat man himself, or a smell or taste of Christmas. Now, don’t think of how old you are. You thought of your age or your birth date, right? The mind only works in positives. For the mind to understand and process what you don’t want to happen, the brain must first think about the action. It has to consider doing the action before it can consider not doing it. For instance, say I tell my client, “Don’t think of my competitor’s product for this job.” For his brain to make sense of that statement, my client must first have a representation of my competitor’s product (and maybe how it would fit this job!). If you tell a child, “Don’t play in the street,” she must first have an internal representation of playing in the street. Remember this when you tell your assistant, “Don’t be late for this next meeting.” The classic statement we hear all the time is, “Don’t worry.” In order to refrain from worrying and make sense of the directive (“Don’t worry”), the listener must first have an idea of worrying. Have you ever heard someone say to a salesperson, “Don’t worry about your sales slump”? It would be much better to say, “Be assured, you’ll be fine,” or “Relax, and focus on the positives. We all go through this.” The focus must always be on the desired outcome, or purpose, of the communication, and the extent to which outcome is achieved. To transfer understanding from yourself to another person, you need to make sure what you’re saying nonverbally supports what you’re saying verbally. Your state of mind and how you feel will affect the information you’re trying to convey. 73

Mind Control Secrets To illustrate, here’s an interesting exercise.

Negative/Positive Outcomes Exercise To ascertain the power of negative and positive outcomes, do the following exercise. Find a quiet place where you can concentrate without any distractions. This includes turning off any television or radio that may be playing in the background.

Words Associated with Negative Outcome Think about an event you do not want to happen or a situation you would find unpleasant or distasteful. This could be anything: your career, a personal relationship, a project you are working on, whatever. Concentrate on the event for a few minutes. Put yourself totally in the situation. Hear the sounds, picture the event, experience the feelings, etc. Notice the words that come to mind when you think of the negative outcome of that experience.

Words Associated with Positive Outcome Now think of the same situation, but this time, in a positive sense. Mentally, experience fully all of the positive aspects. Put yourself totally in the situation, hear the sounds, picture the event, experience the feelings, etc. Think about how great you will feel when you achieve what you want. Notice the words that come to mind when you think of the positive outcome of that experience. Which of the two above scenarios did you prefer? Probably the one with the positive outcome! The difference between the two events is not just in your mind. If someone had been watching you, they would have noticed a difference in your facial expression, your breathing and your

74

The Third Key: Effective Listening and Putting It Together body posture. Physiologically, you become what you think about. The difference between success and failure is how you envision your outcome. Concentrating on what you don’t want to happen, sometimes known as worrying, can have a negative impact on more than just your physical body. It has to do with how your brain processes outcomes and desires. Your brain ignores negatives. You may say to yourself, “I don’t want to be late for the meeting,” but what your brain registers is LATE. The way to “trick” your brain, if you will, is to tell yourself, “I want to get to the meeting ten minutes early.” Your brain hears “early,” and that is what it records as your desired outcome. It may be difficult at first to eliminate negatives from your thoughts and speech, but with a little practice it can be done. You will be amazed by the results. For practice, complete the next exercise. Then we will return to the best way to create the outcomes that will give you the results you want.

Eliminating Negative Suggestions Exercise Most of us use the “don’t” word on a regular basis. We say things like, “Don’t forget to pick up bread and milk on the way home.” What the brain hears is, “Forget to pick up bread and milk.” I can assure you, that is exactly what happened. You forgot the bread and milk. For this exercise, keep track of how many times you hear the word “don’t” used around you. If possible, write the sentences down. Advertisements can be a good source of negative suggestions. Beneath each sentence, write a more positive way to express the desired outcome. (Note: 75

Mind Control Secrets You may want to carry around a pocket notebook so you can jot the sentences down as you hear them.) Negative Suggestion: Don’t forget to call the client about tomorrow’s meeting. Positive Suggestion: Let the client know we’ll be meeting tomorrow. Negative Suggestion: Don’t put that file away; I’m not done looking it over. Positive Suggestion: Keep that file out until I’m done looking it over. REMEMBER TO TELL PEOPLE WHAT YOU WANT THEM TO DO! You can also decide to tell them the opposite. In a personal setting, you might say, “Don’t think about how much fun it would be to go out with me tonight.” In a business arena, “Yes, that other model is a nice car. Don’t worry about how it was recalled last year for safety reasons. I’m sure it’s fine now.” If you practice these skills, you’ll be amazed how you will be able to get people to follow you in ways you never thought possible. Use these skills with respect and honor.

Thought Awareness, Rational Thinking and Positive Thinking These three related tools are useful in combating negative thinking. Negative thoughts occur when you put yourself down, criticize yourself for errors, doubt your abilities, expect failure, etc. Negative thinking is the negative side 76

The Third Key: Effective Listening and Putting It Together of suggestion—just as making positive statements to yourself helps you to build confidence, improve performance and improve your mental skills, negative thinking damages these things.

Thought Awareness Thought awareness is the process by which you observe your thoughts for a time, perhaps during a performance or a training session, and are aware of the thoughts going through your head. It’s best not to suppress any thoughts. Just let them run their course while you observe them. Watch for negative thoughts while you observe your “stream of consciousness.” Normally, these will appear and disappear being barely noticed. You may not even notice them at all. Examples of common negative thoughts are: • • • • •

worries about performance a preoccupation with the symptoms of stress dwelling on consequences of poor performance self-criticism feelings of inadequacy

Make a note, whether mental or physical, of the thought, and then let the stream of consciousness run on. Thought awareness is the first step in the process of eliminating negative thoughts—you can’t counter thoughts you don’t know you think!

Rational Thinking Once you’re aware of your negative thoughts, write them down and review them rationally. See whether the thoughts have any basis in reality. Often you will find that negative thoughts disappear when you challenge them and see that

77

Mind Control Secrets they are obviously wrong. They often persist only because they escape notice.

Positive Thinking and Affirmation You may find it useful to counter negative thoughts with positive affirmations. You can use affirmations to build confidence and change negative behavior patterns into positive ones. You can base affirmations on clear, rational assessments of fact, and use them to undo the damage that negative thinking may have done to your self-confidence. Examples of affirmations are: • • • • •

I can achieve my goals. I am completely myself and people will like me for myself. I am completely in control of my life. I learn from my mistakes. They increase the basis of experience on which I can draw. I am a good, valued person in my own right.

Traditionally, people have advocated positive thinking almost recklessly, as a solution to everything. It should, however, be used with common sense: no amount of positive thinking will make everyone who applies it an Olympic champion marathon runner (although an Olympic marathon runner is unlikely to have reached that level without being pretty good at positive thinking). First decide—rationally—what goals you can realistically attain with hard work, and then use positive thinking to reinforce these.

78

The Third Key: Effective Listening and Putting It Together

Stress To help you understand more about positive thinking and stress, here’s a short quiz from the work of Dr. Totko and Dr. Olgilive*, whom many consider the leaders in sports psychology. All of the questions are to be answered either True or False. 1. Under high levels of stress, athletes typically have a broad attention span. T or F 2. The clammy feeling we often get when stressed is caused by our body’s natural defense against bleeding to death. T or F 3. Elite level performers have fewer nervous reactions to stress than do non-elite level performers. T or F 4. High levels of stress make it more difficult to think clearly. T or F 5. Getting sick to your stomach and throwing up when nervous is your body’s way of telling you that you are overstressed. T or F 6. Caffeine exaggerates the physical and mental effects of stress. T or F 7. The body’s stress response, which is commonly referred to as the fight-or-flight response, allows us to do superhuman feats. T or F 8. The only time stress is good is when there is no stress. T or F 9. Sighing as you exhale is more relaxing than not sighing. T or F 10. Under stress, athletes often revert back to their most well-learned behaviors. T or F

79

Mind Control Secrets

Answer Key 1. False. Under high levels of stress, athletes tend to have a narrow attention span, often referred to as tunnel vision. Attention may also focus on the athlete’s internal thought process which can lead to “choking” under pressure. 2. True. One of the physical responses of the body to stress is to divert blood away from the small vessels near the skin. This provides a defense against bleeding to death from wounds, but gives the skin a cold, clammy feeling. 3. False. Elite-level performers have just as many nervous reactions to stress as any other type of performer. However, elite athletes often interpret these reactions as being more positive and beneficial than do other athletes. 4. True. Clear thinking is more difficult in pressure situations. This is why coaches and athletes must constantly practice what they are going to do and how they are going to respond in pressure-packed situations. 5. False. So that more blood is available to the large muscles of the body in preparation for strenuous physical activity such as fighting or running away, the digestive system shuts down. During this shutdown, the acid in your stomach makes you feel nauseated which sometimes results in throwing up. This is a normal reaction to stress. 6. True. Caffeine tends to exaggerate the physical and mental effects of stress. Knowing this, coaches and athletes should avoid caffeine products before entering potentially stressful situations. 7. True. Under stress, the body produces adrenalin, which provides a powerful, quick burst of energy sometimes resulting in superhuman feats. 80

The Third Key: Effective Listening and Putting It Together 8. False. There are a number of stresses which are good. For example, being elevated to the starting team brings additional stress which most athletes would enjoy. Another example of positive stress is physical and mental training. All athletes are under stress when, during training, they push themselves to the edge so that their body will adapt to the demand and get stronger. 9. True. For some reason, letting out an audible sigh as you exhale is very relaxing. There are a number of additional relaxation techniques which involve breathing exercises. 10. True. In stressful situations, athletes often revert back to behaviors they are familiar and comfortable with. This is one of the reasons why athletes should try to learn and perfect new skills and techniques in the off-season. In conclusion, your reaction to stress will affect every cell in your body. Regardless if the reasons are real or imaginary, your reactions are similar. We each have a biological alarm clock that goes off automatically, whether we want it to or not. This reaction is valuable if you are about to be hit by a car but it has disadvantages if you are trying to settle down and concentrate on your game. By knowing what the reactions are, athletes can learn to interpret these responses as being normal and perhaps even beneficial to their performance. Other References: Olgilvie, B. Pro-mind.com

81

Chapter 6

Strategies Have you ever seen people at a restaurant trying to decide what they’ll order? They may look up, pause, look down, lick their lips, touch their stomachs, and then order something. They may repeat the options to themselves, either in their heads or out loud (“A quarter-pound cheeseburger, hmm”). They may even ask someone else, “What’s good?” (Hope their tastes are similar!) Whatever they do, they’re running some type of strategy and most, if not all, of it is preconscious. We’re not aware of how we make decisions. We just do. Psychology tells us that it’s a learned behavior, which it is. Once learned, though, it’s put out of our conscious awareness. Even a Pavlovian response can be considered a learned strategy. Think about the classical Pavlov training. A dog is repeatedly presented with food, and a bell is rung. Eventually, the bell alone will elicit a saliva response in the dog. Somewhere in that dog’s brain, it’s learning: Bell = food = eat, or, Food = bell = eat. So it is with humans. We learn a strategy and then we use it over and over, until we either replace or change it. Problems begin to occur when our strategies no longer work, or when we use an inappropriate strategy. You see this when someone uses a strategy that works in business (profit and loss) in their personal relationships. They bail at the first hint of effort. To make this easy to learn, let’s go back to the example at the beginning of the chapter. Think about what you ate the last time you went to a restaurant. How did you decide 83

Mind Control Secrets what to have? Did you look at the menu (visual), then mentally taste the food (gustatory or kinesthetic)? Possibly you said something to yourself (auditory) when you found something you wished to order. Then you exited your decision-making program. (An aside: one reason it’s difficult for some people to order food when they’re really hungry is that they get stuck in the program; they keep playing options… “That sounds good,” “That looks good,” “I always liked that . . . ,” etc). This is a simple example, but you have a strategy for EVERYTHING you do, and a lot of those strategies overlap. You may use the same style of strategy in different contexts. This may or may not be problematic. I worked with a man who used his business strategy (which made him rich) to find a wife. He found his prospect (business venture), did his research (dating), found he wanted to acquire the property, and was willing to pay the asking rate (marriage). So they got married. He then took a hands-off approach, provided financial investment (bought the house and cars) and basically ignored his wife unless there was a problem (the way he would run a business). What he actually needed was a romantic strategy. The good part is, you can change, install, or remove a strategy. This is one of the things we do with hypnotic suggestions. People have their own strategies for everything they do. They use these strategies when they communicate. These strategies are formed by the primary (lead), secondary and tertiary representational systems of the person. For example, a person can use a VISUAL, AUDITORY or KINESTHETIC strategy for buying a car. SEE a car you really like; HEAR good things about the car; drive the car and it FEELS good. A person might use these strategies to choose a car, then buy the car and rationalize the costs. 84

Strategies There are a lot of nuances to strategies. There are internal and external cues, as well as what are known as Meta Programs. Meta Programs are strategies you use in every situation, and you use them to develop other strategies. We’ll go into those later. Right now, I want to show you how you can use this information today in your work. First, when a prospective client calls or comes into your business, ask them what they need to help them make a decision about your services. Then listen to what and how they say it. Do they need to hear from others that your product or service worked for them? Do they want to see something in print about you? Do they want to feel comfortable with you? Repeat back what they say, and then give them what they want, or tell them you will supply them with what they need when they come in. Second, ask people questions about their decision making. For instance, if you run a hypnosis clinic or weightloss service, ask clients how they know when it’s time to eat. Do they see others eating? At dinnertime, do they feel they must eat? Do they have a craving when they hear the sound of a bag of chips opening? When they see food, is their first response to eat? Or do they feel they must eat when they feel good…or feel the need to eat when they feel bad? (Note: You’ll find a lot of overweight people don’t use HUNGER as a cue to eat. A naturally-thin person will almost always use HUNGER as the key cue of when to eat. They will not eat if they are not hungry, so they’re seldom overweight.) Third, try installing the following eating strategy for a few of your clients. You can do this by having them mentally rehearse the program while in a trance. The next time you’re presented with a stimulus for food (by seeing others eating, or when it’s dinnertime), check your stomach to see if you are hungry. If not, exit, saying to yourself, “You are not hungry. There is no reason to eat.” If 85

Mind Control Secrets you are hungry, ask yourself, “What would taste good and help me to achieve my other goals (weight loss, getting in shape, etc.)?” Imagine tasting the food and thinking, “How will this feel, later?” If the reply is negative, repeat the selection process until you find a healthy choice. Reinforce this with direct hypnosis, and you will be amazed how this will add to (or subtract from) your clients’ results. The following example is how I used strategies in a clinical setting. I had a client on whom I’d been using hypnosis as a form of therapy. This client had tried hypnosis in the past for weight loss with limited success. Now she was stuck. She would do very well at work and through the main part of the day. She would have a small piece of fruit in the morning and a light lunch if she was hungry, or she would walk, or not stop after work for a snack. She was making notable progress. She would, however, start eating at night and would overeat. Since she had used hypnosis with some success, I thought we would see what her strategy was for night eating. She relaxed and I asked her what happened when she got home. At first she just said, “It seems like I walk in and start eating.” “So you have a refrigerator by your door?” I asked. “Tell me what happens as you walk inside your door.” “Well, I open the door and I see an empty apartment.” She was divorced, and her youngest was in college. “Then what?” I prompted.

86

Strategies “I hear a voice that says a woman is not supposed to be alone.” “Whose voice?” I asked. “My mother’s.” “Then what happens?” I asked. “I feel bad, like a little girl, a bad little girl,” she replied softly. “Then what?” I probed. “I hear another voice and it says, ‘EAT SOMETHING. YOU’LL FEEL BETTER.’” (Her mother again.) “Then what do you do?” I prompted. “I eat something, and I feel a little better. Then I feel guilty because I’m supposed to be trying to lose weight.” “Anything else?” I ask. “I hear that voice again: ‘EAT SOMETHING! YOU’LL FEEL BETTER!’” And off she’d go on a binge again! She had developed a strategy of night binging over the years, and she now used it automatically to deal with her feelings of guilt and loneliness. The technique I decided to use was to bypass the whole mess. When she opened the door, she’d tell herself it was so nice to choose to live alone. 87

Mind Control Secrets She would also make plans to do things she had put off for years: dance class, going to movies, etc. We also did some re-parenting about the intent of what her mother meant. This client did quite well. I urge you to track your internal processes when you’re making decisions so you can learn about strategies firsthand. This is an advanced NLP process, but once you’re comfortable with the idea, it will get easier, and it can be a very useful tool to learn more about how people think. Remember, the why is not very useful. In the above example, we could have spent a lot of time on why. Why had her mother behaved so? If we change the behavior first, though, we remove the emotional charge. Then we can change the program.

Meta Programs We’ve already talked about how people use strategies to make decisions or create beliefs. These strategies aren’t conscious; far from it. They are strategies you use at the unconscious level. Even people who use the same strategies, though, may arrive at very different conclusions. For instance, one person may mentally picture several options and choose one that feels right, while another may mentally picture the same options but feel overwhelmed by the sheer number of choices, and be unable to choose at all. What causes this? Differences like these are caused by Meta Programs. The word “meta” simply means “outside of,” so Meta Programs are mental programs outside of your decision-making strategies. You can think of Meta Programs as habits of thought. They’re the processes we use every day to filter what we pay attention to from what we ignore. While your

88

Strategies conscious mind can only pay attention to about seven (give or take a couple) things at once, your senses are bombarded by millions of perceptions every second. You need some way to filter through all that input and decide what needs your attention. That’s where your Meta Programs come in. Sometimes the Meta Program we use isn’t necessarily the best one for the situation. That was really bad a couple of decades ago, when scientists still thought you were stuck with the Meta Programs you had. Fortunately, research by Robert Dilts showed that people can change or replace their Meta Programs through the use of NLP. Please don’t think I mean that some Meta Programs are good and some are bad. All of them can be either good or bad; it’s depends on where and when you use them. In fact, you may use one Meta Program in one situation and another under different circumstances. Most of us lean toward certain programs, though. It’s helpful to know which programs you’re using, and how they affect you. It’s also good to be able to recognize what Meta Programs other people are using. Once you know what forms the basis for other people’s strategies, you can use that information to build rapport and persuade them to your point of view. Of course, once you know what lies underneath your own thought processes, you have the freedom to change the way you operate, too. With that in mind, let’s look at a few of the Meta Programs.

Toward vs. Away-From In this program, you’re either focused on getting what you want, or not getting what you don’t want.

89

Mind Control Secrets It’s common for people with problems to use the awayfrom program and express themselves in terms of what they don’t want. Unfortunately, they sometimes focus so much on what they don’t want that they don’t know what they do want. Not only do they not know what they want, but they don’t even perceive anything they want. It’s like it’s not even there. When you constantly focus on what you don’t want, you may end up believing that something you might want doesn’t even exists. Another downside is that away-from thinking constantly draws your attention to negatives, and if you can’t see anything but the negatives, you can’t get away from them! Because energy follows attention, you’ll likely end up seeing, remembering and even attracting more negative experiences. It also creates problems in goal-setting. If you’re moving away from something (i.e., I don’t want to be in debt), you may never know when you reach your goal…or you may relapse into having the same goal once again. Not that away-from Meta Programs are all bad. In certain contexts, they are more useful than toward programs. For instance, soldiers during combat missions might have a priority of “Don’t shoot our own guys.” This is away-from thinking, but it avoids many “friendly fire” tragedies. As a default program, though, toward thinking is much better at creating a healthy, happy life. That’s probably why Western society usually rewards people who have toward thinking. It’s certainly the better choice for setting goals. Imagine the differences in these two goals: I don’t want to be in debt. (Away-From thinking.)

90

Strategies I want to pay off all my credit cards and student loans and then have enough money to save $1000 every month. (Toward thinking.) As I said before, though, all Meta Programs can have downsides. For instance, toward thinking can lead you to make unwise or risky decisions without thinking about the potential dangers to be avoided. At the same time, you can see how knowing whether your target uses away-from or toward thinking can help you influence the decision they reach, simply be putting their options in terms they understand. Do you need to motivate your prospective client toward your services or away from your competitor’s? Once you know, you can easily influence a person’s decision in your favor.

Best-Case vs. Worst-Case Scenario When you use this Meta Program, you’re either focused on the possibilities of a situation or on the problems. Generally, seeing the best-case scenario is a more optimistic way of seeing the world, while worst-case thinking puts you in a negative frame of mind. Putting it that way might make best-case-scenario thinking seem the better of the two, but that’s not necessarily true. When you realistically examine the worst possible case and plan for it, anything else that happens seems easy by comparison. If you use best-case thinking all the time, without exception, you could be naïve to risk, possibly trusting people who shouldn’t be trusted. That said, though, many people have problems with consistent worst-case thinking in their lives. If you constantly use worst-case thinking, you may be unable to envision

91

Mind Control Secrets any kind of positive outcome for yourself. You may get stuck in a self-reinforcing loop that leads to panic or depression. Even if you realize that your thinking doesn’t make much sense, without the means to change it, you’re stuck in your worst possible situation. Here are a couple of examples of extreme best-case and worst-case thinking: I paid attention in class, so I don’t need to study. This test will be a breeze! (Best-Case Scenario thinking.) I can’t possibly pass this test, no matter how hard I study. I might as well stay home. (Worst-Case Scenario thinking.) Many successful and happy people find that the best use of this Meta Program lies in the middle. Think of it like, “Expect the best, plan for the worst.” Again, you can see how you can easily influence a person by discovering their Meta Program and then persuading them of the best-case scenario if they agree with you (or buy your service) or the worst-case scenario they might experience if they don’t.

Big Chunk vs. Little Chunk When you use big-chunk thinking, you see the “big picture.” It’s helpful for envisioning, getting perspective and setting direction. Little chunk thinking sees the details. It’s useful for putting a plan into action and making progress in manageable steps. Like all Meta Programs, both sides have their place. How can you set goals if you can’t envision the bigger outcome? On the other hand, how can you reach your goal without seeing the steps you need to take to get there?

92

Strategies I’m going to own a new sports car! (Big Chunk thinking.) I’m going figure out how much I can afford, then I’ll research cars to see which ones fit my budget. (Little Chunk thinking.) Each of those goals is good in its own way, but you really need both—the vision and the plan—to successfully own the car of your dreams. Big chunk thinking leads you astray when you dream ineffectively, but little chunk thinking can lead you to obsess and not be able to “see the forest for the trees.” Each is helpful, but only in the right context. There are many more Meta Programs under which you operate every day. (Experts count between 50 and 60.) Others include Self Reference vs. Other Reference, Association vs. Disassociation, Match vs. Mismatch, and Proactive vs. Reactive. I’ve put a more detailed chart below. Knowing the programs is only part of the puzzle, though. Once you know which Meta Programs a person uses, and how they help or hinder, you need to know how to use them to your advantage. If you look at your own Meta Programs and realize they’re holding you back, you need to know how to change them. Imagine the freedom of being able to recognize how your brain is operating against you and being able to train it, like a computer, to run a whole new “program.” Imagine seeing the programs under which another person operates, and being able to use that knowledge to gently persuade them to your way of acting or thinking.

93

Mind Control Secrets

Motivational Meta Programs: How people process information that influences their behavior. Meta Program Type Choice Points 1. Decision Making Self Others Data/Information 2. Decision Rules Values Beliefs 3. Matching Direct Match Direct Mismatch Mismatch with Exceptions 4. Information Requirements General Specific/Systematic 5. Information Order Sequential Random 6. Time References (Can be combined with Matching and Approach/ Avoidance) Past Present Future 94

Strategies 7. Time Relationships Patient Impatient 8. Approach/Avoidance Move Toward/Move Away From Pleasure/Goal Pain/Problem/Conflict 9. Financial Cost Convenience 10. Quality Price Value 11. Frame of Reference (Locus of Control) Internal External 12. Interactive Interpersonal (Others) Intrapersonal (Self) 13. Priority High Low 14. Work Independent Cooperative (Group)

95

Mind Control Secrets 15. Security/Stability Necessity Possibility/Risk 16. Focus Global/Broad/General Narrow/Specific 17. Rationality Logic/Thought/Objectivity Emotions/Feelings/Impulse 18. Buying Criteria What When Who How Why 19. Attitude Positive Negative 20. Source of Motivation Intrinsic (Self Rewards) Extrinsic (External Rewards)

Submodalities: How to Focus Your Brain for Optimum Results Have you ever noticed that people react to the same situation much differently? One person can welcome a challenge with open arms and feel empowered while another 96

Strategies will crumble with the pressure. These “states” of mind are built around your internal representation and physiology, defined by experiences. Experiences help us form our internal representations and determine how we perceive what’s going on around us. The way we embrace new challenges can be changed by how we focus on things and what we focus on.

Focusing Attention in a Situation There are millions of stimuli thrown at the brain at any one second. The brain acts as a filter and sorts through these stimuli, determining what’s most urgent or needs attention. The brain works through an information process known as “chunking,” which is basically the ability to group certain memories together for ready recall. For example, you may associate the memory of a high-school play with the musty-smelling cologne of a history teacher and the way he twirled his mustache. There were several other behaviors, actions and environments happening at the time, but these are the pieces that the brain (memory) has chunked together. Now think about it from a point of failure in your life. Most people recall this information and replay the “failing” moments over and over again. Instead of turning this information into feedback and learning, they begin to feed negative thoughts into their heads. How successful do you think this makes the person? Not very! In fact, it sets them up for failure. The question then becomes, “How do I change this state and look at experiences in a positive light?” The answer is: change the way you focus on things. Instead of always picking up the negative or noticing how you screwed something up, turn it and replay the situation with a more positive note. Imagine that the “screw up” was resolved. See

97

Mind Control Secrets yourself succeeding. What you’re doing is changing how you focus on things. After programming a negative focus and internal script for years, our brains go on autopilot and automatically begin feeding that negativity into the situation at hand. This takes a while to change; the internal scripting has to become positive just as it became negative. After years of listening to that negative internal script, you’ll have to remain constant in redirecting your focus to the positive, but stay with it. After a while, the mind will change to a positive autopilot mode. It takes work, but it can be done.

Directing Our Focus Our internal scripting is based on not only what we think, but also on how we feel. It’s possible to create a mental image to motivate ourselves and draw focus to a particular scenario. As we’ve already found in life, the intensity of a state of mind is based on the intensity of the situation or picture in our mind. All that sounds confusing, but here’s an example. Most people feel motivated to go shopping, but the motivation is more intense at some times than at others, right? This is because of our mental images about the situation. Shopping may not be as much fun when there are concerns such as money, time and finding the right piece of clothing. Imagine, though, shopping for anything you want with a $50,000 gift certificate you just won. Does that change the scenario? Of course it does! It is a bigger, clearer and brighter picture in your mind. What do we mean by more intense pictures? Think about what you see in the movies. The colors, sounds, light and angles all add to the intensity and desire of the movie.

98

Strategies If the picture is small, the colors are dim and the angle is off, would it be as interesting? NO! Visualization can change your state of mind by the mere intensity of the pictures in the mind. This is because the mind is drawn to a bigger, more distinct set of pictures of circumstances. Many consider this excitement. The pictures in our mind oftentimes are automatically populated, leaving us with little control. You can change this, though. The way to rectify this is to focus on positive pictures and images (of success) and making a mental movie of those positive images. Eventually, the mind will begin automatically populating circumstances with more positive images.

The Keys to the Brain The brain is often referred to as one large operating computer. The submodalities or “keys” to the mind allow you to control actions, thoughts and perceptions. These submodalities are classified into the same three categories we’ve seen for thought and communication: visual, auditory and kinesthetic. In order to understand a person’s state, we must understand the coding system of the brain. The chart below contains more detail on these coding systems, but let’s takes a brief look at the three submodalities and their input. The visual submodalities are how your brain codes pictures or sights. Think about looking at a picture. The same things that you notice in a picture are the things your brain is coding about what you’re physically observing. Is the picture focused or out of focus? What is the location of the item in the picture? Is it framed or panoramic; is it disassociated or associated? The auditory submodalities are the way the brain codes sounds. It’s the same as when you hear a sound and separate

99

Mind Control Secrets it into different categories. Is it loud or soft, slow or fast, in tune or out of tune? Kinesthetic submodalities are the brain’s coding of internal feelings. This is one of the more difficult coding systems to understand, because it’s not always as clear-cut. Separations of things such as the location of the feeling, whether it’s still or moving, light or heavy, and the direction of movement are all taken into consideration in the coding process. Coding and internal scripting are different for everyone. Finding the way that your brain codes and creates a particular situation is a discovery process…and a very important step towards success.

Submodality Distinctions Modality Visual • • •

Submodality Questions Color/Black-and-White

Is it in color or black-and-white? Is it full-color spectrum? Are the colors vivid or washed out?

Brightness In that context, is it brighter or darker than normal? Contrast Is it high contrast (vivid) or washed out? Focus Is the image sharp in focus, or is it fuzzy? Texture Is the image smooth or rough textured? Size How big is the picture? (ask for specific size) Distance How far away is the image? (specific distance) Shape What shape is the picture: square, rectangular, round?

100

Strategies Border • Is there a border around it, or do the edges fuzz out? • Does the border have a color? • How thick is the border? Location • Where is the image located in space? • Show me with both hands where you see the images(s). Movement • Is it a movie or a still picture? • How rapid is the movement: faster or slower than normal? • Is the image stable? • What direction does it move in? • How fast is it moving? Orientation Is the picture tilted? Association/Dissociation Do you see yourself, or do you see the event as if you were there? Perspective • From what perspective do you see it? • (If dissociated) Do you see yourself from the right or left, back or front? Proportion

Are there people and things in the image in proportion to one another and to you, or are some of them larger or smaller than life?

101

Mind Control Secrets Dimension • Is it fl at, or is it three-dimensional? • Does the picture wrap around you? Singular / Plural • Is there one image or more than one? • Do you see th em one after the other or at the same time? Auditory Location • Do you hear it from the inside or from the outside? • Where does the sound (voice) originate? Pitch • Is it high-pitched or low-pitched? • Is the pitch higher or lower than normal? Tonality Melody Inflection Volume Tempo Rhythm Duration

What is the tonality: nasal, full and rich, think, grating? Is it a monotone, or is there a melodic range? Which parts are accentuated? How loud is it? Is it fast or slow? Does it have a beat or a cadence? Is it continuous or intermittent? Do you hear it on one side, both sides, or is the sound all around you?

Kinesthetic Intensity How strong is the sensation? Quality How would you describe the body sensations: tingling, warm, cold, relaxed, tense, knotted, diffused? Location Where do you feel it in your body? 102

Strategies Movement • Is there movement in the sensation? • Is the movement continuous, or does it come in waves? Direction • Where does the sensation start? Speed

Is it a slow, steady progression, or does it move in a rush?

Duration

Is it continuous or intermittent?

Disassociation & Association One of the most telling types of image coding of the brain is disassociation versus association. Here’s the easiest way to understand: when you visualize a past event or situation in your life, do you see yourself at a distance or through your own eyes? If you’re seeing the situation from a distance, this is disassociation. When you visualize the event through your own eyes, this is association. We tend to visualize negative events from a distance, or as a disassociation, and positive events with association. The association or disassociation can have a great impact on your state of mind. Here’s why. Close your eyes and remember back to a positive event in your life. This event can be any positive experience that you want it to be. Remember the location, smells, sounds and who is there with you. Visualize through your own eyes and walk through the experience once again. This inspires a good and positive feeling. Now, take that same situation and visualize from a distance (disassociation). You’re basically stepping out of your body and removing yourself from

103

Mind Control Secrets the events. Do you see how the mood and state changes? It has a great impact, because the more involved a person is with a positive feeling, the better “state” the person will be in. When you want someone to buy something from you, for instance, you want them to disassociate from your competitor’s product and associate with yours.

Ability to Intensify any State Wouldn’t it be great to be able to intensify or replicate a feeling or state immediately on cue? Unfortunately, no one has developed a magic wand, so we have to come up with another way to intensify a positive state. Intensifying involves shifting the submodalities. Here’s how: Imagine and visualize a goal that you want to achieve, but have not found the motivation to achieve. Close your eyes and visualize yourself achieving that goal. Take notes about all the submodalities involved in the experience. Make mental notes of whether the situation is disassociated or associated, and notice the sounds, feelings and the shape of the feelings (light, heavy or movement, etc.). Rate the submodalities on a scale of 1-10, with ten being the highest amount of motivation and intensity you felt as you stood in achievement of your goal.

Mapping Across Love to Disgust A person can feel differently about a situation. It’s a matter of shifting the submodalities. There are steps to changing motivation to un-motivation, or love to disgust. Of course, it’s great to be able to change an unmotivated goal to a motivated goal, but the reverse is sometimes necessary as

104

Strategies well. Think about when you’re motivated for that 500-calorie bowl of ice cream. In order to achieve your dream weight, you must unmotivate yourself quickly! With that in mind, here are the five steps to control motivation. Step One: Elicit the submodalities of a food you love. Imagine a food that is not the healthiest choice, but is one you really want. A hot, juicy steak, for instance. Now make mental notes about the submodalities. Most of them will involve kinesthetics, because the food is a substance. Imagine the smell, feel and, most of all, the taste. Rate all the things that you like about this type of food from 1-10. Since you do like this food, all of your ratings should be up toward 10. Step Two: Elicit the submodalities of a food you hate. Now think of a food that you don’t like at all. We’ll use deviled eggs as an example, but you can insert your own most-hated food. Imagine eating it. Smell and taste it. How does it make you feel? Are you feeling sick? Probably so! Now take note of all the submodalities involved in disliking this food. Imagine what you would feel like chewing and swallowing the food. Step Three: The difference between the liked and disliked food. There are some definite differences here, as there should be. One food you like and the other you despise. The steak is hot and smells good. Deviled eggs are cold and smell nasty. Steak is dark and pleasing to the eye, while the deviled eggs are light colored and pasty. The differences in the two are called drivers.

105

Mind Control Secrets Step Four: Replace the likes with dislikes. Now imagine that hot and juicy steak, but replace it with those deviled eggs. Imagine yourself eating those deviled eggs. Imagine how they taste and what they feel like going down. Imagine that steak tastes like those eggs that you absolutely hate. Separate yourself from that steak by stepping out and making the visual smaller. How badly do you want that steak now? Step Five: Test it. This replacement method is a great way to neutralize cravings. This method can help individuals turn off those cravings and callings for things that they do not need or are bad for them. Granted, you wouldn’t necessarily want to replace steak and never eat it again, but this exercise can be used as a tool to control the intensity and state of mind. Now that we’ve covered Meta Programs and submodalities, I’d like to tell you a little something about a guy named Ron. I think it will help you understand a bit more about how to use people’s decision-making strategies for your own benefit. When Ron was getting ready to start his martial arts school, he knew it was a competitive business. Most karate schools fail in the first year, and very few schools make enough for the owner to not have to take up another fulltime job. Ron decided that the first thing he needed to do was find schools where the owner was making a good living at teaching martial arts. (One effective strategy for change is to find someone who has done what you want to do, and do what they did. This is called modeling.) So he took some time and visited a few successful schools. The first thing he noticed was that the schools signing up a lot of students seemed to fit their selling style to the

106

Strategies client’s needs and wants, rather than to the head teacher’s agenda. An example: a young man comes in interested in classes. The first thing the successful people did was to find out WHY the person was looking into learning martial arts. If he was looking for self-esteem, they would discuss how the martial arts would build that. If it was physical fitness, they would talk up the workout part and the flexibility you acquire. The student wanted self-defense? The teacher would highlight how the prospective student would be able to defend himself. Self-discipline? That’s what martial arts are all about! Ron also noticed that if a parent brought in a child, then the teacher would do the same thing to both the parent and the child. He would talk up both the points the parent wanted and the points the child wanted. Ron took special note of how the teacher asked each prospective client how they would know when they found the school that best fit their needs. The teacher would listen and take note of what they said, such as the prospect who said, “Well, I will see that the students have respect, that they have done well in competition, and probably I would want a free class or two.” After some more general talk about the martial arts, the teacher showed the prospective student some of the trophies they had won at recent events. He then asked a current student what this school’s attitude was, and the student named several; and when he said RESPECT, the teacher stopped him and said to the prospective client, “Respect is important here—very important indeed!” He then invited the student for a trial workout. Ron was amazed. He knew this NLP technology. He had just watched this teacher get into rapport, match the client, get his strategy, find out which of the core desires was most 107

Mind Control Secrets important (accomplishment, belonging, and value) and then feed it back to the client. The client signed up before he left that evening. Ron then watched as the teacher did the same to a mother and son. The mother wanted self-discipline and physical fitness; the son wanted to learn how to defend himself. The teacher repeated back the benefits each wanted and pointed out how his martial arts school was the answer. The teacher then asked the mother how she would ascertain whether she had found the right place for her son. She stated that the place had to be clean, well run and friendly. Of course, the teacher pointed out how clean this operation was and emphasized that the classes started and finished on time. He also stressed how it was like a big family—yes, students’ family members are welcome to watch classes. The mother signed her son up then and there! Ron saw what he needed. Just to be sure, though, he went to a couple of other schools and got a tour. Here the teacher proceeded to tell him why his school was the best. He never once asked any questions. The same thing happened at a couple of other smaller schools. Ron saw why the first school he contacted was growing by leaps and bounds, while, in the case of these others, the teachers had to hold second jobs just to make a living. The above was an example of strategies, how people combine how they think (visual, auditory, kinesthetic) with the sixteen basic desires in order to come up with an unconscious process for deciding how to decide.

Martial Arts Story A guy went to Japan to study with the martial-arts experts. There were two masters. He asked all kinds of questions

108

Strategies until one of the instructors suggested they have tea. He started pouring tea into a teacup and kept pouring until the cup overflowed. The student finally stopped the instructor and asked why he was letting the tea pour out of the cup. The analogy is that the student’s mind was so full that the instructors could not put any more information in. Until the student emptied his mind, he could not learn. Like martial arts, NLP techniques are a powerful, potentially manipulative technology that could be used for good or bad.

Milton Erickson Called the father of clinical hypnotherapy, Milton Erickson was a good storyteller who used metaphors and analogies. He also liked to use tasks as learning experiences. One example was when he asked students to climb a mountain to get them out of the office. They came back with wonderful metaphors about the struggles of life, etc. Give everyone a string. The string is a metaphor. Put it on your wrist. Develop your own metaphor. No one can pull your string anymore. Take the string off at the end of the class upon graduation. Leave the string on for the full time you are in the class. Then tell the class what your metaphor for the string means. You can now begin focusing on how your brain makes sense of the world.

109

Chapter 7

Anchoring Anchor Your Way to Success “It doesn’t count if you don’t get caught,” an NFL coach once said regarding some bad calls that went his way during a game. Everyone has enjoyed a positive state of mind and also understands what it feels like to be in a negative state. Now ,given the chance, most people are going to choose the positive state of mind, but feel that it is simply based on environmental factors in which they have no control. Consider this, what if you could automatically switch your mind to a positive state? What if you could switch another person’s mind to a positive state? Would you believe that the human brain is capable of that? It is, through a process called “anchoring,” and it can make unbelievable changes in your life. In the 1996 presidential election, we got to watch Bill Clinton pull off some of the best examples of anchoring the world has ever seen, and very few people even noticed. At one point in the debates, President Clinton walked center stage and listed several facts about the state of the union at that time. • •

The economy was booming. More jobs had been created in the last four years than in the previous twelve. 111

Mind Control Secrets • •

Unemployment was at an all-time low. We were at peace.

After he listed all these wonderful things, he made the comment, “I can’t take all the credit for all the good things that have happened these last few years.” Great comment, but as he said, “all the good things that have happened,” he touched his tie. Each time he said a great positive thing about the country, he touched his tie or face. He was anchoring all those positives to himself. But that was not enough; he went on to say, “We still have problems in this country, people are being left behind.” As he said this, he made a gesture with his hand toward Bob Dole. If you were watching the debates, you were using your conscious mind to track the information while your subconscious was wide open for this type of salesmanship. This could explain the great public ambivalence toward Bill Clinton. While our conscious minds might not approve of his actions, in our subconscious minds he is anchored to good things. (Not just to pick on Clinton; Ronald Regan was also brilliant at anchoring positive things to himself.) Often in the process of communicating, the achieved level of rapport can diminish in the middle of the transaction! The secret technique many successful people use to quickly reestablish the initial rapport is called anchoring. The next step is learning what anchors are. There are different types of anchors that we will go into in more detail momentarily. First, a good definition of an anchor is a stimulus (behavior) that is associated with a particular state of mind or mood. For example, if every time you scratched off a lottery ticket you won a substantial amount of money, you would begin to associate scratching the lottery ticket with a positive state.

112

Anchoring This “anchoring” or associating is based on the famous research completed by Ivan Pavlov with his hungry dogs. Basically, in a laboratory setting, Pavlov uncovered that dogs could associate a bell with hunger pains and involuntary salivation. After a training period Pavlov found that the dogs would begin salivating and having hunger pains at the sound of a bell, regardless of the time that the bell sounded. How does that affect us today? What Pavlov found is known as classical conditioning. This means that associations can trigger feelings and behaviors without someone making a conscious effort. This is very important in success and how individuals live their lives. That means that you can improve or change your state of mind based on positive associations. It also means you can anchor certain states of mind in other people. Now let’s look at the types of anchors.

What Is an Anchor? Visual Anchors Visual anchors are among the most common, because humans are very visual creatures. We’ve been making associations ever since childhood. We make associations every day based on color, appearance, texture and faces. There are positive and negative visual anchors. As you travel through a residential area ten miles over the speed limit and you catch a glimpse of that white car, what is your immediate response? That’s right…you hit the breaks, grit your teeth and know you’re about to be $100 poorer. (I know; this just happened to me.) Think about that grouchy neighbor next door; what do you feel when you see his shining face? Now, simply think about him. It puts you in a

113

Mind Control Secrets not-so-positive state of mind, just by the mere association, right? Now you understand “anchoring”! On the positive side, think about when you were a child, or think about your own child now. Children can’t read, but they know the McDonald’s arches when they see them! For a child, the golden arches anchor the positive thought of a Happy Meal and the fun play area. If we see the envelope that our paycheck arrives in, our state of mind turns to a positive. The sight of a distant relative will bring a positive smile.

Auditory Anchors An auditory anchor is a sound or sounds that are neurologically linked to a state of mind. Again it can be a positive or negative state, but it’s linked with a sound. What do you feel when you hear the alarm clock, “Jaws” theme or fire alarm? Most people either feel negative, panicked or just plain lousy. That’s because there’s a negative state associated with that particular sound. The alarm clock means having your feet hit the floor even though you’re exhausted. A siren sends panic through the spine. “Is someone hurt?” you wonder. “Is it my family? Is my house on fire?” Those thoughts are automatic; an individual associates them to a siren without conscious effort. Years after the movie came out, the “Jaws” theme probably still makes you want to get out of the water! Hear your full name (maiden if you’re a married female) in a loud voice in your mind; does it bring up a feeling? When I hear “William Danny Horton!” alarm bells go off. When I was growing up, I only heard my full name when something negative happened. Auditory anchors can also be positive, of course. Think about a romantic movie and the sound track that goes along with it. When you hear that particular music, you may feel refreshed, romantic or close to a loved one. That’s because 114

Anchoring that particular song or music is associated with a positive action or behavior that was carried out in that movie. This is also the key to “upbeat” music to work out to…the positive association can help get you motivated to work out. Let a former US Marine (there are no ex-Marines!) hear the Marine Corp anthem; you’ll get a big response!

Kinesthetic Anchors A kinesthetic anchor is one based on a movement, touch or physical action that associates a particular state of mind. This can best be explained with the touches, holding or hugging of a loved one. When that person touches you, it makes you feel special and loved, right? This is because you have associated that touch with the love and affection of that person, which sparks a positive emotional state. Another common example of a kinesthetic anchor is the small gestures or behaviors of sportsmen. Think about a baseball player that thumps the bat on the ground or the football player that slaps another on the back end. They do those things because their minds have linked those behaviors to a positive state…winning the game. It’s not only the touch of a loved one or a gesture of the sportsman that can make kinesthetic anchors work for you. You can develop kinesthetic anchors on your own. This will make your feel more confident, invigorated, persuasive and ready to succeed.

Using Anchors in Your Life Anchors are a part of everyday life whether people realize it or not. When people fall in love, they are anchored to the pleasant feeling that they get when they’re around their loved one. The small tokens such as a love song, beautiful scenery or some memento of the relationship can trigger this elated feeling that is based on the love we feel for 115

Mind Control Secrets someone else. Anchors are not set in stone, and there are no guidelines; they’re different for everyone. When I first moved to Florida I experienced an anchor that recalled long-forgotten memories. I’d go to lunch and would feel somewhat upset afterwards, sort of “down in the dumps.” I did what most of us would do; I checked what I was eating and how much coffee I drank to see if it was some kind of nutritional low. All were the same as usual. One day when I went for lunch, the smell of “old lady perfume” was strong. I instantly thought of my mother, who had died of lung cancer 11 years earlier. (She wore way to much perfume, as her sense of smell had been damaged by 40 years of two packs of Pall Malls a day.) The olfactory anchor—the “old lady perfume”—set off old memories and feelings. This is an example of anchoring in action! Fortunately, I used some of the techniques below to reprogram the anchor. Think about products and advertisements on television, radio and the internet. The leading manufacturers like Nike, Reebok and Polo spend millions on positive role models and creating positive associations in consumer’s minds. Even though the manufacturers may not know about anchoring as such, they do know this is well worth the money. Consumers make positive associations and simply must have the product. They feel that, because such a positive person has the product, it must be good. This is the reason there are billions of dollars spent in advertisements every year. Below are the basics of anchoring:

Key 1: Intensity 1. The intensity of the experience can control how fast the anchor makes the associations. If the experience 116

Anchoring is extremely intense, it may be that the association is strong after only one occurrence. On the other hand, if the experience is less intense, it may take several times to associated the state with the experience. 2. It doesn’t take a long period of time to establish an anchor. Repeated motivations and conditioning will reinforce an anchor. 3. Reinforcement and direct rewards are not required for an anchor’s association.

Key 2: Timing 1. Timing is crucial while establishing an anchor. Anchors or “set” and “fired.” It is necessary that the correct trigger sets off the desired response. 2. The most effective time for the association of the anchor is at the peak of the experience. As the intensity of the experience lessens, so does the association. If you can maintain this intensity for a longer period of time it is more likely the anchor will be established. Internal responses and experiences are significant. 3. Although internal reactions are not measurable, they are definitive responses. The more profound the experience when the catalyst is set, the stronger the retaliatory response. 4. The strength of the response will guide the person’s mind in the necessary and desired path.

Key 3: Uniqueness 1. It is best to find an anchor that is unique to the experience. The more original the motivation, the easier it is to reestablish the desired rapport. 117

Mind Control Secrets 2. Anchors can be established in the visual, auditory and kinesthetic representational systems. Individuals have the ability to use any three of the types of anchors independently or all together. The key here is to ensure that they anchors are used together and at the same time. 3. Make sure that it is something that happens associated with that experience and is not common to other experiences. The repercussions of mixed responses due to general stimuli could often be detrimental to the person as well as the relationship as a whole. By establishing unique stimuli, it allows for little margin of error and ease of reassessing the desired state.

Key 4: Replication 1. Practice makes perfect! Just like anything else, replicating the experience will achieve the anchor permanently. If you are attempting to build an anchor you may have to replicate it a time or two exactly. 2. If it is a vision or touch, it needs to be exact to build in your mind. As you saw from my own example with the perfume, anchors can be set and fired both consciously and unconsciously. People regularly create anchors in everyday experiences. They may watch a news show about an incident or situation they feel strongly about (negative or positive). From that point on, any time a word comes up that brings forth the memory of that news show, it will elicit a certain response. In effect, an anchor has been “set” and “fired off.” One way to think of it is the old bell curve. As you enter into any “state” (emotional experience), it will usually start slow and build to a peak, then diminish. If a unique 118

Anchoring stimulus is applied as you’re hitting the peak of the feeling, that stimulus will cause you to enter into that same “state” or emotion whenever you experience it again. Think of the power of this in your daily transactions. If you could anchor the people you deal with into positive emotional states, would that not help you in the relationship? Here an example of anchoring from a former student of mine. A former student shared a story of how he was in a dispute with his wife over one of his daughter’s boyfriends. The wife wanted him to tell the boyfriend to get lost. My student decided to defuse the situation, so while his wife was getting ready to go up the stairs, he put on some music they played at their wedding. He goes on to say the strangest thing happened. As the songs were playing, she stopped, turned around, and said, “I guess it’s OK for her to date this guy.” He asked her what brought this on. She replied, “When that music came on, my mind flashed back to our wedding (many years ago) where Mother walked up to me and said, ‘I still don’t like him.’ And you turned out all right.” That music fired an anchor installed many years before. But that is not the end of the story. A few months later he took his wife for a getaway weekend on their anniversary. He broke out all the right anchors… flowers, champagne, the works! As soon as they settled in, he put on the same music as above. His wife stopped, grabbed him by the shoulders, stared into his eyes, and said, “Promise me something, we will not talk about our daughter or her boyfriends, or anything like that.” He was blown away! Then he remembered that the last time he played this music, they were involved in an emotional experience. Because this new emotional experience was overlaid on the old anchor, it brought up the last “anchored” experience. 119

Mind Control Secrets This is especially powerful when combined with rapport skills, calibration and representational systems. Here’s another story from a student that puts the power of this into perspective. It’s from retired master sergeant Robert Labrie, and tells about the first time he put all these skills together when he was on assignment. He was part of the inspection team troubleshooting the Advertising and Promotion section. When I first arrived, the supervisor said, “Sergeant Labrie, I am so glad to SEE you! I am so anxious to SHOW you how we run our Advertising and Promotion Program.” He then spent time SHOWING me various slides, programs, and manuals he had written. He used visual terms. I knew that to please him, things had to look good. Then the officer in charge of the section approached me and said, “Sergeant Labrie, I am so anxious to HEAR what you have to SAY.” She wanted clear, detailed explanations of everything I was covering during the inspections. I remember thinking that it can’t be this easy (but it is!). I then met the third person. At first I couldn’t make out his system, but then I noticed that every time I found something wrong, he would get very emotional and put his hand to his chest like I had stabbed him, and say, “I can’t believe that there is so much wrong here, I FEEL like it will take me forever to get this all fixed.” There were definite signs of him experiencing the world through primarily kinesthetic eyes. I would then match each of their language patterns, and I got along with each of them, but I could SEE how they had trouble in their communications with each other. I had an eighteen-page checklist to get through, and if the kinesthetic continued with the emotional outbursts, I would never complete it, so I decided to try “anchoring” for the first time. I asked him if he had ever been super 120

Anchoring successful in his life; he immediately said “yes.” I asked him to describe it in detail. The more he talked, the more I could SEE him get into a positive “state.” His face was flushed; he began to talk faster and became more excited. When I thought it was the right moment (just before peak, bell curve) I grabbed his shoulder (kind of slapped it lightly) and said, “See, I told you, you could easily be successful, didn’t I?” He said “yes” and we proceeded to the next question, which also happened to be in an area that he needed work in. When I mentioned this fact, he went off again, just like before, except this time I slapped his shoulder, and before I could say a word, he said, “I know, I know, I was successful before, I can be successful again.” I think my jaw hit the ground, it couldn’t be that powerful, could it! We went on to the next questions until we found another area that needed work and he began to fl y off the handle again. Once again, all I needed to do was touch his shoulder, and he went into a positive state and said, “I know, I know,” and we were off to the next question. After a while, all I had to do was approach him and look like I was going to touch his shoulder and he responded the same way. I think it was then I became a true believer in the effectiveness of this technology, at that moment. These are great examples of the many ways an anchor can be used—an association, a touch, a sound—to trigger a consistent response in your target. You can use anchors to tap into your customer’s memory and imagination and transfer their positive feelings and associations to the present situation. Think about some of the anchors you have. Do you have a certain song that causes you to feel a certain way? What happens when you see the national flag? What happens 121

Mind Control Secrets when your boss touches you on your shoulder and says, “I need to see you in my office”? Once you become comfortable with the idea of anchoring, why not use it to your advantage? When you master rapport, you have a jump-start on friendly anchors. You must remember to be aware to anchor any of your clients’ positive states to you. You want to bring up those positive thoughts and feelings in your client’s mind. Once you become anchored to a response, it will last until changed or replaced by another anchor. This is true for people, products, or ideas. Here are some examples: Coors beer invented light beer years before Miller brought out Miller Lite, but Miller anchored light beer to them. Remember “Tastes Great, Less Filling”? There were at least five gold rock-n-roll records before Elvis, but who is the King of Rock-n-Roll? Do you ever hear someone say, “I need to make a Xerox of this?” Then they make a copy on a different brand copy machine. What correct positive anchoring does is give you that unique mental spot in your customer’s mind. You want them to think, “I need office products. I better give George a call. I like doing business with George.” Whenever I teach a class, the first thing I do is anchor the group. I like to anchor humor, or laughter, to myself. Every time the group laughs, I will touch my tie or face, in a certain way. I will then anchor spots on the stage. (Elite presenters talk about training their audience.) I had a teacher in middle school, Mr. Stevens, who used to tutor a few of the students after class. One of his students, 122

Anchoring John, had a hard time coming up with the right answer to a question when called upon to do so in class. Mr. Stevens began to tutor him, and then, during class, he would ask a question and, before calling upon a student to answer, he would remark casually, “I know John has the answer to this question, but let’s hear what Karen (or Tim, Mary, etc.) has to say.” The result was that John started to believe in himself, believe that he had the answer. Mr. Stevens anchored a feeling of confidence in John that was reflected in the ease with which he began volunteering to answer questions in class. Here are some exercises to master these skills. The first one is for you to practice on yourself. We want you to first get a feel for these techniques, and then we will show you how to implement them into your daily work and personal life.

Exercise: Anchoring a Resourceful State Identify a resourceful state or behavior. Think of something you already do well, some behavior or state you would like to be able to access whenever you choose. Choose an anchor that is easy for you to remember, that you can use whenever you want to access this feeling. Be sure to pick an anchor that is precise, such as placing your thumb and forefinger together as if making the “OK” sign. Now call up a memory of the behavior or state you would like to have, remembering a time when it was strong. What was it like to be doing that behavior? It’s important you see this experience through your own eyes, and not as if you are an observer watching yourself. Take note of what you see and hear and feel as you call up the memory. What colors are around you? Are the colors bright and vivid, or are they soft pastels? Are they clear, or are they slightly hazy and out of focus? What sounds do 123

Mind Control Secrets you hear? Are they soft or loud? Is there singing or talking, or are there birds chirping? As you imagine this scene, allow yourself to experience being there until the feeling is strong and encompassing you. As you do, touch your thumb and forefinger together as if making the sign for “OK.” Hold the position for as long as the feelings remain strong, and when they begin to fade, return your fingers to a relaxed position. Shake your head or move in some way so you can bring yourself back to the present (also called “breaking state”). The OK sign has just become the anchor for those feelings. But we don’t want to stop there. In order to ensure these feelings are associated with that gesture, it is necessary to repeat the exercise a few more times. Each time you do, try to add more details to the memory. This makes it even more powerful. Use all of your senses (seeing, hearing, feeling, smelling, tasting) with the experience, so the connection between the memory and the anchor becomes powerful. It’s important to remember that anchors should be set (installed) at the peak of the experience. The purpose of setting the anchor is to be able to call up the desired state when needed. Test the anchor. Think of a different experience and make the OK sign as you do, the same way you did a few minutes ago. This is known as firing the anchor. What happened? Did you recall the memory in all its detail, complete with the feeling or state you were trying to recapture? If you didn’t, keep trying. Sometimes a little practice is all that is needed. Remember, the sensations in an experience will often rise and fall, so you want to set the anchor as the experience is reaching its peak and remove it when the feeling begins to fade.

124

Anchoring Now that you are starting to understand the power of these techniques, here are some exercises to build your skills with others. Some of the states you will want to learn how to anchor in others are: • • • • • • • • • •

Humor Curiosity Being Positive Self-Confidence Loyalty How You Feel When You Make a GOOD Decision How You Feel When You Make a BAD Decision Excitement Doubt Patience

Eliciting States Once you are in rapport with someone, you’ll find talking to them is easy. To get someone into the state you desire, you need to be able to elicit that emotional state in them. That may sound scary, but it’s as natural as getting someone to talk about something that will put him or her in the state you want to elicit. Here is an example you’ve probably come across: Two men start talking about their favorite sports team. As they talk, you can watch them enter into several emotional states. As they describe the last win, they get excited; they get passionate about the plays. Watch them as they describe a “bad call;” they get angry. If their team lost, you will see negative feelings. In fact, watch any sporting event and you will see the athletes firing off anchors all the time. Maybe you played sports in school and you can still remember how you felt 125

Mind Control Secrets when you came off the field after a bad play and your coach gave you that look, or the excitement after a good play and your teammates patting you on the back. Another example before we move on to exercises. Watch professional comics as they do their routines. If they’ve been on the road for a while, you will watch them set anchors in their audience if a joke goes well. Think of the late Rodney Dangerfield. As he said his “I get no respect, no respect at all,” he always touched his tie. Jay Leno shrugs his shoulders on bad jokes, and that will get laughs. He touches his tie on good jokes. Tim Allen used to make his grunting noises as he talked about power tools, and he built that into a multimillion-dollar TV career. You will even see him use similar gestures in some of his movies that have nothing to do with the TV show. The secret to elicit a state in someone is that first you have to enter into it yourself! So, if you want someone to be excited about something, you have to get excited yourself. How do you do that? Think about something that makes you feel the way you want to feel. This will cause you to enter into the desired state. Then describe it in detail (even if just to yourself). Then ask the person with whom you are talking to describe how that state feels to them. If they hesitate, or have problems, just describe how you feel when you are in that state. People will compare, subconsciously, with how they feel when they are in that state. Remember, when you are in rapport, people talk about a lot of things…this is natural; use it!

Anchoring States Exercises Every day pick a state you will practice anchoring. We suggest coworkers and social situations before you tackle

126

Anchoring customers. Always start by getting into rapport with the people you are communicating with. Humor. This doesn’t mean you have to be a comic. Just get your target to talk about something they find funny, or anything that made them laugh. Start by telling a story you find amusing (I suggest you stay away from jokes, unless you’re really good at them). If you are in rapport, they will start to smile with you. Then get them to talk about something they found amusing. As they describe it, and they smile or laugh, anchor that state to yourself by something. Touch your ear and smile or laugh with them. Repeat several times. When you touch your ear they will smile and be in a better mood. Curiosity. This one is easy! Think about how you feel when you are curious. As you enter that state, do you touch your chin? (This seems to be a natural curiosity anchor.) Get your target to talk about things that make them curious. As they describe it, touch your chin. Being Positive. This is a powerful state for you to use on yourself, your coworkers and your clients. Think about how you feel when you’re in a positive state of mind, body and spirit. Anchor that. Get your targets to enter into a positive state. When they are in that state, anchor it to yourself and to them. Anchor it to yourself by touching your chest area, and maybe a thumbs-up sign. Anchor it to them with a pat on the shoulder. Self-Confidence. Another winner for you and those around you. These are best when you find people in this state naturally, like after a good day, a good review at work, etc. I would anchor it with the same anchor as above. Learning to anchor the next states will put you light years ahead of your competition. Loyalty. This is one that will keep your clients around. Have them tell you something that they are loyal to, and 127

Mind Control Secrets how good they feel about being loyal. As they describe it, agree with them and anchor it to you with a natural movement such as running your hand through your hair. The key is how they feel when they are loyal—that’s what you want. This is their way to ensure long-term relationships, as long as you live up to your part of the deal. How They Feel When They Have Made a GOOD Decision. Yes, you get your target to talk about a good decision, and anchor that to you or your product. As they describe how they felt, you agree and anchor that to yourself or your product for them. How They Feel When They Have Made a BAD Decision. As they talk about this, anchor this to your competition, or at least point away from you as they talk about it. This is powerful! Excitement. Get your target to talk about anything that gets them excited: sports, their kids…anything that puts them into excitement mode. You want to anchor this to your voice if possible. This will get them to take your calls and talk to you. Doubt. Another winner for the salesperson. When you anchor in doubt, you can use this to steer them away from objections and toward making a good decision! Patience. This could be a deal saver if you need to get some extra time for the products or project. Anchor the feeling of patience your target has wanted from their own clients, and how good they felt when their clients had patience with them. The key here is how they felt when someone had patience with them. Here is a story that shows many of these in action. I was at a conference when someone approached me about buying some of my home-study courses. I promptly

128

Anchoring put my rapport skills into practice. I mirrored and matched him. After he asked me about the home study courses, I told him how excited I was to be at the conference, and mentioned how excitement is contagious. I asked him if he was excited. As he talked about how excited he was, I touched my tie. I then talked about how much fun it was just being here and laughing with my peers. I asked him if he was having a good time. As he described a funny event, I touched his shoulder and again touched my tie. I asked him what he was curious about in the courses. As he told of his curiosity and fascination with NLP, I touched my chin and readily agreed (which I do!). We then talked about some of the good courses he had taken, and which courses he was especially glad he did (good decision). As he was speaking of his favorite, I touched the home-study courses. I asked if he had been to any bad or unfulfilling sessions at the conference. As he described a couple, I made a gesture with my hand and talked about wasting time and money. Now I had what I needed. I used his magic words, and I talked about how the home-study courses were both fun and exciting; I touched my tie. He smiled. I then talked about how this course answered all those questions about NLP that many people in our field have; I touched my chin and his shoulder. We then talked about how it was important to take good-quality courses, and how you want your money’s worth and to feel fulfilled. I touched the videotapes and held them.

129

Mind Control Secrets I then talked about how there were other products and courses out there, and I did the gesture with my hand. He bought all of my courses. (Of course, I have to say here that I totally believe in these courses. They deliver the goods, so I was very passionate about that, and I wanted him to make a good decision.) As I was writing up the sale, I asked him about any special hobbies he had. He told me he loved to scuba dive. Great! Now we had a shared passion. He then mentioned he learned in the NAVY. I asked him if he liked his Navy experience. He said he loved it. As he was talking about his love for the NAVY and his loyalty to it, I gave him the information on our organization, and how it feels to “be on board.” As he was leaving, I stressed, “Welcome aboard the NFNLP ship.” He brought two other people over that weekend, one of whom bought a course. Is this stuff cool or what? By the way, he is a great NLP practitioner. One last story. I was called in to consult with someone who did hypnosis seminars and wanted to sell more products in the back of the room, mainly tapes and books. I watched his presentation and recommended a few minor adjustments, the most powerful being as follows: First, I had him place the products up front so they could be seen. Then as he talked about the great things the subconscious mind can do, I had him place his hand next to the products. The focus was on anchoring when he pointed out the things the subconscious mind can do, things that you want, that you need. He casually would gesture to the products. For example, he talked about how, once you learn how to ride a bike, your mind will remember. You may not ride a bike for years, but when you get on one again, your mind 130

Anchoring takes over and does it for you. This is a good thing; you want this, you need this (point to product) to free your attention to do other things. Another example is if you used to drive a stick shift. Again, you may not drive one for years. Then, if you do, you’re driving just fine within a few minutes. This you want, this you need (casually point to products). It’s a good thing. Then when he did his closing and talked about the products, he would say, “Some people need this, others want this, but what these do is free your mind. It’s a good thing,” as he held up the products. His sales increased by over 10 percent at the next seminar.

Anchoring—A Universal Event: You Can’t NOT Be Anchored! You’re anchoring all the time in ways you’re not even aware of. Anchoring is considered to be subliminal seduction and is, indeed, a very powerful tool. Anchoring Exercise Ask someone to help you with the following exercise: 1. Identify resourceful behavior or state: Think of something you already do well, some behavior or state that is already resourceful, but which you would like to do even better. 2. Access and anchor number 1: What is it like to be doing that behavior? As they access that state, reach over and anchor it with a touch of the arm.

131

Mind Control Secrets 3. Identify additional resource number 2: Think of some other resource state/behavior that you could add so that you’d be even more delighted with that resourceful behavior. As they access this resource, anchor it with a touch of the other arm. 4. Integration: Take this resource (fire anchor number 2) and relive that resourceful behavior (fire anchor number 1) with this additional resource available to you. Watch and listen to everything that happens as these two experiences combine to make you even more effective. Take the time you need and come on back. 5. Test: Fire anchor number 1 and look for a new response. Note: Anchors should be set at just before the peak of the experience. Have the client use all senses (seeing, hearing, feeling, smelling, and tasting) that were associated with the experience. Ask the client to nod when they have reached the peak of the experience. Then set the anchor. The purpose of setting the anchor is to be able to call up that particular desired state when needed. 6. The next time you do this, how will it be different? Fire the first anchor. You want them to go in and sort all differences. So what’s it like? It may only be one subtle shift. Remember, you’re anchoring people all the time. Think about all the times you might touch someone on the shoulder and say, “It’s OK! How bad is it?” And you set an anchor every time. They get anchored into “this is feel bad time.”

132

Anchoring In the old Gestalt therapy, the therapist would start in one chair, and as the patient got better, he’d go to another chair and could not go back to the old chair because that was the bad chair. “You are better now, you can’t sit there anymore.” They were anchoring even though they didn’t know what it was! Some trainers covertly install humor throughout their presentation to make the class more interesting. It especially helps when you make a mistake. You can tap while you are creating the anchor. You can use your voice. Using a middle name, such as “William Danny Horton,” immediately reminds you of a time when you were getting chewed out by your mom. You can anchor in the air with a gesture. You feed back their strategy and add an anchor. A trainer can anchor her spaces on the stage so that whenever she steps into a certain area or does a certain thing, the audience will react in a certain way. Stand in a certain spot when you tell a story. Anchoring makes all your techniques more powerful.

Exercise: Altering an Action/Behavior Transfer Presenter (P): Does anyone have a problem or a time in their life when they get stuck or have a response they don’t like and can’t get out? a. It doesn’t hurt to use the book. It means there will be less you have to remember. b. Presumably, if a doctor has a question, he will go to a manual to get the answer. c. Grab the book if you need to. P: You start to make a decision and you get stuck. Where do you get stuck? What happens for you to get stuck? . . . Do you think about it a long time? . . . Do you think too much?

133

Mind Control Secrets Experiencer (E): I think too much. I analyze it. P: Would you like to stop doing that to a certain degree? P: Please close your eyes and we will be doing anchoring with touch—if you don’t mind? P: Can you see yourself from my point of view? Like on a movie screen? See yourself so you are totally dissociated? There is no feeling, no thought. Now shake that off. P: Can you think of the last time you got stuck? When was that? What was it? What were you thinking about? E: The change I was going to make. P: OK! Think about that now! And you know how it feels to be stuck. Right? You know how it feels mentally and physically. P: Now what I want you to do, have your brain do this . . . From now on whenever you get stuck, you are automatically going to pull back and see yourself from my point of view. Got it? P: So when you think about being stuck, you are going to pull back and see yourself from my point of view. P: Shake that off and open your eyes. So how is it different now when you think about being stuck? P: Pull back. What resource, that is what we are looking for, and we just tested it. That in itself can be an intervention if you are dealing with people. So what can happen is they 134

Anchoring get stuck and they don’t get out of it. And sometimes just by pulling back it can be an intervention. Have you ever worked with someone who gets into an “instant rage?” They just flip from being normal to being insane, and sometimes all they need is someone to pull them back. If they can pull back and see themselves in rage, they usually will regain control. So what resource would be handy for you to have when you are stuck? What do you think would be good? You get stuck in that think . . . think . . . think . . . think . . . think and you pull back . . . what would be good? Go ahead and trust your instinct—yes, go ahead and do it. E: Just shut the faucet off and go. P: OK, we can do that. Steps to Behavior Transfer 1. Can you think of a time when you could do that, just shut the faucet off and go? Yes! 2. Enter that now and think about it. So you know what that is like? 3. OK? So from now on, here is what is going to happen! 4. Whenever you start getting stuck, you are automatically going to pull back and see yourself sitting there stuck . . . and when you settle back in it, you will maybe just shut the faucet off and go. 5. But it is going to happen—stuck, pull back, and all of a sudden you are just ready to go. 6. Stuck, pull back, ready to go. Before you know it, it will happen faster than I could touch you. 135

Mind Control Secrets 7. So the next time you start getting stuck . . . snap your fingers . . . it’s done! 8. Now just to make this even more fun, I want you to take your left hand and either make a fist or an OK sign or do something with your left hand . . . an OK sign. 9. That’s going to be your anchor. So if something happens and you get stuck and it doesn’t happen automatically, just by doing the OK sign, this will automatically happen. 10. So you might even make the OK sign, your self-anchor, when you know you’ve got to make a decision. So you start making that OK sign and your brain automatically goes, “OK, let’s just go!” 11. Always know you can trust yourself to make the best decision at the time. So this becomes your self-anchor for that. Solicit the help of another person and review the previous exercise Have them think of a time that they get stuck or they go into an unresourceful state. Find something that they get some type of stimulus from, but which has response they don’t like. Examples: Rage “My wife just says something to me and I go off . . .” (Stimulus/response.) “Every time my husband comes home, he leaves his clothes on the floor, takes a shower . . . it drives me crazy.” (Stimulus/response.) 1. Have them elicit dissociation. Give them a safety valve if something goes wrong, you want them to be 136

Anchoring

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

able to dissociate. Ask them if they can see themselves from my point. Picture yourself on a movie screen. See yourself from the top of the room, whatever you want so they can imagine themselves being dissociated. (Set anchor number 1 wherever it is handy for you—knee, elbow, etc). Precise, exact spot is not necessary. Close is good enough. Test it, then elicit the stuck state . . . Have them think about the last time it happened when they got stuck (anchor number 2). Chain to dissociation: From now on, whenever you feel yourself getting stuck, angry, upset, losing control, whatever the problem the client has . . . you automatically find yourself pulling back (or dissociated) or “drift back and see yourself getting angry,” or something like that. Note: Always do everything twice. Test: Have the client think about being stuck and usually they will go . . . their eyes will go all over the place. You have scattered the neurology of the brain. Then ask them to select a resource—What would be good . . . ? He said, “Turning the faucet off and going.” (Anchor it.) Then tie all three anchors together—From now on, not only when you feel stuck will you automatically pull back and see yourself, you are also going to settle into turning the faucet off and go. They could say humor versus the faucet, for example. Don’t give advice. Find out what resource they need, and no matter how weird it sounds, use it. It has to be their idea. For them it might be humor and a pile of clothes. One person would just pick the clothes up, throw them in the closet and go on, or just leave them there. Let them come up with whatever works 137

Mind Control Secrets in their brain. Now if they obviously don’t know, then prod them, but it is important to let them put it in their words. That is easy to overlook. That is why psychology has a dismal track record. We take what works with one person and think it will work with everyone. You overlap the patterns in the brain. Anchors can override other anchors depending on the strength of the stimulus—like taping over a tape.

Eliminating Fears and Phobias This technique neutralizes the powerful negative feelings of phobias and traumatic events. Remember, most people learned to be phobic in a single situation that was actually dangerous or seemed dangerous. The fact that individuals can do what psychologists call “one-trial learning” is proof that a person’s brain can learn quite rapidly. That ability to learn rapidly makes it easy for you to learn a new way to respond to any phobia or trauma. The part of the person that has been protecting the person all these years by making him phobic is an important and valuable part. We want to preserve its ability to protect him in dangerous situations. The purpose of this technique is to refine and improve his brain’s ability to protect him by updating the information. Have the subject get comfortable. Following are questions and a suggested patter for this technique. • • • •

What is your phobia? Do you want to be over it? How bad is your phobia? What happens? And you would like to be over this?

138

Anchoring •

• •

• • •

•

•

•

•

First thank your brain for a couple of things. (1) It proves how quickly your brain works. (2) Once it learns something, it can be tenacious. Intellectually you know that most snakes are not poisonous, but that doesn’t matter . . . does it? Thank your brain for holding onto this for all these years. And it’s doing it for some reason to take care of you. All we are going to do is update the information collected by your brain. OK? What I want you to do is put your feet flat and just close your eyes, and I want you to imagine you are sitting in a movie theatre in your favorite chair, and on the screen is a great big black-and-white snapshot of you, where everything is fine. You got it? Now what I want you to do is float out of your body so you can see yourself sitting in the chair. And you are going to drift back up like where the projection booth would be, and you are going to see yourself sitting here safe and secure, watching yourself watch the movie. So you are up in the projection booth, and there is plastic up there, and you are safe and totally removed, and you are up here watching yourself sitting here watching the movie. Got it? Good! Now I want you to watch and listen . . . protected in this booth as you see this black-andwhite snapshot kind of segue into a movie of a younger you going through one of those situations where you experienced a phobia reaction with [phobia]. It might be the earliest memory you can remember, or it could be the worst, either one. But you are up here in the projection booth watching yourself, safe 139

Mind Control Secrets

•

•

•

•

•

• •

and secure, sitting there watching this movie . . . as it goes from a black-and-white snapshot into a blackand-white movie of you either the very first time you freaked out with [name phobia] or the worst time you freaked out with [name phobia]. And the movie is going to run all the way through the end and it stops. And there’s a black-and-white picture of you again at the end, and everything is fine. Now what you are going to do for me is you are going to drift out of the projection booth and you are going to settle back down into your body, safe and secure, and when you are ready, you are going to take a deep, deep breath . . . hold it . . . take another deep breath and hold it. You are going to step into that last picture, and the whole movie is going to run backward and in color. Swoooosh! Just like that—real fast all the way back to the beginning, that’s right! Now come out of the movie, come back and sit down, safe and secure. Drift up out of your body again and see yourself sitting here and again the movie is going to start over. Again, the very first time or the very worst time you had an experience with a snake all the way through to the end, it freezes. You drift out of the movie theatre into yourself, and whenever you are ready on your own you are going to take a deep breath, step into the movie, and as you exhale, the movie is going to run backward and in color, with you in it. See, hear, and feel everything as it goes backward . . . swoosh, like that. Got it? This time you don’t even go back to the projection booth; you just come sit down here and watch the 140

Anchoring

•

•

•

• •

movie. This time it is in color, of the worst experience you ever had with a snake, but you are watching it . . . swoosh all the way to the end. When you step into it, the movie runs backward and in color . . . swoosh . . . real quick! OK? And then it ends and you come back out and you see a huge picture, one of those forty-foot pictures, like the old drive-in movie screen. There you are, being the person you really want to be! What I want you to realize is since you had this phobia you have [avoided your phobia and you haven’t learned as much as you could have about the subject of your phobia], you’ll know how to urge caution in your intelligence and your training . . . to be cautious and careful . . . and you may be surprised and delighted right now as you begin to search in vain for that phobic response. [Think of phobia in a smaller way—e.g., smaller snake, smaller spider, etc.] Whenever you are ready, open your eyes. How are you feeling? How do you think you would feel if [you experienced phobia now]? Thank your brain for understanding all this stuff and you are going to exercise caution, and so when you see [name phobia], don’t run up and look at it, but you might go hmmmm . . . interesting!

Once you learn to use anchors on those with whom you associate, you’ll be able to control their states of mind at will! This is a powerful tool that should be used responsibly and with the best intentions. Used correctly, it can set the stage for success, more persuasiveness in your interactions, and a multitude of other positives in your life. Anchors aweigh! 141

Chapter 8

Information Gathering Once you achieve rapport with a person or persons, you will find gathering information easier. They’ll want to talk to you, because they will feel a sense of connectedness. At the very outset, we advise you to bear in mind that, to gather the correct information, you’ll need to do more than just listen to their words. You will also need to decode their meaning. This is because we don’t operate directly in the real world but have to create models, or maps, of the world, which we then use to direct our behavior. These maps or models allow us to make sense of the world and of all our experiences. Now, the maps or models in question can’t be evaluated in terms of good or bad, but only in terms of their ability to help us cope with the world. Most of us create these models from three human language modeling processes, namely deletion, distortion and generalization. These are what allow us to grow, understand and experience the world. The most common of these is generalization. This is where a person takes pieces or parts of an experience and uses it to represent the whole category from which that experience is but an example. A child learns his father is a male, and he generalizes this and believes all males become daddies. This is also how you can learn quickly. For instance, when you learn how to drive a car, you can generalize what you learn about driving a car so you can drive almost any automobile. However, generalization has its limitations. For example, when salespeople fail in a few calls, or perform in a way they label inadequate, they could generalize this into believing that they are no good at sales calls. 143

Mind Control Secrets The next process is distortion. This happens when we make shifts in how we experience our sensory data. We misrepresent reality, sometimes making it more or less important than it really is. People who do this because they are optimists are said to be looking at the world through rose-colored glasses. The other side of the coin, however, can become a problem, such as when someone takes a small amount of criticism from his sales manager and turns it into “He hates me and is out to get me.” It can also be a problem when someone takes a process and turns it into a thing. Love becomes something to be handled—and controlled—as if it was a thing. Lastly we have deletion. This is where someone leaves out certain aspects of an experience and focuses on other aspects, somewhat like selective attention. On the plus side, this allows you not to become overwhelmed by all the external stimuli you are confronted with daily; you can talk on the cell phone while walking through the airport, oblivious to all the hustle around you. Victim mentality can be an example of this, however. Such a person believes the world is against him, but he deletes his actions, which may have put him into such a position or caused his problems in the first place. Here is a complete breakdown of the language process we call the Meta Model. Read through this, and then we’ll show you a way to cut to the chase, so to speak.

Meta Model Distinctions People have their own system for connecting words to their daily experiences, and their own set of words to help connect to that experience. People usually aren’t conscious

144

Information Gathering of the process or the words they select to represent their experience. Errors in information gathering can be divided into two types: 1. Deletions—information that was lost as you represented the words given to you by the customer. 2. Additions—information that you added to that representation, based on your own presuppositions, personal history, etc. What do we mean when we speak of deletions and additions? Well, deletion occurs when we selectively focus on certain parts of our experience and exclude other parts. It’s something we all do almost all the time to avoid being overwhelmed by the external stimuli that surround us. For instance, someone in a room full of people can play a video game, while another person is watching television and three other people are playing a board game. Each person in that room is deleting a portion of the total experience in order to engage in their selected activity. How does deletion occur when we’re with a customer? Imagine that you have just asked your customer a question about their computer software preference. The customer replies, describing his use of certain software and his inability to get technical help when he needs it. As a computer salesperson with a background in programming, you’ve never experienced his level of frustration. You focus on the software he mentioned and talk about how versatile these applications can be. You have unconsciously deleted his technical-help problems, without even realizing that you did so. Addition occurs when we add something to a representation based on our own experience. Take the above 145

Mind Control Secrets example. This time the salesperson recalls a time when he called for technical help with a software application and spoke with a troubleshooter who gave him some insightful tips about the application. He misses the frustration being expressed by his customer because he is concentrating on his own memory and recalling how knowledgeable the technician was and how he was able to use the tips to greatly increase his expertise with the software application. The original representation of the customer—that his use of certain software programs led to seeking technical help that was less than helpful—is distorted by the salesperson’s own experience. The Meta Model is a set of questions that allows you to gather information that clarifies someone’s experience, in order to get a full and detailed representation of that experience. The goal of the Meta Model is to create the most understanding and learning from any specific communication. The Meta Model is used to gather information that leads a person from a surface structure, SS (the language selected to represent an experience), to a deep structure, DS (the actual, complete experience). There are six question words in the English language: who, what, when, where, how, and why. Of these, why is the only one that doesn’t ask for specific detail. The answer to “Why?” is usually “Because,” followed by a historical or theoretical explanation. This doesn’t supply the process information you want. You may get specific detail in response to “Why?” but that will only be a lucky accident. This is why the question “Why?” does not appear in the Meta Model. Meta Model responses help recover deleted material and assist the speaker in reconnecting with their deep structure (the actual, complete experience). This can be

146

Information Gathering the most important part of a sales call, namely, gathering the correct information.

Gathering Information Lack of Referential Index When the person or thing being referred to is not identified, this is known as lack of referential index. This type of generalization limits your model of the world by leaving out the specific details of the experience or representation. These references are often pronouns, such as she, he, it, they or them, and classes of objects, such as dogs, hotels, cars, countries, etc. When you’re gathering information from a customer, you want to be sure that you have a clear understanding of what they are saying. The details that they leave out can make or break the sale. 1. Deleted Referential Index occurs when the speaker of the sentence simply leaves out the reference. a. “The window was broken.” Who broke it? b. “I’m being pushed into this project.” Who’s pushing you? 2. Unspecified Referential Index occurs when the noun or noun phrase does not name a specific person or thing . . . look for words like “this,” “that” and “it.” a. “That just won’t work.” What, specifically, won’t work? b. “This is stupid.” What is stupid?

147

Mind Control Secrets 3. Generalized Referential Index is one way the speaker can “plug the hole” left by deleting a reference. A generalized referential index is a noun or pronoun which refers to a nonspecific group or category. a. “Relationships are a drain.” Which relationships do you find draining? b. “People are so uncaring.” Who, specifically, is so uncaring? 4. Reversed Referential Index occurs when the speaker is stated as receiving the action of the verb in a sentence rather than doing the action of the verb. a. “He hates me.” Try saying “I hate him,” and then express what you’re feeling. b. “She never seems to understand me.” Try saying, “I never seem to understand her,” and then express what exactly you’re feeling. The creator of the Gestalt theory, Fritz Perls, called this linguistic pattern projection. As people reverse the statement and begin to take responsibility for themselves in this manner, they have the possibility of having an “Aha!” experience. This is referred to as owning projection. Nominalizations This Referential Index Meta-Model violation has its own category. Nominalizations are words transformed from process (verbs) into closed events (nouns). To gather information here, change the noun or constant state back into an active form of the verb from which it was derived. Specifically ask “who” or “what.”

148

Information Gathering Open up the action. Who’s communicating what to whom? How would you like to communicate? Linguistically, nominalizing is the changing of a DS process into an SS event. Ask yourself the question: “Can you put the nominalization in a wheelbarrow?” or does the word fit into the blank of the syntactic frame: “Ongoing . . . ?” Words like friendship, sensation, decision, obligation, etc. are nominalizations. You need to denominalize the words. Questions to ask: “How specifically are you . . . ?” “What prevents you . . . ?” “Can you imagine . . . ?” 1. “He is a failure.” How is he failing? 2. “This relationship is not working out.” How is the way you are relating not working out for you? 3. “I can’t do anything without being reminded of my obligations.” To whom are you obligated to do what? 4. “My wife’s laughter provokes my anger.” How does your wife’s laughing cause you to feel angry? 5. “I resent your question.” How (what) do you resent in what (that) I am asking you?

149

Mind Control Secrets Unspecified Verbs In an Unspecified Verb, a full description of the action or event is not present. To say that someone touched me is much more generalized than to say someone caressed me. Question to ask: How, specifically? 1. “Michelle rejects me.” How, specifically, does Michelle reject you? 2. “They ignore me.” How, specifically, do they ignore you? 3. “He hurts me.” How, specifically, does he hurt you? 4. “John keeps bothering me.” How, specifically, does John keep bothering you? Note that the above statements also include a Reversed Referential Index. Expanding Limits Modal Operators of Possibility/Necessity (Modes of Operation) are words that identify the limitations a person puts on him/herself. Possibility/Impossibility: can/can’t; will/won’t; possible/impossible. Necessity (Required): should/shouldn’t; must/must not; necessary/unnecessary. These operators define the boundaries of the person’s model of the world. To extend beyond those boundaries

150

Information Gathering is to invite some catastrophic expectation over which the speaker believes he or she has no control. Questions to ask: What stops you? What would happen if you did? 1. “I can’t do that.” What would stop you? What would you do if you did? 2. “I won’t be able to go to the concert alone.” What stops you from going to the concert alone? What do you think would happen if you went alone? 3. “I really should be more flexible.” What do you think would happen if you were more flexible? 4. “I ought to be more understanding when he’s like that.” What do you think would happen if you weren’t? 5. “It’s not possible for me to love anymore.” What stops you from loving? What would happen if you did? Look for the words must, have to, ought to, and their opposites, shouldn’t, must not. Universal Quantifiers With Universal Quantifiers, everything is exaggerated. This category includes words such as all, never, always, no

151

Mind Control Secrets one and everybody. They often indicate that a generalization has been made from a specific experience. The question to ask should be in the form of an exaggeration. Ask for contradictions to the event the speaker is talking about. 1. “I never get what I want.” Can you think of a time when you did get what you wanted? 2. “No one will give me help.” I wonder if you can remember at least one person who helped you? 3. “Everybody’s mean to me.” Everybody’s always mean to you, everyone you know, even your best friend, even the milkman? 4. “I’ve always used the wrong words.” You’ve always used the wrong words at every time and in every situation? Universal Quantifiers often have built-in double binds. 1. “Though I want to, I’ll never respect him . . . I always get what I want from him.” I have a homework assignment for you. During the coming week I would like you to ask him to give you only what you want in order to respect him. Mind Reading Mind Reading is a person’s belief that one person can know what another is thinking/feeling without direct communication (knowing someone’s internal state). 152

Information Gathering

Projected Mind Reading: a person believes that others should know what she is thinking. Questions to ask: How, specifically, do you know that? 1. “I know what makes her happy.” How, specifically, do you know what makes her happy? 2. “You love me.” How, specifically, do you know that I love you? 3. “He should know better.” How should he know not to do that? 4. “They think he knows all the answers.” How specifically do you know that they think that? 5. “If she cared about me, she wouldn’t have to ask what I need.” If she doesn’t ask, then how will she know for sure what you need?

Changing Meanings Cause and Effect Cause and Effect is a belief that some action on the part of one person can cause another to experience emotion or an inner state, where cause is wrongly put outside of self. Questions to ask: How does X cause Y? How, specifically?

153

Mind Control Secrets 1. “Michael’s nervousness causes me to be edgy.” How, specifically, does Michael’s nervousness cause you to be edgy? 2. “Reading this makes me angry.” How, specifically? 3. “You make me sad.” How, specifically? 4. “I feel bad for making her cry.” What did you do that you believe made her cry? 5. “Their laughter makes me angry.” How does their laughing cause you to be angry? (Notice the nominalization in sentence number 5 . . . laughter.)

Lost Performative A Lost Performative is a generalization that a person makes and transfers to the world as if it is a truth. The personally-held belief gets lost in the generalizations (value judgments where the person doing the judging is left out). Questions to ask: Who says? For whom? 1. “It’s crude to act like that.” Who says? 2. “This is the right way to do this project.” According to whom? 3. “That’s a stupid thing to do.” Stupid according to whom? 154

Information Gathering

4. “It’s not important anyway.” It’s not important to whom? By using Lost Performatives, people remove themselves from any position that might leave them open to criticism or challenge. “Statistically speaking . . .” By getting the speaker to use such phrases as “I think” or “my belief is,” the speaker is able to identify himself as the specific performer of the judgment, thought, belief or action.

The Short Method Now that you have an idea of how we use language to make sense out of the world, and how we can lose the true meaning in these processes, let us show you a shortcut. The thing to bear in mind is to get your customer (or anyone with whom you are communicating) to be as specific as possible. You want to elicit information that is as sensory-specific as possible…things you can SEE, HEAR or TOUCH. When you do this, you will be communicating in a way that makes understanding much easier. The word(s) you now want to start using a lot:

Specific/Specifically Now, when you first start this process, some people may be upset when you nail them down by requiring specificity, but you will also become known as a clear communicator. As a culture, we have lost clear communication and replaced it with the vague reference. Here is a list of the key questions you need to learn to ask in almost any situation in which you want to gather clear information.

155

Mind Control Secrets The Key Questions: 1. What do you want? Stated in positive terms Specific Sensory Based Hear Feel a. What will that do for you? (specifically) 2. How will you know when you have it? 3. Where, when, and with whom do you want it? 4. How will this affect other aspects (or people) in your life? 5. What stops you from having this already? 6. What resources do you already have that will help you obtain your outcome? 7. What additional resources do you need to obtain it? 8. How are you going to get there? a. First step: Must be specific and achievable. Is there more than one way to get there?

The Key to Successful Interaction The Meta Model Let’s talk about the Meta Model of information gathering. “Meta” means overview, huge, above. It is a way of gathering information specifically. After this exercise, you’ll fall in love with the word “specifically” (and chances are that everyone around you will want to slap you for it!). We all talk about getting upset, and often it’s a person who makes us upset. Well what, specifically, are you upset about? How, specifically, does that person upset you?

156

Information Gathering People do not want specifics in their life. They want generalizations (fluff words). The two ways to gather information: 1. You can go up to a more generalized term (fluffy language). 2. You can go down to something specific. You should focus on what you can see, hear, and feel. For example, instead of saying, “I want to be happy,” think what, specifically, will make you happy. How, specifically, do you know if you are happy? Let us deal with some specific questions . . . 1. What do you want? Why are you reading this? Stated in positive terms, we are looking for a positive goal; not what you don’t want. This is great if you work with people who want a relationship. Most people can tell you exactly what they don’t want in a person, which is usually those qualities present in the person they just left. I am not interested in what you don’t want, but what you do want. Are you reading this for therapy or business? a. Has to be in your realm of experience. b. Specific—Sensory Based—See—Hear—Feel. c. Small chunk size.

157

Mind Control Secrets Example: I want to kill my wife. I want to be a vegetarian. I want to stop smoking. It’s a specific goal, initiated and controlled by the client. Ask yourself specifically, “How are you going to do that.” 2. What will that do for you? (Specifically). a. I will feel better. b. Is there any other way you can feel better other than killing your wife? 3. How will you know when you have it? a. How will you see, hear and feel? 4. Where, when and with whom do you want it? Do you want this everywhere in your life, or is this a specific situation? For example, if someone wanted to be more assertive in their life. Where, when and with whom do you want to be more assertive, specifically? Home, kids, work? Is it sensory-based and ecological? Make sure it is good for the whole system. 5. How will this affect other aspects (or people) in your life? Assertiveness, for example. Let us consider the example of the lady who wanted to become a vegetarian. This decision isn’t something that will affect the lady alone. The entire family may have to eat less meat. Similarly, if a member of the family wants to quit smoking, it will mean that the whole family may have to smoke outside.

158

Information Gathering 6. What stops you from having this already? 7. What resources do you have that will help you obtain the outcome you desire? a. Success in one area can be transferred to success in another. 8. What additional resources do you need to obtain it? 9. How are you going to get there? a. First step: Be specific and achievable. How will you start? b. Is there more than one way to get there?

The following story will help exemplify this point.

The Guru There was this town that had a town Guru. He was a person who knew all the answers. Now, there was a family that was having a problem with their son. The son would eat chocolate and candy, get hyper, eat more candy, and go on until he was out of control. After exhausting all their resources, they went to the Guru and told him of their problem. He told them to come back in two weeks, by which time, he said, he would have an answer for them. Rumors spread about this Guru who was supposed to have all the answers immediately. Was he losing it? Finally, the two weeks over, they went back to the Guru. He told them what to do, and it worked. All the elders of the town got together to find out why it took the Guru so long (two weeks) to get an answer. 159

Mind Control Secrets They approached the Guru for a clarification. He said he had a problem with sweets; he got hyper and would then pass out. He admitted that he hadn’t realized it was a problem until they had presented it to him. How could he help them with a problem that he himself had, until he had solved it for himself? So he went to his Guru to find out how to solve the problem. Guru = Gee, you are you. Now let us move on to a simple exercise on how to lose weight. Exercise: How to lose weight: (P) What is it, specifically, that you want? (E) To lose weight. (P) How much weight do you specifically want to lose? (E) I want to get down to 110 lbs. (P) What would that do for you? (E) It would make me look better and feel better and fit in my clothes better. (P) So you want to look better and feel better, and losing weight would do that for you? (P) Are there any specific foods that are primarily giving you a problem? (E) I am a sweetaholic. (P) What types of sweets, particularly? (E) Candy, cookies, cake and pie. (P) When do you usually eat the sweets? (E) I do well during the day, but when I get home—ah! That’s when I lose it! (P) So you want to eat better, salads, etc.? Did you ever eat that good? (E) No! (P) So this will be a new behavior for you? (P) How will this affect other people in your life? (E) They would like it. 160

Information Gathering (P) What stops you from already achieving your goal? (E) I never learned to eat fruits and vegetables. (P) What resources do you already have that will help you get there? (E) Books, etc.; I have motivation, desire, programming. (P) What additional resources do you need to obtain it? (P) So you have taken these steps but something hasn’t clicked? (P) What is the next step you are going to take to get there?

When you communicate, it is normal to Distort—Generalize—Delete information, and it is usually the most important information that is left out. Let’s take a peek at what these are.

Distortions Mind-Reading Pattern This is apparently knowing what someone else is thinking or feeling. Response: How do you know? You really don’t know. They did it in the past. “Past behavior is the best predictor for future behavior.” This sounds good but doesn’t mean anything. Always ask. Always probe. Always question. Never take anything for granted. Prediction: Recover source of information Another example: “I know you are upset with me.” How do you really know?

161

Mind Control Secrets Lost-Performative Pattern This is general semantics from Alfred Korzipski. It’s about how language is processed. As we already learned, sentences have two structures: the deep structure and the surface structure. They are deleting what is being judged. It’s bad to be inconsistent. Response: (Gather evidence) Who says it is bad? According to whom? How do you know? You have lost the performance factor. You need to focus on who or what is the performance thing you are doing. Prediction: Recover Source of Belief. Recover Performative Recover Belief Strategy Cause-Effect Pattern “You make me sad.” Response: How does what I am doing cause you to be sad? How do you know you are sad, specifically? Prediction: Recover choice. Complex-Equivalents Pattern Two experiences being interpreted as being synonymous. “She’s always yelling at me; she doesn’t like me!” Response: Have you ever yelled at someone you liked? How does her yelling mean . . . ? You could be yelling because you just got a letter from the IRS. You have to break the equivalence. Prediction: Recover CEQ. Counterexample. 5. Presuppositions Pattern Example: If my husband knew how much I suffered, he wouldn’t do that.

162

Information Gathering Three Suppositions: 1. I suffer. 2. My husband acts in some way. 3. My husband doesn’t know I suffer. Response: 1. How do you choose to suffer? 2. How is he reacting? 3. How do you know he doesn’t know? You are presupposing he cares. By challenging it, you are breaking the other’s model of the world. 1. Specify choice and verb. 2. Specify what he does. 3. Recover internal representation and CEQ. Generalizations Universal-Quantifiers Pattern (All, every, never, everyone, no one, etc.) Examples: She never listens to me! Everyone does everything. (Kids use this a lot.) Everyone is going to the dance. You have to do this/that. Challenge! What would happen if you did? Response: (find counterexamples) Never! What would happen if she did? Prediction: Recover counterexample effects, outcome. 163

Mind Control Secrets Modal-Operators Pattern Modal Operators of Necessity (required) (Should, shouldn’t, must, must not, have to, need to, it is necessary) Example: I have to take care of her. Response: What would happen if you did? What would happen if you didn’t? Prediction: Recover effects, outcome. Modal Operators of Possibility (or impossibility) (Can/can’t, will/won’t, may/may not, possible/ impossible) Example: I can’t tell him the truth. Response: What prevents you? What would happen if you did? Prediction: Recover causes.

Deletions Nominalizations Pattern (Process words, verbs that have been turned into nouns) Turning a non-concrete process into a concrete event. If you can’t put it in a wheelbarrow . . . If you can’t see it, feel it, or touch it, it is a nominalization. Example: “I’m in love.” What does love look like? This is fun in communication because you find out if you are speaking the same language or not. Response: Who’s communicating what to whom? How would you like to communicate? Prediction: Turn back into a process, recover deletion, and referential index. Process and specify verb.

164

Information Gathering Unspecified-Verbs Pattern Example: “He rejected me.” People don’t specify what’s going on with them. Response: How, specifically, did he reject you? Prediction: Specify the verb. Simple-Deletions Pattern a. Simple Deletions. Example: “I am uncomfortable.” b. Lack of Referential Index. Example: “They don’t listen to me.” (fails to indicate a specific person or thing) c. Comparative Deletions. Example: “She’s a better person.” (good, better, best, more, less, most, least, worse, worst) Response: a. About what, whom? b. Who, specifically, doesn’t listen to you? c. Better than whom? Better than what? Compared to whom, what? Prediction: a. Recover Deletion b. Recover Referential Index c. Recover Comparative Deletion

165

Chapter 9

Beliefs It’s no secret that some people are more successful than others. Why is this? Most people think truly amazing or successful individuals were handed all the right cards in life, such as a powerful family, wealth or a great home life. Is this true? Are successful people smarter, are they better businessmen, or do they have something that others lack? If you look at history, you’ll see that it’s not necessarily any of the above. Rather, it’s something in the internal operating system of their brains. Look at Mahatma Gandhi, Ho Chi Min or the Wright Brothers. None of these folks were extremely powerful or came from great wealth. They were all common individuals, lawyers or bicycle repairmen. Yet they accomplished great things, because they expected nothing less of themselves. That internal operating system within the brain is the place where individuals determine what they expect from themselves. People always live up to their own expectations. If you expect to fail, guess what? You’ll certainly fail. If you expect to be the CEO of a company, you will! It’s all in the power of belief. The human belief system is a very powerful thing. What many don’t realize is that they set themselves up for failure without ever saying a word. Your internal feelings and beliefs about yourself can either make you or break you… they truly are that powerful. This is not to say there won’t be bumps along the way, even with a powerful and positive belief system. It would be fantasy to assume success will simply fall in your lap. There 167

Mind Control Secrets will be trials along the way, but these can be turned into positives by learning from mistakes. This means taking less successful ideas and turning them into feedback instead of failure. The formula for success lies in correcting and tweaking the system.

Beliefs: Personal Potential Learning mind control isn’t an overnight venture. Though the keys we’re showing you here are really very simple, it can take weeks or months to achieve. Tapping into the creative resources within you is sometimes a trial-by-error system. As you grow in your success, you learn about yourself, as well as your limitations and strengths. This takes patience and time…which is what unsuccessful people often lack. As simple as it may sound, there’s a great lesson here. You could assume that, though a system of success sounds great, it will likely not work. Or, you could absorb it into your internal operating system, knowing that it will provide guidance in fulfilling your dreams. It’s all in how you look at the opportunity and code it inside that brain of yours. Believing in yourself is the absolute most important step in any venture you’ll ever undertake. When you take on new challenges and tell yourself that you will succeed, you can and will prove yourself right.

The Pygmalion Effect This theory is not a new one, but it is one that can make your dreams come true. In 1957, a professor by the name of Robert Merton researched how people’s perceptions of those around them influenced their own. As a research project, a young teacher was told she would be teaching a 168

Beliefs group of gifted students. These students actually were not gifted at all. In fact, they fell within the average, but also had behavior problems. Very soon, the teacher discovered that the students were not engaged, interested or willing to behave under her current teaching style. She worked very hard to come up with a new approach. When she did, she sparked the curiosity of those students. After a very fruitful year, the students were engaged and learning; and they proved it with a 20-30 point IQ jump! How did this work? Did the teacher turn those average students into gifted students? Yes. She changed her style based on the belief that those students were gifted and that she must improve her teaching style to match their potential. Had she expected less of them, the results would have been very different. Now, can you imagine what would happen in your life if you were operating at the same level of expectation? Merton’s theory developed into what is called the Social Theory, or Social Structure. That’s a fitting name, because it’s very true. People form their behaviors and expectations around those individuals with whom they’re associated. If the expectation is low, then the performance will be also, and vice versa. If you know other people expect you to fail, you may form a belief in your own failure. If you have even one person “in your corner,” though, you’re much more likely to believe in your success. Of course, we also use the power of belief to our advantage when we influence others to our way of thinking and acting.

Beliefs and Biochemistry Your beliefs not only affect your thinking, they also affect your health and wellbeing.

169

Mind Control Secrets One great illustration of this is the “Placebo Effect.” In one study, patients were randomly selected to receive either a “sugar pill” or an analgesic for a headache, without the patient knowing which. Needless to say, the researchers were quite surprised when the sugar pill recipients, believing they received an analgesic, had close to the same results as those who actually received the pain medication! What does that tell us? It tells us that what people perceive and believe is what happens. The individuals who received the sugar pill believed the medication would work for the headache, so it did. The Placebo Effect is so strong that even the FDA acknowledges the fact that individuals can benefit from a “fake” pill simply because they believe in it. So, do you see how important a person’s belief system is? Another study did something similar, but they gave one group a stimulant and the other a depressant. The group that was given the stimulant was told that it was a depressant, and vice versa. The results were amazing! The participants reported results consistent with the expected outcome, not the actual medication. They actually controlled their biochemical makeup. Those study members who received the stimulant reported feeling drowsy and groggy. Those who were given the depressant felt full of energy. It was just opposite of the actual effects of the medication, but they told themselves that was how they were supposed to feel, therefore that’s how they felt!

Real versus Imagined Experience Medical science has proven that our brain does not differentiate between what is vividly imagined and what is actually experienced. The same neurological impulses are triggered throughout the nervous system for both situations. This is important for you, because it signifies that, when you close your eyes and imagine yourself succeeding, you 170

Beliefs are more likely to achieve your goals. In fact, one could say you’re preparing yourself for success.

Imagine this to test out this theory: Think of a large yellow lemon…the mere name signifies sour. Now close your eyes and imagine biting into that lemon. The sour juice drenches your tongue, making your nose twitch and your mouth pucker. Feel the cold surface of the lemon on your hands and close to your nose. Smell the citrus scent, reminding you how sour it really tastes. Are you salivating? I bet the answer is YES! That’s because your nervous system has been activated just as if you had that lemon in your mouth. This power of imagination can work to the benefit or the demise of many people. Some begin to feel fear or stress at the mere sound of a certain situation. This can actually cause them health problems. When the fear response is activated, the immune system can be suppressed, making the individual more prone to illness. How well can an individual function under great stress, fear and illness? How tempting is it to attempt to shut down, let someone else take over, or even self-medicate with alcohol, nicotine or food? Fortunately, there’s a better way.

Mental Rehearsal – The Secret Weapon For years, the Russians have dominated the Olympic Games in gymnastics. Many people have wondered, yet never truly understood, why the Russians’ performance was so excellent. What’s their secret? They employ a sports psychologist. This psychologist offers psychological techniques that enhance the athletes’ physical techniques. Not only do the Russians prepare their bodies, but also their minds. Think about it…when you rehearse failure in your mind, what are you likely to do? On the other hand, if you 171

Mind Control Secrets follow the example of the Russians and their secret mental preparedness, you can succeed just as they do. When you rehearse the pictures of success in your mind, you soon will be seeing them in person.

Reaching the Mind with Visualization Visualization is a very important aspect in human behavior. With the power of visualization, you can see yourself in successful positions. You can imagine breaking through the limitations and boundaries that are holding you back. Here is an exercise to help you see the power of visualization: Pointing your finger forward, and without moving your feet, turn your body in a clockwise motion as far as you can. Make a mental note of this position. Close your eyes and visualize yourself in the above exercise. Now, with your eyes closed, continue, but stretch yourself a little further (in your mind). Imagine yourself turning three feet further than you turned the first time. Now open your eyes and repeat the first exercise. You went further than the first time, right? You can get past your mental limits and boundaries that you set for yourself. That’s because, when you imagine that you can, you do! Success is just a visualization away!

Breaking Beliefs Most people strive to reach a record, but never seek to break that record. They never seek a higher goal for themselves. You may be wondering, what does that mean? It means that, if you only strive for something that has already been accomplished, you may never fulfill your full potential.

172

Beliefs Take running, for example. Prior to the early 1950’s no one had ever run a mile in less than four minutes. After Roger Bannister, a college student, ran the mile in less than four minutes, it wasn’t long before others followed his lead. Why was that? It happened because people fail to reach for what they think is unobtainable. Amazingly, after Bannister broke the record, 37 other runners broke the same record that year. What does this tell us? Never take the “top goal” and quit! Strive for more and reach for the unthinkable.

Beliefs Are Never Absolutes Beliefs are sometimes true, but oftentimes they are only an opinion, a personal perception of a situation. Did you ever stop to think that someone who is feeling depressed would have a different belief about a situation than he or she would when they were feeling better? For instance, if a driver cuts you off on your way home from work, how do you react? If you’ve had a bad day, you might honk your horn, scream at the other driver or exhibit other forms of road rage. If you’re feeling good about your day, however, you’ll probably shrug it off and continue. So, the same event can be perceived quite differently. People have beliefs about a variety of things they experience everyday, but this doesn’t make their beliefs set in stone or rules to live by. Sometimes perceptions are wrong. Perceptions may be off or misguided because of faulty information. Think about the game you played in elementary school—we called it “telephone”—where you whispered a secret in the ear of a person standing next to you. By the end of the line, the details changed. Stories were different, and perceptions were certainly different. See how things can become distorted?

173

Mind Control Secrets You need to understand that, no matter what the belief, it can change. You need to evaluate each belief and determine whether that belief is true for everyone, or whether it’s tainted by some other motive that may inhibit your ability. The best way to understand whether the belief is positive or negative is to ask yourself whether the belief will hold you back or empower you. Most successful individuals share the belief that all things happen for a reason, and that their lives aren’t ruled simply by “fate.” The belief that fate or blessing provides a successful outcome can cause distress and frustration. Success does not fall in anyone’s lap; you have to make it happen!

The Famous and Intelligent Proven Wrong Large companies and those seeking advertisements look to those who are famous or intelligent to promote their product. This happens because the public has a positive regard for the individual, allowing them to believe what they say. But what if they’re wrong? Bill Gates once promoted the fact that no computer needed more than 250 kilobytes of RAM. Dr. Lee De Forest claimed that man would never reach the moon, no matter how many scientific advances came along. In 1905, the head of the U.S. Patent office is believed to have said, “Everything that can be invented has been invented”! So, those who are intelligent, educated, or famous don’t always know best. Never take limitations as whole truths. Always strive for one step better. The four minute mile, cell phones, and even the Internet were once considered impossible! Now imagine living without them. What if no one had ever 174

Beliefs promoted those new ideas? Our computers wouldn’t have the memory or capabilities they now have. No one would have walked on the moon. The four-minute mile wouldn’t be run in high schools as it is today. Certainly, our lives would be different without our “needed” cell phones and Internet. (I couldn’t even have written this book without the Internet!) Dreams are what make success come true. Dream, and dream big!

Beliefs Become True Saying that beliefs are not always true is simply stating a fact. However, with certain beliefs, the individual often finds that the belief comes true. It has been taught over and over that what individuals believe and think is their fate. We are a product of our internal belief system. No matter how faulty the belief, the person who has the belief will inevitably live it. People become what they believe because that’s how they perceive the opportunity and environment around them. People don’t perceive reality, but they do perceive their perception of reality. Read that sentence again. It’s a mind-boggling idea, but one that is unbelievably true. A good example of this theory can be seen when two people have a verbal argument. Both parties are angry. When they think of the argument, they will recall different things. Their minds will take in parts of the altercation, changing, deleting and even distorting the information. People also have the tendency of remembering a negative expression or action much longer than a positive one. Perhaps a child has done a host of good things, but the one time she messes up, she has trouble living it down. Then,

175

Mind Control Secrets if the child does something wrong again, the parents will automatically return to the negative experience. People have self-fulfilling prophecies, but not by accident. They set themselves up for such situations. A nagging, suspicious wife can drive even a faithful husband away with her constant negativity. Strong and passionate beliefs can oftentimes become true, because we persist in them until they become reality. If you belief you’re a pushover that can never persuade someone else to your way of thinking, or believe you’re just not cut out to be a salesman, that will become true. So, be careful with your negative beliefs, because you may just create self-fulfilling prophecies that you don’t want.

Perceptual Blind Spot In the last chapter, we looked at the idea of distortions and deletions. Sometimes the brain will delete something because of a belief system. Have you ever searched high and low for something, all the time telling yourself that you hate looking for things, and that you won’t be able to find it because you’re so terrible at finding things? Usually, someone else comes along and immediately grabs whatever you were looking for. Often, it was in a place where you’d already looked two or three times. What’s going on? Are you having trouble with your eyesight? No, this phenomenon is known as a perceptual blind spot. Because you’re so busy telling yourself that you won’t find what you’re looking for, your eyes scan right across the item without seeing it. This is also called a negative visual hallucination. This idea can be expanded into “blind spots” about success, health, wealth and all other facets of our experience.

176

Beliefs Beliefs can cause your success or failure in the same way they can cause you to not see a pair of sunglasses or a set of keys. If you believe that there are no opportunities and that you will never be successful, you’ll miss the opportunity right under your nose.

Creating Beliefs Beliefs come from our experiences and from the individuals around us. Beliefs are drawn from friends, family members, educators and local heroes. These perceptions and beliefs are important, because they make us who we are, but we must remember that our beliefs are only as good as our perceptions. Beliefs are never absolute truths, and shouldn’t be treated as such. Evaluating your beliefs to ensure that they’re not holding you back is of the utmost importance. That’s because, as you’ve seen here, beliefs become embedded into our brains and become our behaviors…which are our lives!

177

Chapter 10

Changing with Logical Levels Perspective Is Everything! Our brain is a vast informational system that has a series of “maps.” These maps grow as new information and experiences are input into our system. There’s a lot of territory around these maps in our brains, and sometimes our perspective limits the incoming information, therefore constraining our map. Our perspective, simply put, is how we feel and think about situations. Sometimes our perspective on new experiences, tasks or information can guide us in the wrong direction. It’s important to make sure we learn to control our thinking. That way, we can handle change in smaller steps, making it more manageable. Smaller and more manageable steps make the change seem easier, therefore allowing for more confidence handling new situations.

Logical Levels There are different levels at which change can occur. As with anything, it’s easier to change things at a much lower level than one that is more complex. For example, when you think of updating your home, you think of colors, decorations and minor repairs. These are all things that are easy and that won’t cost an arm and leg or take much effort. The higher-level remodeling jobs such as electrical, plumbing and replacing the carpet are much more difficult. 179

Mind Control Secrets Look at the diagram below and determine the levels, then compare them to the level of change that you’re looking for. When the levels of the diagram are all satisfied, you’ll be happier and more content. This can be called congruence, which is the state of individuals when they’re comfortable with their beliefs, values and skills. Misalignment or levels that are out of order can cause an individual’s thought patterns to be incorrect, therefore leading to failure.

The Right Questions When you’re looking to change, it’s important to have a good foundation and understand of why you are changing. Sometimes answering why is the hardest part; that amazes many people. Here are the questions that you need to ask yourself in order to determine the best plan of action…and if the change is a good one. Remember the who, what, where, when, why and how of answering questions? Well, life’s big questions are no different. The environment surrounding your change is very important. This is sometimes the constraining factor of change in your life. Some people are confined to the environment in which they live; sometimes it can change and other times you have to find a way around it. The environment can answer your where, when and who questions. Behavior involves the actions and behaviors surrounding the changes. This is the what question. Behavior is directly linked to the environment level. Capabilities are about your knowledge base and show you how you can accomplish your change with your skills.

180

Changing with Logical Levels Your capabilities are your guiding force, and answer your how questions. Beliefs and values are your motivational base and are what allows you to begin the change itself. This is your why question; it addresses the importance associated with the change. Identity is your sense of self and, in many cases, guides your relation to others. This is the who question. Purpose, though not one of the five levels, looks at the entire picture, which is sometimes difficult. This is the reason and driving force behind the change, the reason why the change is necessary. This is the what for question.

Logical Levels Step-by-Step One of the areas where most people go wrong is not establishing a guideline or “method to their madness.” Using the levels and breaking them down into smaller steps will ensure success. Think about it this way; when a person goes to climb a mountain, they don’t take one huge step in hopes of reaching the top all at once. They take a series of smaller steps that eventually take them to the summit. The same is true in achieving goals; develop a plan and take smaller steps!

Out of Whack The old saying that you can‘t fix what you don’t acknowledge is very true. It‘s important to admit that a change is necessary. What ever it’s worth or cost to you personally, if you don’t put a price tag on it, you likely won’t adhere as closely to the steps!

181

Mind Control Secrets

The Right Level After admitting there is a need for change, you must discover at what level the change is needed. Really taking inventory will help you discover the level of change you need. For example, do you need to mend a relationship or improve your sales numbers? Is there another area that is suffering or could improve?

Putting It into Action As with anything, change in your life must come from motivation, and from the understanding that a change could help you succeed or better your life. It’s also necessary to obtain or find the right tools to help you succeed. Those tools may be other people, education, business or something else that provides the needed foundation for your change.

Uses for logical levels Using logical levels can assist you in springing into action after you’ve answered the questions and surrounded yourself with useful tools. Here is how to use the levels in a practical and efficient manner.

Information Gathering You can use the logical levels when gathering information, as we talked about in the last chapter. Obviously, getting the facts and making good use of them is important! You wouldn’t do a research paper without first gathering the information. After finding the information, organize it into a system that you can understand.

Building Relationships Building relationships within the family is important in a change, because it typically changes the dynamics of the 182

Changing with Logical Levels entire family. This is especially true in changes such as marriage or divorce, where the entire family is affected. Understanding how the family can work together, and implementing family bonds, will help continue and make the change more successful.

Improve Performance Whether it’s a business or personal change that’s in question, it is important to ensure that you’re doing your best. In business, is it a financial decision, employee morale, or an ethical situation that needs to be improved? In your personal life, do you need to be a more involved parent or an attentive child…or do you need to step back and give loved ones their space?

Leadership and Confidence What’s this book about? Of course! The levels of change are instrumental in establishing better confidence levels and developing personal techniques to improve your leadership methods and achieve your goals.

Finding the Tools for Change There are certain requirements that are needed for change. Among these are the desire to change, knowing how to change and the opportunity for change. Deciding that you can make it happen and accepting the fact that you have choices will assist you in the change process.

Environment The environment, your surroundings, is one of the most important aspects of change. Sometimes the environment

183

Mind Control Secrets is simply not conducive to change, so it makes it impossible. Instead of giving up hope, how about realigning; this will make change easier and will help you achieve your goal. Changing your environment to more conducive surroundings with helpful people, businesses or friends can help make the change an easier one. For example, if you want to learn a new language, it’s much easier when you surround yourself with others who speak that new language. Here are a few environmental questions to help decide the right environment choices for you: • • •

When do you work and feel the best? Where are the environments where you excel? What time of day are you most successful?

The answers to these questions will help place you in the right environment.

Behavior For the sake of NLP, behavior is not only your observable actions, but also the way you feel about those actions. How you feel about your behavior is generally the driving force behind the action, inspiring it again and again. It may well be the purpose that drives your behavior. Until you understand that, you may have a difficult time changing your behavior. Determining whether or not your behavior is in line with goals is sometimes difficult, but here are a few questions that can help. •

Are your actions consistent with your goals?

184

Changing with Logical Levels • • • •

Are your behaviors positive, and do they keep you happy? Is there a pattern in your behavior? If so, is it consistent with your goals? What do you notice about others; are there patterns? Does your body language change in different situations? Note the differences.

Maximizing positive behavior is important when on the achieving path, whether the behavior is eating a salad at dinner, or practicing mirroring and matching. For a while, it’s a conscious effort to maximize the right behaviors. After a while, it becomes old hat. On the flip side of that, you’ll want to decrease bad behavior by eliminating it.

Capabilities The human mind is a learning machine. There’s no doubt that some people have skills or talents that are inborn, but that’s not true for every skill. Some people seem more “capable” than others, and oftentimes others mistakenly think that capability is based on intelligence. Most researchers and business owners now realize that the best employees are those who are team-oriented and have a positive attitude. Those who look at new challenges or change with a positive spirit can acquire new skills and capabilities. Just like you learn to ride a bike or ski, you can learn new talents throughout your life if you have the desire and right attitude. NLP looks to the learning and acquiring of new skills, but the core theory is based on the fact that all skills are learnable. The core theory of NLP is the belief that

185

Mind Control Secrets individuals can learn by watching others and modeling their behavior on the positive influence of others. Asking yourself the following questions can help you get an idea of your capabilities and help you better understand where you can make improvements. •

•

Think back and ask yourself about a skill that you learned at a previous time. Thinking about the events, happenings and situation that lead to the positive learning of this skill can help you recognize the pattern to make it happen again. What are you good at? What do others comment and compliment you on? Recognizing the patterns and behaviors around these questions can help you focus attention, leading you to succeed again.

Beliefs & Values Beliefs and values drive people to either achieve their goals or be lost in trying. The way we feel about something, especially one of our goals, motivates us to continue on. Seeking out a goal is not always easy and, since success does not come overnight, this motivation is imperative. Our beliefs not only keep us moving toward the end result, but also help us rank our goals and wants. If there are two important things on the agenda, we have to rank them and make a decision as to which to do first. Most people will move toward the goal or “thing” that has the highest price tag. For example, we may get great recognition for playing a round of golf, but if we fail to go to work, the money is shut off. Beliefs also keep us in the place or environment where we need to be. If our goal is to get into shape, then our goal

186

Changing with Logical Levels is best achievable in the gym or fitness area. Our belief is that fitness is associated with the gym, but that the place to get fit and in shape is not at the ice cream parlor. In the logical levels, our beliefs and values drive the lower levels, allowing for all of the levels to come into alignment. If you’re concerned that there may be a conflict between the levels, here are questions to help make a determination. • • •

What is important to you and why? What is important to others? What do you believe to be right from wrong?

Identity Many think that a person’s identity is based on skills, intelligence or their behavior. NLP looks at the identity of the person as separate from their behavior. Instead of lumping people into a category based on their actions, NLP sees behavior as a consequence of an underlying motive. This belief is an optimistic view of mankind and avoids attaching labels to people based on their behavior. Now this does not sound like a major theory, but it is, because we say a great deal about our expectations of others in the way we speak to them. If we speak to someone about bad behavior and attach it to their identity, we’re sending them the message that their character is flawed. We need to speak about the behavior and avoid negative affect to the identity level of the individual. Here are questions to answer if there is conflict surrounding identity. •

How do you express yourself?

187

Mind Control Secrets • • • •

How do you feel about yourself? How do others feel about you? Do you label others? Do others have an accurate picture of who you really are?

Purpose The purpose or reason behind change is the reason for which people journey onward to their goal. For some people, their purpose is larger than their identity, so they achieve great things. Sometimes a person will journey through life questioning his purpose in life, even though it’s right in front of him. Those people are looking too hard! Through hard times and great suffering, there have been individuals that have persevered because their passion was the greatest force in their life. Look at the Dalai Lama, and the suffering he endured and resistance he met. His passion was definitely a driving force…some might say the only force. A passion for something will generally keep an individual on track for much longer than normal. People will endure great things when they feel strongly about something. Finding a passion or purpose will guide people toward their goals regardless of the conflict or troubles they cross during their journey. Answering the following questions will help with your purpose. • •

What are you here on Earth for? How do you want people to remember you when you die?

188

Changing with Logical Levels •

What strengths can you use to contribute to a higher good?

Recognizing Other Peoples Logical Levels Of course, this section wouldn’t be complete without discussing how you can use logical levels when you interact with others. By recognizing other people’s comments you can determine their logical levels and/or conflict. Being able to determine the level of the individual will enable you to help them make the necessary changes (or influence them to make the changes you desire). To recognize another’s logical levels, you need to understand that it’s not always what they say, but where the emphasis is placed in the sentence. Here are some statements and evaluations: I can’t do it here. I can’t do it here. I can’t do it here. I can’t do it here. I can’t do it here.

Statement about identity. Statement about beliefs. Statement about capability. Statement about behavior. Statement about environment.

189

Chapter 11

Calibration Subconscious Communication, Level 1 To understand and communicate with another person’s subconscious mind, it’s necessary to review basic rapport and look a little more deeply at how the human mind, in theory, works. Once you’ve understood this, you can begin to see how successful people are able to bypass the critical factors of the mind. The first thing you need to do to sharpen your skills is to learn how to focus on your target’s communication style. You need to learn how to calibrate your target, or anyone with whom you are communicating. We’ve discussed communication styles, but now let’s put it to practical application. Here’s a story that will illustrate calibration and rapport skills: I was on my way from Chicago to Newark on Memorial Day one year to speak at a conference, when an opportunity to sharpen my communication skills came my way. I got to the airport to find that I had missed my plane. Now, I do recollect that it was totally my fault. When I got the tickets, I had not checked the timings closely. I thought the plane was scheduled to leave at 1:11; when I got to the gate, I discovered—to my horror—that the plane had already left… at 11:11! Surprised, I checked the ticket. To my dismay,

191

Mind Control Secrets the ETD indicated on my ticket, though in light print, was indeed the correct time, namely, 11:11. I had misread it. I went to the ticket counter and found a long line, due to some weather problems; I fell in line and started thinking of how to get to the conference. My first reaction was to go on the offensive and point out the light printing. In fact, I was taking my self-anger and was externally focusing it on the situation. As the line got closer to the front, I could see the anger that the airline agents were being subjected to. Naturally, they were very defensive. I realized that I needed another strategy to get my goal of getting to the conference without paying a huge amount. Right before I got to the front, I overheard that all the flights on that airline were full. When it was my turn to approach the counter, I took a deep breath and walked up. I looked the agent in the eye. I saw she was tired and worn out. I slumped my shoulders and appeared tired, too. “Looks like you’re having a rough day,” I said very tiredly. “You would not believe it,” she said ruefully. I looked at the line as she did, saying, “Yeah, but do you work this weekend?” “No, a couple of hours and I am out of here for the holiday.” “Well, keep that picture in your mind, and it may help you get through the rest of the day. Got any special plans?” I asked after a split-second pause, trying to get her to pull out of the situation and get into a better mood. I added energy to my speech and pulled my shoulders back. “Yeah, I can’t wait!” she smiled for the first time. “Well I hate to admit this, but I really screwed up.” I took out my ticket. “I hate to show you how silly I was (I paused)—did you ever make a stupid mistake?” I asked, hoping she would want to help. 192

Calibration “Oh, all the time! Let me see—I bet I have fouled up worse,” she said as she took my ticket. “Keep thinking of this weekend,” I said as I handed her the ticket, anchoring a positive. “So you misread the ticket?” she asked. “Yeah, it was silly,” I replied. “Well it was hard to read—and all our flights are full,” she replied. “I was going to a conference this weekend, where I was to speak to a group of therapists and hypnotists. I guess I will miss it. Well, you keep thinking of this weekend with your family,” I said, exhaling and looking down, going back to being tired. “Sounds interesting. Let’s see what we can do,” she replied in an upbeat mood. She spent a couple of minutes at her computer; then looking up she said brightly, “Get to the next terminal; I got you on a business flight on another airline! Hurry, and have a good time!” She smiled as she handed me the new ticket. “Enjoy your conference” was her last comment. “You keep your eyes on the weekend!” I said as I left the counter. By pacing and calibrating to the ticket agent’s state, I was able to establish a rapport with her and lead her into a better state, a state in which I was able get her to want to help me. You experience the world by collecting information through your five senses and processing it internally. The five primary senses are visual, auditory, kinesthetic, gustatory (taste), and olfactory (smell). As your brain processes input from your five senses, that input is translated into corresponding internal representations, or maps, that create a likeness of the real world.

193

Mind Control Secrets So through your eyes, ears, and sense of touch, taste, and smell, you make contact with the world, what is called reality. However, it isn’t so much what is out there; it’s the things you see, hear, touch, taste and smell which fill your everyday experience. It is the maps of reality inside your head—your beliefs, values and biases; experiences of the past; dreams, hopes, fears and expectations of the future; and immediate, short-term and long-term wants and needs—which fill your thoughts and feelings and are the major portion of the reality to which you respond. The same is true for each person you encounter. What is important to remember is that your perceptions and “realities” are different from those of someone else because your central nervous system selectively “filters” the information as it is received by your brain. Consider for instance, a news item—have you ever watched the news and heard several eyewitness accounts of a plane crash? If you had, you probably noticed that the accounts differed in subtle ways. One person starts off by describing the noise of the aircraft as it crashed. Another person talks about the sight of the plane hitting the ground and bursting into flames. Still another person describes the sick feeling that came over them when they realized the plane was going to crash. Every minute of the day, your representational systems are bombarded with an incredible amount of information. Your central nervous system selectively sifts through this information, allowing only a portion of it to reach your conscious mind. These filtering processes are called deletion, distortion and generalization. Without these filters, you would be engulfed by the incessant stream of information. Each person has his or her own unique perception of the world. Your family, friends, coworkers, neighbors, and colleagues view the world through a different set of filters 194

Calibration than you do. What you say, what you think, and what you do may mean something totally different to them than it does to you. Your representational systems influence your thinking and, over time, you gradually develop preferences in the way you use them. As we talked about in a previous chapter, the three primary representational systems are visual, auditory, and kinesthetic. The olfactory (smell) and gustatory (taste) systems are usually used as triggers to the other systems. Most people will use one system more than the other two, with the result that the preferred system is the one with which fine distinctions are made. For instance, people who are influenced more by what they see are said to be visual. Other people rely more on what they hear, and they are said to be auditory. For yet others, their favorite method of focusing is through feelings and sensations, and they are known as kinesthetic. Those people with a preference for the visual representational system think primarily in pictures. If you asked them, “Do you know John?” they would very likely reply, “Is he the tall man with the thin moustache who drives that dark blue Mustang?” instead of mentioning his accent or how they feel about him. Their visual descriptions will be more detailed than those of an auditory or kinesthetic person. By contrast, auditory people will tend to make finer distinctions in sound than in images or feelings. After a presentation, they will often remember the exact words that a person used, but might not be able to recall as quickly the color of the speaker’s dress or how they felt during the presentation. They would be more likely to remember that John had a Southern drawl. Auditory people can be easily

195

Mind Control Secrets distracted by background noise and often prefer to work in places where they have a soothing background. People who prefer the kinesthetic system rely heavily on their feelings of experience. They would rather “get a feel” for something than look at a picture or hear about it. They would tell you that John is thick-skinned, but also has his head on his shoulders. Kinesthetics generally make good counselors and negotiators, because they can be extremely sensitive to other people’s feelings. Although most people have a preferred representational system, it does not mean that our other senses or representational systems are dormant. Rather, we use the other senses to complement what our preferred representational system communicates to us. In this way, we get a more complete picture of what is going on around us. When you know what a person’s modality is, you will know one of the most important aspects of their personality…how they perceive the world around them. This is a major factor in communication; it is a basic way in which some people are alike and others different. A person’s preferred representational system is often expressed in their choice of words. A visual person will “see the potential” of a new strategy or idea, while an auditory person will “like the way that sounds” and a kinesthetic person will tell you, “I’ve got a good feeling about that.” By paying close attention to your customers’ words, you can determine how they structure their thoughts. You won’t be able to tell what they are thinking (this is not a mind-reading course!), but you can tell “how” they are thinking. Recognizing changes in another person’s state and noticing specific conditions of body posture, breathing, vocal qualities and movement is called calibration. A person’s state is constantly changing, although sometimes the change can be as subtle as an increase in their breathing 196

Calibration rate. At other times, the change in state is obvious—a baby who was crying suddenly has a smile on its face. Calibration is a useful tool because it requires you to step outside yourself and direct your attention to the people around you. When you do that, you can identify consciously the physiological communication that is usually taken in and processed on an unconscious level. For instance, can you remember when you were a child and your mother would get angry with you? Sometimes she didn’t even have to say anything. She would get that look in her eye, and her lips would press tightly together as if she didn’t trust herself to speak. When she put her hands on her hips and squared her shoulders, then you knew you were in real trouble. By effectively calibrating nonverbal behavior, you can begin to understand human thinking and behavior. You can do this by directing your conscious efforts to seeing, hearing and sensing the other person’s internal representations through their external manifestation of it. What you’re actually doing is noting the other person’s behavioral manifestations of internal representations (“BMIRs”). This is one of the most obvious mental access points, or MAPs. For instance, if I know that you are making pictures internally (visual), then I can establish deep rapport with you by entering your world using visual language. Or, if I know that you are talking to yourself internally (auditory digital), my rapport-building behavior will involve auditory language. Conversely, if I am aware that your experience is centering on kinesthetic awareness, then my language will be oriented toward touch and feelings. The following information covers physiological clues you can look out for to determine “how” your customer is thinking, rather than what the person is thinking. Body posture: People often assume systematic, habitual postures when deep in thought and talking. These postures 197

Mind Control Secrets can indicate a great deal about the sensory representational system the person is using. The following are some typical examples: •

Visual: Leaning back with head and shoulders up or rounded. Chin tends to be pointed up.

•

Auditory: Body leaning forward, head cocked (as though listening), shoulders back, arms folded.

•

Kinesthetic: Head and shoulders down. Body leaning slightly to the person’s right.

Exercise: Identifying Body Posture Cues Political Interview Watching a political interview on television is an excellent chance to practice the skill of identifying body posture cues. These programs often depict real people responding to questions subconsciously (as opposed to a political debate, where the responses are often scripted). For this exercise, you will practice identifying body posture cues by watching a political interview show such as “Meet the Press” or “Politically Incorrect.” First, I recommend that you tape the show, but don’t watch it while you are taping it. Then, when you are ready to begin this exercise, rewind the tape to the beginning. Now you are ready to begin the exercise. Turn off the sound so that you will be able to give your full attention to the nonverbal cues used by each person. Observe the body

198

Calibration posture of the host and guest at the beginning of the show and describe it in the space provided below. As the show progresses, note any changes you observe in body posture. At the conclusion of the interview, look over your notes and write down what you believe is the representational system of the guest and the host based on your observations of their body posture. Then watch the interview again, this time with the sound on. Did their words confirm the representational system you selected? Why? Or why not? Remember: •

Visual: Leaning back with head and shoulders up or rounded. Chin tends to be pointed up.

•

Auditory: Body leaning forward, head cocked (as though listening), shoulders thrown back, arms folded.

•

Kinesthetic: Head and shoulders down. Body leaning slightly to the person’s right.

Beginning body posture, interviewer: _________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ Beginning body posture, guest: ______________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________

199

Mind Control Secrets Changes in body posture, interviewer: ________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ Changes in body posture, guest: ______________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ What is the interviewer’s preferred representational system, based on body posture? _____________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ What is the guest’s preferred representational system, based on body posture?___________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ Accessing Cues: When people are thinking and speaking, they cue or trigger certain types of sensory representations in a number of different ways, including breathing rate, “grunts and groans,” facial expressions, snapping their fingers, scratching their heads, and so on. Some of these are unique to the individual and need to be noticed and “calibrated” to the particular person performing the behaviors. Many of these cues, however, are associated with particular sensory processes and can be generalized across individuals.

200

Calibration

The following are some typical examples: •

Visual: High (in the chest) shallow breathing, eyes squinting, voice at higher pitch and faster tempo.

•

Auditory: Diaphragmatic breathing, knitted brow, fluctuating voice tone and tempo.

•

Kinesthetic: Deep abdominal breathing, deep breathy voice in lower tempo.

Exercise: Breathing, Tone and Tempo

Social Setting The easiest way to master the skill of identifying breathing patterns is practice, practice and more practice. For this exercise, you will observe the breathing, vocal tone and tempo of people in a social setting. These may be people you have just met or people you have known a long time. As you do this, also note the situation. Can you identify their preferred representational system based on their breathing, vocal tone and tempo? Remember: •

Visual: High (in the chest), shallow breathing, eyes squinting, voice at higher pitch and faster tempo.

•

Auditory: Diaphragmatic breathing, knitted brow, fluctuating vocal tone and tempo.

201

Mind Control Secrets •

Kinesthetic: Deep abdominal breathing, deep breathy voice in lower tempo.

Name: ___________________ How long have you known this person? _______________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ Describe the social setting: __________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ What is their breathing, vocal tone and tempo? ________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ What is their preferred representational system? _______ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ Gestures: People will often touch, point to, or use gestures indicating the sensory organ which they are using. Some typical examples include: •

Visual: Touching or pointing to the eyes; gestures made at or above eye level.

•

Auditory: Pointing toward and gesturing near the ears; touching the mouth or jaw. Stroking the chin thoughtfully. 202

Calibration •

Kinesthetic: Touching the chest and stomach area; gestures made below the neck.

Eye Movements: Automatic, unconscious eye movements usually accompany a particular thought process, indicating that the person is accessing one or more of the sensory representational systems. This theory has not been proven, and there is some debate as to its foundation, but to this author it appears to be useful in understanding the next level of communications. While we covered this in more depth previously, it’s worth a refresher to see how it fits into calibration. When people are thinking and talking, they move their eyes in what are known as eye-scanning or eye-accessing patterns. These movements appear to be symptomatic of their attempts to gain access to internally stored or internally generated information in their central nervous system. This information is encoded in the speaker’s mind in one or more of the representational systems. When a person “goes inside” to retrieve a memory or to create a new thought, the person “makes pictures,” and/or “talks to himself/herself,” and/or “has feelings and kinesthetic sensations.” With a little bit of practice, eye-scanning patterns are easily observable behavior. When you see people talking and thinking, you can notice their eyes are constantly in motion, darting back and forth, up and down, occasionally glancing at objects and people, but just as often “focused” on inner experiences. As previously mentioned, these movements are indicative of the way they are thinking. In the descriptions that we’ll be discussing, “looking” refers to the movements of a person’s eyes in the direction indicated. “Left” means toward the speaker’s left and “right” means toward his or her right. It’s helpful to keep in mind 203

Mind Control Secrets that this accessing behavior represents “looking” internally. That is, during the moment of information retrieval, people are generally not conscious of external visual stimuli. Rather, they are concentrating on internally stored or generated images, sounds, words and feelings. Please notice, also, that the words in parentheses in each category indicate the kind of information being accessed.

Body Posture Exercises Body Posture and Eye-Accessing Cues—Workplace Combine the skills you have learned and observe the body posture and the eye accessing cues of the people in your workplace. As you do this, note the situation also. For instance, you might observe people in the course of a company meeting, with a client, a chance meeting in the hall, etc. See if you can determine their preferred representational system based on their body posture. Then take note of their eye-movement cues. Do their eye-accessing cues indicate the same preferred representational system? Which cues are easier to identify? Why? •

Visual Body Posture Cues: Person leans back, with head and shoulders up or rounded. There is also a tendency to hold the chin up.

•

Visual Eye-Accessing Cues: Person looks up to their right or left or may stare straight ahead, eyes unfocused.

•

Auditory Body Posture Cues: Person leans forward, with the head cocked (as though listening), shoulders back, and arms folded.

204

Calibration •

Auditory Eye-Accessing Cues: Person looks sideways to the left or right, or may look down to the left (internal dialogue).

•

Kinesthetic Body Posture Cues: Person has their head and shoulders down, with the body leaning slightly to the person’s right.

•

Kinesthetic Eye-Accessing Cues: Person looks down and to the right.

Name: __________________________ Job Description: ___________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ Situation: _________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ Body Posture Cues: ________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ Eye-Accessing Cues: ________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________

205

Mind Control Secrets Preferred Representational System: __________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ Did their body posture cues and their eye-accessing cues indicate the same representational system? ____________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ Which cues were easier to identify? Why? _____________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________

Representational Systems Seeing (Visual) • Eyes: These people look up to their right or left, or their eyes may appear unfocused. • Gestures: Their gestures are quick and angular, and include pointing. • Breathing and speech: High, shallow and quick. • Words: The words that capture their attention include: see, look, imagine, perspective, reveal. • Presentations: They prefer pictures, diagrams and movies. Hearing (Auditory) • Eyes: These people look down to the left and may appear “shifty-eyed.” • Gestures: Their gestures are rhythmic, touching one’s face (i.e., rubbing the chin). • Breathing and speech: Midchest, rhythmic.

206

Calibration • •

Words: The words that capture their attention include: hear, listen, ask, tell, clicks, in-tune. Presentations: They prefer lists, summaries, quotes, readings.

Feeling (Kinesthetic) • Eyes: These people look down to the right. • Gestures: Their gestures are rhythmic, touching chest. • Breathing and speech: Deep, slow with pauses. • Words: The words that capture their attention include: feel, touch, grasp, catch on, contact. • Presentations: They prefer hands-on, do-it demonstrations, test drives.

Identifying Your Representational System For each of the following questions, think about the person, place or object described, and circle the first answer that comes to your mind. Check your responses with the assessment key provided. 1. When you think of coffee, what comes to your mind first? a. An image, e.g., a cup filled to the brim with rich, dark coffee b. A sound, e.g., coffee dripping into the glass carafe c. A touch, e.g., the warmth of the cup filled with coffee d. A smell, e.g., the aroma of coffee as you lift the cup to your mouth e. A taste, e.g., the rich taste as you take your first sip

207

Mind Control Secrets 2. When you think back to what you did on your last birthday, what is the first thing you remember? a. A taste, e.g., something you ate b. A sound, e.g., a song you heard on the radio c. A smell, e.g., of your environment d. A touch, sensation or emotion e. An image or picture, e.g., some place that you went 3. When you think about your favorite restaurant, what do you think of first? a. What you see, e.g., the décor, or the people you are with b. An emotion or touch, e.g., how you felt when you were there c. Something you hear, e.g., the conversation, the music d. A taste, e.g., your favorite dish e. A smell, e.g., the aroma from the kitchen 4. When you think of your childhood and the house that you grew up in, which of these come to mind first? a. A smell, e.g., mom baking cookies in the kitchen b. A sound, e.g., conversation as the family gathered together c. A taste, e.g., mom’s macaroni and cheese casserole d. An emotion or touch, e.g., a feeling of security, or the smooth wooden banister you held on to, as you came down the stairs e. An image, e.g., the way to the house after the first snowfall

208

Calibration 5. When you think about something humorous, what do you first think about? a. An emotion, e.g., someone tickling your feet b. A sound, e.g., a joke you heard c. An image, e.g., a favorite pet playing with a toy d. A smell e. A taste 6. When you think about your workplace, what is the first thing that you think about? a. A touch or an emotion, e.g., how you feel about the work you do b. A sound, e.g., of machinery or other people’s voices c. A taste d. A picture, e.g., what you do while at work e. A smell, e.g., of the environment 7. When you think about something you do that is physically challenging, what do you think about first? a. A sound or a conversation you have with yourself b. A touch or an emotion c. An image or a picture d. A taste e. A smell 8. When you think about your closest family member (spouse, mother, father, sister, brother), what do you think about first? a. An image, e.g., what they looked like the last time you saw them b. A smell, e.g., the favorite cologne or perfume they like to wear c. A sound, e.g., their voice d. An emotion, e.g., you feelings for them 209

Mind Control Secrets e. A taste, e.g., a meal you shared together 9. When you think about your favorite thing to do on the weekend, what comes to your mind first? a. A taste, e.g., a favorite food, like barbecued ribs b. A sound associated with doing this, e.g., the sharp crack of a baseball bat connecting with a ball c. An emotion or touch, e.g., how you feel when you think of spending your time this way d. A smell from the environment, e.g., the flowers at your favorite park e. An image, e.g., who you would do this with or where you would be 10. When you think about a major disappointment in your life (e.g., a promotion or job you didn’t get or a test you failed), what do you think of first? a. A taste b. A touch, e.g., the feel of something, or emotion, e.g., what you felt when you heard the news c. An image or picture, e.g., where you were d. A sound, e.g., what you heard or what you said to yourself e. A smell 11. When you think about something physical that you don’t like to do, e.g., taking out the garbage or weeding the garden, what comes to mind first? a. A touch, e.g., the feel of the weed as you pull it from the ground, or an emotion, e.g., how you feel about doing this task b. A taste c. A smell, e.g., the smell of the garbage as you carry it to the trash can 210

Calibration d. An image, e.g., the weeds against the dark earth e. A sound, e.g., the cricket’s chirping near the garden or the rustle of the garbage bag? 12. When you think about taking a vacation in the Bahamas, what do you think of first? a. A sound, e.g., the laughter of children as they play in the surf b. An image, e.g., palm trees swaying in the breeze against a brilliant blue sky c. A smell, e.g., the salty air from the ocean d. A taste, e.g., a cool, refreshing drink e. A touch, e.g., the feel of the warm sun as you relax on the hotel deck Visual Auditory

Kinesthetic Olfactory

(Smell) Gustatory

(Taste)

1

A

B

C

D

E

2

E

B

D

C

A

3

A

C

B

E

D

4

E

B

D

A

C

5

C

B

A

D

E

6

D

B

A

E

C

7

C

A

B

E

D

8

A

C

D

B

E

9

E

B

C

D

A

10

C

D

B

E

A

11 D

E

A

C

B

12

A

E

C

D

B

Total 211

Mind Control Secrets Circle the letter that corresponds to your choice for each question. Add up the total number of letters circled in each column. These totals are an indication of your preferred representational system. The column with the highest score is most likely your preferred representational system. Note: You will need to focus on the representational systems that you are the weakest in. Pick the one you used the least and for the next few days use those words as much as possible. Then go to the second weakest. This will build in added flexibility in you communication. It will also allow you to cross-reference much easier. Each representational system has sensory-based words called predicates (verbs, adverbs and adjectives). This is useful because sometimes your initial contact with someone will be over the phone. To determine their preferred representational system, listen to the words they select and notice which predicates are used most often. Once you become familiar with the language of the different modalities, you can then choose words that will literally “make more sense” to the people with whom you want to develop rapport.

Exercise: Building Self-Confidence This is a way to respond to criticism and stay resourceful, whether it is at home, at work, or with friends. It enables you to use criticism as feedback to improve your relationships. 1. See yourself in front of you. That self in front of you is going to learn a new approach to criticism while you watch from the outside. Do whatever you need to do to feel detached from that self. You can see

212

Calibration that self farther away, in black-and-white, or behind Plexiglas, etc. 2. Watch and listen as that self gets criticized and instantly dissociates. There are several ways that self can dissociate. He/she can surround him/herself with a Plexiglas shield when he/she is criticized. Or, that self can see the words of criticism printed within a cartoon balloon (like the comic strips), etc. That self uses one of these methods to keep feeling neutral or resourceful. 3. Watch as that self makes a slide or movie of what the criticizer is saying. What does the person mean? Does that self have enough information to make a clear, detailed picture? If the answer is “no,” gather information. If the answer is “yes,” proceed to the next step. 4. Have that self decide on a response. For example, that self can agree with any part of the criticism you agree with. Or that self could apologize, saying, “I’ll give it some serious thought,” or “I see things differently now,” and so forth. 5. Does that self want the information you got from this criticism to act differently next time? If so, have that self select a new behavior. That self will then imagine using the new behavior in detail in the future. Next, that self can step into this movie of using the new behavior to feel what it will be like. 6. Having watched that self go through this entire strategy, do you want this for yourself? If the answer is 213

Mind Control Secrets “no,” ask inside how you modify this strategy so it fits you. If the answer is “yes,” continue. 7. Thank that self for being a special resource to you in learning this strategy. Now pull that self into you, feeling him/her fill you, so that this knowledge becomes fully integrated into you. Story: The Eagle I am reminded of a couple of stories about Native Americans. In the first, a young man was talking to the Medicine Man, kind of the spiritual warrior of the Hopi tribe, the oldest tribe in the U.S. He asked the Medicine Man how he always made good decisions. The Medicine Man replied: Like most people I seem to have two dogs in me: a White dog that wants to do good things and a Black dog that wants to do bad things. Which one wins? The one I feed the most. Native Americans also have a reverence for eagles. That is true across all the tribes. At one time, there were eagles all over the United States, from the Florida Keys up to Alaska. They are coming back. Of course, Native Americans called many birds “eagles.” The turkey was the Earth Eagle, because they could use almost every part of the turkey. It was grounded but it gave them life. They called the owl the Night Eagle, because he could see at night. (Wouldn’t it be nice to see things that other people can’t see?) They had several different types of eagles that represented power, grace, freedom, discipline, and integrity, because it doesn’t kill maliciously and just seemed “above it all.”

214

Calibration The eagle just watches and keeps an eye on things. That’s why it was a matter of pride to find and wear an eagle feather. Most tribes shared certain things in common. When they went through changes in life, they would change their names. You were given a birth name, but once you came of age, you picked your own name—you were your own person; you changed. They would also change their name again when they were going through major changes in life. If their spouse died, they changed their name. If they won or lost a battle, they would change their name. Maybe we can’t change our names, but we can change the language we use with ourselves. Here’s another story: I had a friend who was a farmer, and one day he was walking past his chickens. He glanced at them and saw there was one that was ugly, a butt-ugly chicken. Every time he looked at it, it got bigger and uglier. One day he noticed that it was a lot bigger than the rest. A friend of his who happened to walk by noticed the ugly chicken and said, “Hey, man! How did you get an eagle in there? That’s not a chicken, that’s an eagle!” It acted like a chicken, but was really an eagle. He let this eagle, who thought he was a chicken, grow. The eagle felt rather restricted, for he was now bigger; he was overpowering. Slowly, he began to feel different from the others. He had different drives and urges. Finally, he said to one of his friends, after a mouse walked by, “Don’t you ever just want to get one of those, rip one apart, and eat it?” The chickens were upset and said, “You cannibal!” He

215

Mind Control Secrets talked with one of the older chickens, and they didn’t know what he should do. The farmer took the eagle and put him up in the loft of the barn and left him there for the day. The eagle began noticing that he could really see a lot of things from up here—he saw a rabbit hopping around about a quarter mile away, birds flying, etc. After a while he began to get hungry. Even the corn started to look good because the hungrier you get, the better things looked. He didn’t know what to do. He got pretty hungry and couldn’t stand it anymore. Some of our mothers used to say, if you get hungry enough, it will move you to action! So he took a deep breath and said, “You know, I am going to jump down there and eat; if the fall kills me, at least it is over. If I have to stay up here and starve to death, I may as well do something.” So he closed his eyes, took a deep breath, and I don’t know if eagles have knees, but he bent his legs and he jumped! The moment he did, nature took over and he spread his wings. As his wings shot out–that six-foot wingspan–a breeze caught him, and he began to soar. He opened his eyes for a moment, and it scared the hell out of him. All of a sudden, he looked down and he was two hundred feet in the air, and he didn’t even know how he did it. Because he took that little act of faith of just closing his eyes and jumping, there he was, flying around, and he didn’t know what to do! Then he found he could do some stuff; he flapped his wings and it made him go higher. He could tilt his wings like a jet and cut this way and cut that way. Innately, his brain and instincts took over. He was having fun. After a while, he saw a rabbit; he thought about it. He thought about the corn in the barnyard, eyed the rabbit, thought about the corn, the rabbit, the corn, dipped his 216

Calibration wings, and ate the rabbit. The minute he finished, he realized it was the best meal he had ever had; it was the way he was meant to eat, like a king. He felt guilty. He was trained to do what chickens normally did, not to do this. He flew back to the barnyard; he circled around, and the other chickens ran and hid. The other chickens realized who he was and started to ignore him the way they always did. The eagle got upset and went to one of the old roosters, a kind of mentor to the chickens. The rooster, for the first time, gave him some good advice. He said, “Maybe you are just different, not good or bad, just different. “You look different, you act different. Sometimes it takes more courage to leave what you have always known. You know you shouldn’t be here, so whatever choice you make is going to be rough.” He left and saw another large bird flying. He dipped his eagle wings and realized he could really move. The other bird was a hawk. The hawk was afraid at first because eagles eat hawks; eagles own the sky. The hawk feared the eagle at first, but the eagle just wanted to talk. The eagle said, “I am just a big chicken flying around here.” The hawk said, “Chicken, you are an eagle. It’s your sky—you can do whatever you want! It’s your call!” The eagle said, “But I live on the ground.” The hawk answered, “No, you don’t. You are supposed to live in the trees and the air.” Somebody had to point it out. So the eagle left, and he landed in the trees and began to do things that came quite naturally to him. Within no time he learned to hunt, dive and fish. One day he saw another eagle flying by, and he felt some stirrings inside. It was a girl eagle. They paired off and began to talk and she was fascinated by his background. 217

Mind Control Secrets He took her to the barnyard. She said, “It’s interesting down here! But I really don’t like the smell; I don’t like the people either! Other than that I guess it’s all right.” He turned out to be quite an asset to the other eagles because he brought a different perspective they never had. He brought a chicken’s view of the world to them. He showed them that maybe they had a gift, a gift that maybe they didn’t even know they had up there, that he could see because he had to climb up through the ranks, so to speak.

Joe versus the Volcano In the movie Joe versus the Volcano, there is a scene in which they are out in the middle of the ocean, after the boat has sunk, when they are on the water by themselves. If any of you have been out on the ocean at night, when the moon comes up, it is an interesting experience. It’s huge; it’s gigantic. In the movie, Joe looks at the moon and remembers his life; he thinks he’s going to die from exposure. He stands there and he looks up to the moon and says, “God, whom I do not understand, thank you for my life.” Think for a moment of one of my idols, Jedi knight Anakin Skywalker. If you have a passion, it will literally move the universe. You can shift people beyond their wildest dreams. Whether this happens one person at a time, a small group at a time, a nation at a time or to the whole universe at a time, it will happen. Back to Joe versus the Volcano. The power of the movie lies in the fact that Joe only has the guts to live when he knows he’s going to die. That takes some courage. Joe versus the Volcano is about hope, about reaching beyond yourself. If we realize that we are all mortal, we better begin to

218

Calibration think about what is it we want to do. What is your passion, your purpose, your mission? And what I ask is: If you can have just a little bit of that kind of gratitude for some of the talents, tools, and abilities you have been given—and you have all these different talents, tools, and abilities—you can really move the world. Sometimes, though, it’s hard to take that in and have the “gratitude in your attitude,” so to speak. It’s difficult just to be thankful for your life. Mind Control is perhaps one of the least explored sciences in the world. Many people think that it’s just not possible. I’m here to prove that it is, indeed, very possible. You don’t have to be a wizard or a sorcerer, or even a psychologist; all you need to do is read this book till you have mastered all the ideas and techniques described. After all, it’s not very difficult, is it? So, here’s wishing you all success as you go around exercising your power over others. Have you ever felt that, like the eagle in the hay loft, it was time to close your eyes and take that leap? It can be a very scary thing. I encourage you to spread your wings now and take that leap of faith. What you’re about to do just may be the hardest thing you ever have to do. It can be overwhelming. Usually, nature takes over and takes care of itself. Like Joe, like the chicken-turned-eagle, it’s time for you to start living! Credit and References: Robert Dilts, Steve Andreas, Richard Bandler, John Grinder, Todd Epstein, Roger Ellerton.

219

Chapter 12

Reframing for Change! Reframing can be one of the most powerful tools that you have to open up new levels of communication, or it can make you seem like a pushy manipulator who uses word games to swindle people. One of the bad raps about NLP comes from misuse of reframing. So what is reframing? It is a way to use language to reset in someone’s mind an event, belief, or feeling. To see, hear, or feel differently about it. Changing the frame of reference is called “reframing” in NLP. The purpose of reframing is to help a person experience their actions—the impact of their beliefs, behaviors, and feelings—from a different perspective (frame), and to potentially be more resourceful or have more choice in how they react. An event, belief, feeling, has no meaning on its own. It just is. People give it meaning according to their beliefs, values, preoccupations, like and dislikes. During the 1984 campaign, there was considerable concern about Ronald Reagan’s age. Speaking during the presidential debate with Walter Mondale, Reagan said “I will not make age an issue of this campaign. I am not going to exploit, for political purposes, my opponent’s youth and inexperience.” Reagan’s age was not an issue for the remainder of the campaign! Reframing means changing the way you perceive an event and, so doing, changing the meaning. When the meaning changes, the response and behavior changes also. There are 5 things you must know to have reframing be effective. Unfortunately, these are often overlooked by 221

Mind Control Secrets NLP practitioners, because they focus too much on the technique and being slick, and not enough on the Big Five. RAPPORT, you must be in Rapport or your reframe will come across as interfering and pushy. Understanding of how the techniques work, not just theory, but understanding on a deeper level of what is happening in your target’s mind. Correct information, because a reframe before you have all the information leads to technique interrupt, which, well… it make you look impudent. Permission to offer it. Reframes are natural if done right. Then and only then will reframe do what it is suppose to do. Now here’s the big secret of reframing: it’s not a complete technique by itself! That’s right, I said it. It will not, in and of itself, accomplish a complete change in someone. (I do not believe stories where a one-line reframe totally shifted a person). Reframe techniques are only meant to “open the doorway” to a person’s mind. It gives a glimpse of other possibilities. You can use this momentary opening, with your rapport skills and correct information, to lead the person in another direction. In other words, the meaning of an experience is dependent on the context, or on the content. One of the great reframes of all times comes from Thomas Edison, and it is still used to this day to reframe the idea of failure. When it was pointed out that it took 1,000 222

Reframing for Change! (or 10,000 according to which story one hears) attempts to successfully get the electric light bulb to work, a reporter asked him how he felt about the 1,000 failures. Edison replied, “We did not fail, we found 1,000 ways that did not work”. Of course, in NLP and hypnosis, we often quote Milton Erickson. When asked about his failures with clients, he reframed it as, “There is no failure, only feedback; always be willing to try something else.” Then there is a story about the first president of IBM. A young worker had made a mistake that lost IBM $1 million in business. She was called in to the president’s office and as she walked in said, “Well, I guess you have called me here to fire me.” “Fire you?” the president replied, “Why would I fire you? I just spent $1 million on your education! That is an MBA in real world experience.” There are two types of reframing: • •

content reframing context reframing

Context Reframing Question: Almost all behaviors are useful in some context. A context reframe can be used to see that the behavior itself can be useful. In what context would this behavior have value? Example: My partner is too stubborn. Reframe: I bet your partner has the tenacity to stand by you in tough times.

223

Mind Control Secrets My partner works all time. Reframe: I bet you will be thanking your partner when you get your dream home.

Content Reframing The meaning or content of any situation is determined by what you choose to focus on; this will give its meaning to you. By reframing that, it changes its meaning. Questions: What else could this mean? In what way, could this be positive or a resource? Example: Saying mean things means you’re a bad person. Reframe: I may be the only one that cares enough to say those things you need to hear. Your being late means you don’t care about me. Reframe: Most people judge caring on being sensitive to another’s feelings, not their awareness of time. What is the positive value in this behavior? The positive value could be related to the target’s behavior (as above). A possible reframe might be: ‘Isn’t it great that you know your boundaries and are not prepared to allow someone to violate them?’

Applications of Reframing • •

Negative beliefs Negative events 224

Reframing for Change! •

Negative behavior

Reframing is going on all around us. Politicians are masters at reframing. The whole idea of a positive spin is reframing. Listen to a conservative talk show, then switch to a liberal (if you can find one) and listen to the same story. Talk about reframes! Fairy tales and children’s stories use reframes to open up a child’s model of the world or get them to see different perspectives. They can also teach consequences, such as in Chicken Little (the sky is falling!) and The Boy Who Cried Wolf. Inside the world of reframing, there are levels one can look at. Several years ago, I went to a training on Sleight of Mouth patterns, which uses reframing at its core. I came away and developed the Dandy Dozen, which gives some overview of this skill set. (Roberts Dilts wrote an excellent book on the subject.) Here are the Dandy Dozen with examples and levels of reframes: Reality Strategy using Cause, Evidence: Saying mean things means you’re a bad person. How, specifically, do you know that it is bad or mean for me to say these things? It is bad according to whom? Your being late means you don’t care How do you know that lateness and caring are equal? Intent using Cause, Evidence: Saying mean things means you’re a bad person. My intention is not being mean but to teach you something about time.

225

Mind Control Secrets Your being late means you don’t care My intent was not to be late, but to finish my work so we would not be interrupted once I got home. Model of the World on Cause, Evidence: Saying mean things means you’re a bad person. It may be mean in your family, but in mine, that’s how we showed we cared. Your being late means you don’t care. In your world, time is number one; in my world, I focus on finishing tasks, so I can truly be with the person I am spending time with. Apply to Self on Cause, Evidence: Your being late means you don’t care Now you tell me; I wish you cared enough to tell me this earlier! Saying mean things means you’re a bad person. That is a pretty mean to say to me. Change Frame Context, Size: Saying mean things means you’re a bad person. It might look bad now, but when you see the whole picture, you’ll understand. (This is what you see the government and politicians use, “If you had access to the information, I had (or intelligence) then you would understand.”) Your being late means you don’t care Better to arrive late, than never! Counter Example: Saying mean things means you’re a bad person. 226

Reframing for Change! Do you think one can be a bad person and not say mean things? Your being late means you don’t care Is it possible to be late and still care, have you been late, did you care? Redefine Cause, Evidence : Saying mean things means you’re a bad person. I am not being mean; I am expressing my point of view, stating the facts as I see them. Your being late means you don’t care I am not late, I was delayed. Chunk Size on Cause, Effect: Saying mean things means you’re a bad person. So one bad day, one mean thing said, and one is doomed to being bad or evil forever? Your being late means you don’t care Our whole relationship is based on me being on time? Redefine Beliefs: Saying mean things means you’re a bad person. I am not bad, I am just not as sensitive as you. I am more flexible. Your being late means you don’t care I show my caring differently than you. Chunk Down: Saying mean things means you’re a bad person

227

Mind Control Secrets Bad how, specifically? According to whom, specifically? Which things, exactly? Your being late means you don’t care How, specifically, does lateness mean not caring? Not care how, specifically? Consequence: Saying mean things means you’re a bad person I am only saying mean things to try to make them better in the long run. Your being late means you don’t care If I had not been late, I may have lost my job, as I had to finish a project, and I care too much for you not to provide. Apply to Self on Beliefs, Effects, Values: Saying mean things means you’re a bad person Did you ever notice only bad people tend to find the bad in others? Your being late means you don’t care A truly caring person should be able to overlook a little tardiness once in a while. In closing, one should always remember the basics—rapport, techniques, information (outcome)—then you can pick this up. Watch comics for true rapid reframes. A joke or funny story usually has a reframe in it. I recently heard a comic tell this story:

228

Reframing for Change! Have you ever noticed that people are nicer in church, then change when they leave? I went to church a couple of weeks ago and everyone was so nice, but the church was packed so the parking was crazy. When I was leaving, I accidentally cut a guy off, and boy did he get angry, called me every name in the book, names that would make a sailor blush. He even gave me the finger, boy how people change. I felt bad, so I said, “I am sorry, Reverend.” Or I just read a study that said placebos work 33% as effectively as drugs. Some doctors argue it’s all in the mind, that it is not a real effect, but I wonder…if you overdose on placebos, do you only think your dead? Once you’ve calibrated your target, have fun as you use these techniques to reframe their opinions!

229

Chapter 13

The Fourth Key: Turning Your Fear into Power and Controlling Your Internal State It is now time to begin to take your skills to the real world. I want you to use and master this technology, and for that you need to be able to control your own internal state. After teaching this for years, I see how students want to use this information, but fear overtakes them and they clam up. It’s against this background that I’d like to introduce a technique that will have you go out there and use your skills. Imagine this scenario. You are a student of mind control. You’re out and about, and you see someone you want to meet. You review the rapport skills in your head and you’re ready to approach your target. Then your stomach tightens and you get feelings that you tell yourself you shouldn’t have, like doubt and fear. It sort of feels like you’re a kid again! The fear overcomes you. Your heart races and you have difficulty catching your breath. Your hands tremble, your vision blurs, your hearing shuts off and your mind fills with negative thoughts. You “naturally” interpret these sensations as fear. Then, because you’ve studied mind-control techniques, you feel guilty and then you begin to doubt yourself.

231

Mind Control Secrets The same thing happens when you start to approach your boss about a raise; you have the skills, and know your rapport skills are there, but you freeze. Where is the Zen-like peace of a mind-control master? Where are the techniques you’ve worked on? You ask yourself, “Why am I afraid? The other person looks calm.” You pray your skills will kick in, but will they?

Mind Training 101 To control your inner state, you must first be able to understand the difference between the physical effects of an “adrenal push” and the psychological state we label as fear, and make friends with both. They will happen, but we can put them to good use. Let’s look at the psychobiological stages of this state we call fear. To do this, we must separate the physical responses from the psychological interpretations of them. This is the first step to overcoming them. Fear is defined as a strong, often unpleasant, emotional and physical response to real or PERCEIVED danger.

Physical Adrenaline is a natural hormone secreted by the adrenal glands. This is nature’s response to stressful environmental triggers. Its only job is to prepare the body for action, fight or flight. It ought to be your ally. It comes in four basic steps: Pre-Event. There is a slow release of adrenaline. This state occurs often. Many people refer to it as a stress reaction. You’re tense, slightly nervous and on edge. If this state is prolonged, it can exhaust you. (This is why highstress jobs “burn” you out.) This state is intended to put you on alert, both physically and mentally. It also releases

232

The Fourth Key neurotransmitters for heightened mental focus. Fear of fear can increase this. Event Rush or Adrenal Dump. This occurs rapidly and very intensely. It happens when your adrenal glands “dump” large amounts of the hormone into your system. This is to prepare you for major physical activity. Again, fight or flight. The effects of adrenaline are varied, but it’s important to remember that this state is the ultimate survival tool. Adrenaline can cause: • •

•

• •

•

•

Tightening of the muscles in preparation for trauma. Visual exclusion. Narrowing of vision. This causes you to lose your peripheral vision, creating tunnel vision. Auditory exclusion. You lose a high percentage of your hearing. (It’s why you can’t hear the crowd noise during an athletic event.) Sped-up heart rate. Release of ATP to give extra physical strength, though it causes rapid exhaustion. (It gives you the shakes!) Rapid cognitive activity. You get a load of thoughts flooding your mind, usually negative; can make you feel overwhelmed. Increase in breathing.

Remember, none of these things, in and of themselves, is bad. They are, therefore, not to be feared. They prepare your body for action. People who channel this into productive use excel in tense/stressful situations. These are the people who do better on rank tests and other events when most people go down a notch. In-Event Adrenaline. This is a second dump that increases the effects of the above as well as: 233

Mind Control Secrets • • •

Blocks pain. Gives a secondary rush of energy. Creates extra negative thoughts—fighting doubts.

This state is intended to give you that “second wind,” extra physical endurance, strength and power to finish an “event” (fight/flight, etc.). This state explains why some people get better as a game (or fight) goes on. This is why, in football, some athletes go out of their way to hit or get hit a few times, to get into the flow of the game. Post-Event Adrenaline Drip. After an event, the adrenal glands secrete small amounts of adrenaline. This causes slightly higher physical tension and leads to mentally repeating the event…reliving the fight. This state is much like the first, and is intended to help your body readjust to the effects of the stressful event. This leads to physical and mental exhaustion. Now that you can understand that the physical states are intended to help you, you can also see the importance of not labeling these as good or bad. Just accept that these states are and then let the mind take over and channel this extra energy from adrenaline to good use. Insight and knowledge are only the first steps.

Moving Past Regret Life is full of regret; from the time you broke your favorite toy to the time you broke a loved-one’s heart to the time you lost your job, there’s always something to regret. It’s something everyone faces during the course of a lifetime. It’s simply unavoidable. Moving past regret isn’t easy. Many people spend years of their lives and thousands of dollars in counseling, only

234

The Fourth Key to end up heartbroken because they don’t have the tools or knowledge necessary to move past hurts from the past. Without the understanding or know-how to turn off the “regret switch,” individuals become fearful of regret itself, and therefore hold themselves back from life. Eventually, that tactic drains the life right out of them. There is hope, though. Here; we’ll expose the three levels of regret and the fears that go along with them, and empower you to move past regret.

Three Levels of Regret Exposed Everyone wants to live a fulfilled, successful and regret-free life. After all, that’s the American dream. It’s impossible to succeed financially, physically or emotionally while staring down the face of regret, but you can change that. Understanding how regret takes hold and why people struggle will help expose the root of regret.

Made to Look Foolish or Proven Wrong No one wants to be wrong or look like a fool in front of others. It can be as simple as making an innocent mistake or as big as losing a million-dollar sale. While this is human nature, it actually holds people back and sets them up for failure. Because they’re so intent on being right or not looking bad, they hold back. They settle for less, turn away opportunities and eventually regret their fear. There’s often safety in remaining quiet, in not pushing the envelope or taking a chance to succeed, but the end result is that you stay lost in your behavior, buried in the crowd of “average Joes.”

235

Mind Control Secrets TIP: Admitting failure or a mistake is not easy, but sometimes it is less expensive and agonizing than proving how right you are!

Could Of – Would Of – Should Of How many times do people wish they would have invested, sold a stock, bought a home or done something else that could have made them money or led to success? Everyone has something they look back on and utter the famous words, “I wish I would have…” It’s difficult to be successful or happy when we work against ourselves. The fear of making a mistake or doing something that you’ll regret conditions you to believe that you’re better off not taking a chance. You doubt your good judgment because you fear that, with one small imperfection, you may stray from the all-important “norm.” The fear of regret then becomes a ball and chain that leaves you insecure and without the confidence to move forward into a life of freedom.

Bad Associations – the Cause & Affect Strangulation Humans from every walk of life, educational background and socio economic class fall prey to this “regret-seeking behavior.” For some reason, most people choose to defy all odds because they have a “gut” feeling. They feel they can beat the odds. While this sometimes works, most of the time it lands individuals in hot water and leaves them regretting their actions. Then that “could of, should of, would of” comes out, and they begin playing odds that are even worse. What makes people do that? Well, the human psyche is a complex structure of information and design that’s too lengthy to detail, but it all boils down to one simple 236

The Fourth Key phrase: Classical Conditioning. Those are fancy words, but they speak of a very real behavior. Classical Conditioning can be a positive, but it can also be a negative when we use it against ourselves. We’re taught from the time we’re old enough to talk that following emotions, or that “gut” feeling, will result in a positive outcome. After a while, we build confidence in that “gut” feeling. It eventually gets the best of us. TIP: Following a gut feeling is not always a detriment, but when all odds are stacked against the decision, the individual should step back and re-evaluate. For example, gambling odds and many other “statistically” sound decisions are thrown to the wind to follow that feel-good gut feeling! Back to Classical Conditioning for a moment: it’s human to associate one action or behavior with another. This information isn’t always incorrect, but when it’s carried over or bleeds into other areas of your life, it can be problematic. Take, for example, the association between foreigners and terrorists. With the recent terrorist activity, the world is on guard, from the government right down to the lonely old lady sitting on the park bench. Because fear is heightened and people now associate Middle Eastern culture with terrorists, there are tons of false reports. People walk around in fear. Airports, police departments and other agencies have been observed “profiling,” or taking extra precautions with anyone looking like they’re of Middle Eastern descent. Is that bad? Well, it certainly could be, because not everyone from the Middle East is a terrorist…not even close! So, the fact—some Middle Easterners are terrorists—has become a harmful association, making people believe all

237

Mind Control Secrets Middle Easterners are terrorists. See how associations can get people in trouble? TIP: If a salesperson makes one attempt at a sale, and then gives up when the sale doesn’t go through, that salesperson will starve! One attempt…two attempts…even three attempts don’t always signify another failure!

Taking No Chance Is Safe – Right? Taking chances is a vital part of life and success, whether it’s in one’s social life, financial circle, relationships or employment ventures. When we sit and do nothing, it can feel good. It can even give us a little boost, because we didn’t hear the word “no” or fail at anything. Regret tells you that if you never try something, you will never fail to achieve it. Unfortunately, while this may be a safe haven for the moment, it can turn into a trap in the future. Years down the road, most people look back at their sedentary—or “lack of doing”—attitude and regret what they have missed. While it’s possible that a certain treatment program might not work for you, it is ALWAYS a mistake to do nothing! That’s because clichés are sometimes true: nothing ventured is nothing gained. By sitting idle, we end up regretting years past. We still feel like failures because we didn’t take the chance of success or happiness. That’s a dangerous place to be!

Regret’s Power Cutting to the chase, it’s impossible to maneuver around regret when a person doesn’t understand where “regret” gets its power. Where is it fueled, where is it stored, and when is it strongest? While there is no single answer for 238

The Fourth Key everyone, there are some very common links to the fuel of regret. Most people find that they are at the height of regret when they’ve acted in a manner that isn’t their normal or consistent self. When that behavior causes them to fail, be embarrassed or have additional troubles, they find themselves facing the root of regret. This feeling, and the comparisons you make, then set you up for future failure because of your past associations. Let’s take a simple example with which everyone can identify. Example: You’re in a hurry to get home. You normally drive the speed limit and obey the traffic laws, but today is an exception. You intentionally run a red light and end up slamming into another car. All you can say when you get a ticket is, “I never do that; my driving is always responsible.” Though this example is not a life-altering change or regret factor, you can use it to see how regret is fueled and how it can eat away at a person’s psyche. This brings us to our next topic:

Are You a “Doer” or a “No-Doer”? Most people, at some point in their lives, have been “doers.” They take the chance when the opportunity arises and allow themselves to “step out of the box,” per say. After a few failures or near failures, they begin pairing the taking of the chance—not the actual problem or cause of the failure—with the negative outcome. This causes them to become sedentary, not taking that opportunity because they fear failure. It all goes back to the Classical Conditioning that we talked about earlier. Instead of weeding to the root of the

239

Mind Control Secrets cause, they simply begin believing that every chance will result in a negative! Overcoming this conditioning is a journey, but it’s a journey you can successfully complete. It’s a matter of taking the time to realize that regret is a normal part of life, but that you need to put it in a safe place rather than carry it through life full-time. Turning a “no-doer” into a “doer” is an educational process of learning how to put things in proper perspective rather than making faulty associations. Becoming a “doer” instead of a “no-doer” is necessary if you ever want to live the life you now only dream of. So, what will you do now?

How to Channel Fear into Power To learn to harness this process, the first step is to recognize that it is normal. This insight and knowledge opens the door, and now you can learn to channel this wonderful, power-packed state to give you an edge in hostile situations. The first step is to find and identify the first feelings of “fear”—the pre-event adrenaline release: • • •

How do you feel? Where do you feel it (Stomach, chest, shoulders, back, etc.)? How is your state of mind?

To do this exercise, think of something that makes you fearful (confrontation with your boss, IRS audit, approaching that special someone, etc.). Really relive it and notice the above sensations. Now label it and store this information.

240

The Fourth Key

Develop a “Circle of Power or Excellence” Think of a time you were at your very best. You were in control. You were physically and mentally sharp. It could be a class you did well at, or a sporting event, or a business deal. You were focused and sharp. Now imagine a circle on the floor—and it is your “Circle of Excellence and Power.” • • •

What color is it? Does it have a sound? What else do you notice?

Think of the event from above and step into your “Circle.” Breathe in deeply. Breathe the “Circle” into you. Throw your shoulders back. Feel the focus and power. Repeat this twice. Step out of the “Circle” and re-access the fearful state. As you begin to feel the fear (adrenaline state), step into the circle and breathe in. Do this five times. This is true Fear into Power! Search in vain for that old fearful state. As you start to access fear, you will naturally go into a state of power. Now that we have a basis for blocking the old fear response, you can take it to the next level to excel. Once you are able to convert fear into power, you can face, as Tsunetomo Yamamoto, an eighteenth-century samurai, once said in his famous writing Hagakure (which translates to hidden among the leaves): “The realization of certain death should be renewed every morning. “Each morning you must prepare yourself for every kind of death with composure of mind. Imagine yourself broken by bows, guns, spears, swords, carried off by floods, leaping into a huge fire, struck by lightning, torn apart by earthquake, plunging from a cliff, as a disease-ridden corpse.” 241

Mind Control Secrets It may sound morbid, but if you imagine your deepest fears--death, humiliation, loss of pride, etc.—and step into power, you will be in a better position to face whatever comes your way. You will start to develop the heart of a warrior. You will be the type of person who is a master of their own mind, which is the basis for mastering others. People follow others who are confident and show little fear. This is what we want in our leaders. Take this attitude and feeling with you as you master and use these techniques. WELCOME TO THE WORLD FEW HAVE BEEN EXPOSED TO, that is, TRUE MIND CONTROL.

242

Twenty-One-Day Exercise To really master these basic skills, you need to place the new thinking patterns into your neurology…into your brain, thinking and habits. Here’s an easy, fast way. Do the following exercises for the next 21 days, and you’ll notice your skills grow and expand. Do follow the days in order; they’re designed to build on each other. After you’ve mastered these skills, you’ll be ready for more advanced techniques, such as the methods you will see outlined in the section on Obama’s use of hypnotic techniques! Have fun! Day 1: Sensor Acuity • Take a different view of the world. • Notice coworkers’ or friends’ hair, the color, the style. • Notice the color and texture of the walls of your workspace. • Sit in a different spot when you eat a meal. • Notice the color of all your family/coworkers’ eyes. • Wear your watch (or other jewelry) on a different hand. Day 2: Rapport • Mirror/match the physiology of three people, coworker, friend/family member, stranger in a social setting. • Be obvious.

243

Mind Control Secrets Day 3: Anchoring • Notice several self-anchoring experiences • Auditory: music—what songs motivate you? Get you going? Calm you down? • Visual: find visual anchors that affect you—dogs, babies, the flag. • Olfactory/Gustatory: walk into a bakery or other similar establishment; close your eyes, and what do you notice? Day 4: Review Basic NLP Techniques • Which is your favorite and what, specifically, about it causes you to choose it? • Do this to someone in a casual interaction. Day 5: State Control • Maintain a high state (motivation, excitement, focus) for as long as possible. • What do you have to do to reenter it? Day 6: Meta Model • Do the short version of the Meta Model; gather information from a coworker or acquaintance. • No advice! Gather info! Day 7: Presuppositions • Notice the response to your communication; is it the response you want? • If not, what can you do differently? • The meaning of the communication is the response to elicit!

244

Twenty-One-Day Exercise Day 8: Acuity • Put on your clothes in another way. • Drink your coffee, soda, etc. with the opposite hand. • Open up your vision by noticing the details in things you do daily. Day 9: Rapport • Go to a restaurant and mirror the waiter/waitress. Then match their language and breathing. • Can you notice their state? • Can you change it? Day 10: Anchoring • Get a coworker or friend to laugh. As they do, anchor this. • Try a few times. • Can you elicit the response with your anchor? Day 11: State • Notice an unresourceful state in yourself. Can you notice the stimulus? • Change your state and keep it changed. Day 12: Meta Model • Can you notice how many times people delete/distort/generalize in a conversation? • Try to recover a small amount of this lost info by asking: specifically? Day 13: Techniques • Do the swish pattern on yourself, then on someone else.

245

Mind Control Secrets Day 14: Presuppositions • Flexible—take an approach to something that will surprise your friends or coworkers. • Come up with a different way to solve a common problem. • “The person with the most flexibility will control or influence a situation.” Day 15: Acuity • Watch people interact in a public setting. • Mirror/match them. Can you understand the communication? • Can you “sense” their emotions? Day 16: Rapport • Go to a store or car dealer. • You get into rapport with the salesperson. • See if you can influence them to give you some “inside” information. Day 17: Anchoring • Watch commercials and see how many “anchors” you notice, i.e., oldies music to set the mood, use of flag. • Now that you recognize the anchors, does it de-anchor you? Day 18: State • Elicit a strong state in someone by entering into it yourself, and then change your state quickly. • What happens? Day 19: Meta Model • Listen to a conversation in a public place. 246

Twenty-One-Day Exercise •

After noticing Meta Model violations, what are their basic representational systems?

Day 20: Techniques • Do the new behavior generator and/or chaining anchors on a coworker. Day 21: Presuppositions • Notice how many times someone mistakes the map for the territory—their way is the only way. • “The map is not the territory.” Bonus: 1. Pick your weakest representational system VAR and use it all day like it is a favorite. 2. Pick a technique you rarely do (or dislike) and find persons on which to use it. 3. Try to take another’s position in a conversation— step into their shoes. 4. Break down one of your normal tasks into small chunks. Can you improve it? Repeat Days 1-21. You’re a master in training!

247

Putting It Together— Einstein’s Brain In the June 19, 1999 issue of Lancet (the journal of the British Medical Association), Sandra F. Witelson, Ph.D., Debra L. Kigar, and Thomas Harvey, M.D., of the Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Neurosciences of McMaster University in Canada have reported that the differences in the brain of Albert Einstein may explain his genius in mathematics. When the Nobel Prize-winning physicist died of a ruptured abdominal aorta in 1955 at the age of seventy-six, his brain was removed and preserved within seven hours of his death. His medical history was well documented, and biographies show he was mentally adept, doing research until the end of his life. There had never been a report describing the anatomy of his brain until now. In the McMaster University study, the researchers compared anatomical measurements from Einstein’s brain with the brains from thirty-five men and fifty-six women who had normal intelligence. These researchers also studied the brains of eight men over sixty-five so they could take into account changes that normally occur with aging. Einstein’s brain appeared similar to the others except for two areas found on each side of the brain called the inferior parietal regions. Einstein had extensive development in these regions on both sides of his brain; his brain was almost 15 percent wider than the control group. It is thought that the growth of this region seems to have occurred early in the development of his brain, because it appears to have blocked the development of a groove in the brain called the Slyvian fissure. In most people, the Slyvian

249

Mind Control Secrets fissure runs along each side of the brain reaching about three-quarters of the way to the back. In Dr. Einstein’s case, the fissure does not reach as far back as normal, but instead it turns upward to join another groove that normally runs down the side of the brain called the postcentral sulcus. The confluence of these, the Slyvian fissure and the postcentral sulcus, forms a C-shaped groove on the surface of each side of his brain. “This morphology found in each of Einstein’s hemispheres was not seen in any hemispheres of the 35 control male brains or of any of the 56 female brains, nor in any specimen documented in the published collections of post-mortem brains,” write Dr. Witelson and her colleagues. The area of Einstein’s brain that appears to be overdeveloped is thought to be involved in the creation and manipulation of three-dimensional spatial images and the mathematical representation of those concepts, the researchers write. Therefore, the unusual anatomy of Einstein’s brain may explain why he tended to think about scientific problems visually. “Einstein’s own description of his scientific thinking,” the researchers write, “was that words do not seem to play any role, but there is associative play of more or less clear images of a visual and muscular type.” There were other differences that might explain Einstein’s abilities. Because of the differences in the grooves along the side of his brain, the neurons (cells) of a particular area of the parietal operculum are not divided by one of the grooves, but are instead kept together. The researchers speculate that the absence of this groove may have allowed more neurons in this area to establish better connections between each other. They further think that this may have created an “extraordinarily large expanse of highly integrated cortical network.” 250

Putting It Together—Einstein’s Brain It is thought that when large, well-integrated networks form in an area dedicated to certain mental tasks, it may make the person much better than normal at doing those tasks. In Einstein’s case it was visualizing solutions to difficult mathematical problems. (Could this be a key to why some people have difficulty in visualizing?) “Einstein’s exceptional intellect in these cognitive domains and his self-described mode of scientific thinking may be related to the atypical anatomy in his brain,” the researchers concluded.

251

Remote Brain Control John Chapin of the Hahnemann School of Medicine reports in Nature Neuroscience that they have trained six lab rats to move a robot arm with the power of thought alone. First the rats were trained in the classical S-R way to press a spring-loaded lever (which moves a robotic arm) using their paws to get a reward (water or food). This allowed the researchers to ascertain which brain cells were involved in the task. Thus, having their target cell-groups (parts of the brain in the motor cortex and the thalamus) the researchers implanted arrays of electrodes into these groups to study the role of individual neurons in them. They now had a detailed outline on the neuronal activity that gives rise to the bending, pushing, and stretching movements that constitute pressing a lever. Through analysis, over many hundreds of trials of the firing patterns that make up such a movement, the researchers located the neurons responsible for every stage of the action: preparation, flexing the forelimb, extending it, pushing it, and so on. Then the team harnessed these neurons for their own by wiring them so that they could fire them directly and move the arm without the animal touching the lever. With this new setup, the rats quickly learned that there was no need to physically push the lever in order for a reward. A few tries later, they were able to reconfigure their brain activity so that it alone moved the reward-bearing robotic arm. This is the first time that brain activity, so high up in the motor pathways, has been used to drive a machine. Older devices used cruder signals from the stumps of amputated

253

Mind Control Secrets limbs or the surface of the skin. This new technology will offer far greater speed and precision. When you look at these two diverse studies, I am drawn to the hypothesis that if rats can learn to control brain activity, can we, as a somewhat higher developed animal, use our conscious thought to direct energy to the parts of our brains that do different tasks? And could we stimulate growth and change in the actual structure of the brain itself? There are studies that show that with conscious attention, you can cause physical changes. This is the basis of biofeedback. There is some research using MRIs to map brain activity, and again it seems to be able to be controlled by conscious attention. Once we become aware of how to do it, it seems just so possible! We therapists who use altered states to effect mind/ body changes could use our skills to do the same things. This could be our next big breakthrough, using conscious and subconscious thought to alter our physical brains, to improve them with mental exercises (hypnosis and NLP) the way athletes use physical exercise to alter their bodies. Is not your brain a physical organ capable of change and growth much like a muscle? Try to develop ways to use your skills to bring advances in this exciting field, and let me know how it works. In my programs, such as Designing Your Destiny, second edition, tape series, much of this type of work is done. Until next time, use the Force to spur growth in your own developing brain. References: Witelson, S. F., Kigar, D., Harvey, T., “The Exceptional Brain of Albert Einstein,” Lancet, 1999, vol. 353, 2149-53 19 June 1999 254

Remote Brain Control Deary, I. J., Carl, P. G., “Neuroscience and Human intelligence differences,” Trends Neuroscience, 1999, no. 20 365-371 Chapin, J., Nature Neuroscience, June 1999

255

An Examination of Obama’s Use of Hidden Hypnosis Techniques in his Speeches THE EVIDENCE IS HERE: This document contains over 60 pages of evidence and analysis proving Barack Obama’s use of a little-known and highly deceptive and manipulative form of “hack” hypnosis on millions of unaware Americans, and reveals what only a few psychologists and hypnosis/ NLP experts know. William Horton, Psy. D. CAC Master Hypnotist, NLP Trainer, Author, Technical advisor co-author Barack Obama’s speeches contain the hypnosis techniques of Dr. Milton Erickson, M.D. who developed a form of “conversational” hypnosis that could be hidden in seemingly normal speech and used on patients without their knowledge for therapy purposes. Obama’s speeches intentionally contain: - Trance Inductions - Hypnotic Anchoring - Pacing and Leading - Pacing, Distraction and Utilization - Critical Factor Bypass - Stacking Language Patterns - Preprogrammed Response Adaptation - Linking Statements/ Causality Bridges - Secondary Hidden Meanings/Imbedded Suggestions - Emotion Transfer - Non-Dominant Hemisphere 257

Mind Control Secrets - Programming Obama’s techniques are the height of deception and psychological manipulation, remaining hidden because one must understand the science behind the language patterns in order to spot them. This document examines Obama’s speeches word by word, hand gesture by hand gesture, tone, pauses, body language, and proves his use of covert hypnosis intended only for licensed therapists on consenting patients. Obama’s mesmerized, cult-like, grade-school-crush-like worship by millions is not because “Obama is the greatest leader of a generation” who simply hasn’t accomplished anything, who magically “inspires” by giving speeches. Obama is committing perhaps the biggest fraud and deception in American history. Obama is not just using subliminal messages, but textbook covert hypnosis and neuro-linguistic programming techniques on audiences that are intentionally designed to sideline rational judgment and implant subconscious commands to think he is wonderful and elect him President. Obama is eloquent. However, Obama’s subconscious techniques are shown to elicit powerful emotion from his audience and then transfer those emotions onto him, to sideline rational judgment, and implant hypnotic commands that we are unaware of and can’t even consciously question. The polls are misleading because some of Obama’s commands are designed to be triggered only in the voting booth on November 4th. Obama is immune to logical arguments like Wright, Ayers, shifting every position, character, and inexperience, because hypnosis affects us on an unconscious and emotional level. To many people who see this unaccomplished man’s unnatural and irrational rise to the highest office in the world as suspicious and frightening and to those who welcome it, this document uncovers, explains, and proves the deceptive tactics behind true 258

An Examination of Barack Obama’s “Obama Phenomenon” including why younger people are more easily affected. READ THIS TABLE OF CONTENTS Skeptics will surely doubt the information provided in this document with four specific oppositions – each of which this document disproves Foreword and commentary PART 1 – HYPNOSIS BASICS You must understand the basics of Ericksonian hypnosis to see what Obama is doing Real “hypnosis” explaine Two separate definitions of “hypnosis”: The origins of “covert hypnosis” and “conversational hypnosis” aka “black ops” hypnosis Bypassing the dominant hemisphere’s rational judgment (“critical factor”) PART 2 – WHAT OBAMA IS ACTUALLY DOING Obama’s actions are far more deceptive than simply lying The study of the effects of mass hypnosis Illegality of Obama’s use of hypnosis The hypnosis technique of “pacing and leading” to sideline rational judgment How pacing is done: Specific examples of Obama using 14 separate hypnotic pacing statements in his Denver 2008 Convention speech Embedded and hidden meanings – “deep structure” of language vs “surface structure” How Ericksonian “linking statements” mimic the way the brain accepts information 259

Mind Control Secrets Basics of Obama’s pacing and leading: The “because we need change, that is why I should be your next president” argument Obama’s speeches as one big hypnotic trance induction using extra slow speech, rhythm, tonalities, vagueness, visual imagery, metaphor, and raising of emotion The use of Ericksnian “vagueness” in speech as a linguistic induction tool: “Change” and “Yes we can.” Use of visual imagery and imagination as an induction tool The stacking of hypnotic language patterns in 40+ minute long speeches Obama’s unusual use of hand gestures as subconscious programming and hypnotic anchoring designed to be triggered in the voting booth on November 4th *Obama’s hypnotic command that “a light will shine down from somewhere, it will light upon you, you will experience an epiphany, and you will say to yourself, ‘I have to vote for Barack’” An example of Obama using both of these hypnotic hand gestures, hypnotic programming followed by hypnotic anchor back to back, in a way that can be nothing other than hypnosis Undeniable evidence that this is hypnosis: Obama hypnotically anchoring the statement about a light shining down and an internal voice saying “I have to vote for Barack” Convincing without logic: “The Fierce! Urgency! of Now!” argument (Obama caught anchoring) Obama caught in subconscious hand gesture linking McCain to Bush Obama caught using one-finger subconscious hand gesture regarding Hillary

260

An Examination of Barack Obama’s Obama caught in another undeniable subconscious hand gesture regarding McCain PART 3 – WHAT OBAMA IS EXACTLY DOING – SPECIFIC SPEECHES “PLAY BY PLAY” Obama’s California Democratic Convention speech 2007 - a “play by play” of his undeniable use of embedded commands, hypnotic induction, and hypnotic storytelling Obama performs an undeniable Ericksonian hypnotic induction: Obama’s “Turn the Page” Speech at the California Democratic Convention in 2007 Obama caught intentionally controlling pace in obvious attempt to maintain trance Obama’s speech Tuesday after primaries ended June 3, 2008 – undeniable evidence of Obama’s use of hypnotic principles of anchoring, deletion, distraction, and leading Obama caught delivering another powerful hypnotic command Obama caught pacing and leading again Obama’s 2007 California Democratic Convention “turn the page” speech – further analysis Obama using “turn the page” as a preprogrammed response: Obama using “turn the page” as a hypnotic anchor: Obama’s Democratic Convention speech 2008 – A “play by play” of his undeniable and extensive anchoring, pacing, leading, and delivery of subconscious commands Obama’s typical pacing, leading, storytelling, and hidden meanings induction: Obama caught stacking language patterns *Obama caught clarifying his hand gesture as unmistakable hypnotic anchor of writing with pen (twice): Obama caught giving the primary hypnotic command of the speech: 261

Mind Control Secrets Obama’s aggressive pointing- the subconscious signal of giving commands: Obama caught in another hypnotic command, anchor, and a strategic pause: Obama caught hypnotically linking himself with John F. Kennedy: Obama again pacing and leading PART 4 – ADDITIONAL SPECIFIC ASPECTS OF OBAMA’S HYPNOSIS Obama’s technique of head turned to the right side in interviews described by body language expert as one of the most powerful subconscious manipulation techniques possible by a speaker’s body language Interview of Professor of Psychiatry on CNN in which Dr. comes close to hinting of her suspicion that Obama is using covert subconscious techniques throughout his campaign Hypnosis/NLP expert discusses Obama’s use of mind control techniques on radio Website analyzes Obama’s use of hypnosis in speeches Obama uses hypnotic command to dismiss the Rev Wright questions Obama’s speech on race March 18, 2008 Philadelphia – hypnotic storytelling throughout Obama’s hypnotic logo Obama’s strange hand gesture & hand-holding conversation with Senator Lieberman Obama’s use of a fake presidential seal Assorted other points: PART 5 – THE VISIBLE EFFECTS OF OBAMA’S HYPNOSIS The effects of his hypnosis are undeniable Obama’s perceived greatness 262

An Examination of Barack Obama’s Obama’s trance The effects of Obama’s hypnosis on young people, and more educated people Conclusion and commentary Personal Notes: Skeptics will surely doubt the information provided in this document with four specific oppositions – each of which this document disproves. These certain oppositions answered in this document are: 1. Hypnosis isn’t real - hypnosis wouldn’t / doesn’t work on me Trance states of mind and enhanced suggestibility happen to everyone every day; driving in your car, in the elevator, watching T.V., or listening to music. This mild hypnotic state is all that is needed for Ericksonian techniques to implant hypnotic commands you are unaware of. 2. Obama isn’t intentionally using mass hypnosis This document contains over a hundred examples of Obama’s specific language patterns and hypnosis techniques that follow textbook Ericksonian principles and characteristics too much to be coincidence. 3. Obama’s popularity is not attributable to his use of hypnosis Young people and more educated people actually have lower hypnotic subconscious suggestibility thresholds for scientific reasons explained. Popular perceptions of Obama are provable as inconsistent with his accomplishments, history, background, and even what is heard 263

Mind Control Secrets from him consciously – however, they match perfectly with the messages he is caught sending intending to be received only subconsciously. People are admittedly mesmerized by him. The irrational rise to power of and uncanny passionate support for a logically unaccomplished and questionable man based on his speaking alone like the “Obama phenomenon” is widely accepted – only the rational explanation for it is missing. Finally, he would not continue to use these deceptive techniques if he did not believe they work. 4. There is nothing unethical about Obama’s use of hypnosis The techniques used by Obama are the most deceptive forms of communication known to man. They sideline rational judgment and implant subconscious commands that change how people feel and behave without any awareness of the manipulation. Obama’s techniques overcome the will without convincing the judgment through trickery. Obama often says one message that you are aware of, meanwhile implants a different message hypnotically with double or hidden meanings. He conjures up emotions by talking about your children, and JFK, and then is caught transferring those feelings onto him with hidden hand gestures. He hides what he is doing and brazenly uses these techniques in front of millions of people over and over. Once explained, Obama’s actions can be shown to be the height of manipulation and deception. IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT YOU READ THIS DOCUMENT IN ORDER, FROM BEGINNING TO END, AS DEFINITIONS ARE BUILT ON TOP OF ONE-ANOTHER, AND UNDERSTANDING OF THESE 264

An Examination of Barack Obama’s DEFINITIONS IS NECESSARY TO FOLLOW LATER INTERPRETATIONS AND ANALYSIS

Foreword and commentary The level of deception involved in Obama’s use of covert hypnosis, and his presumption that he has the right to use hypnosis on us to gain votes is just unconscionable. It is not a connection to another person that he can deny. It is Obama’s own highly deceptive actions, provable once explained, on video, playable over and over. Obama is sidelining rational judgment and using undue influence to win over voters applying psychological subconscious manipulation like never before in American history. No other argument against Obama can fundamentally change the way people feel about him deep down inside, EXCEPT, proof that precisely the way they feel about him deep down inside is because of Obama’s own deception and use of hidden hypnosis. This is because exposing Obama’s use of hypnosis takes the people who are entranced by him subconsciously and emotionally, and puts the issue of why they feel that way on a conscious rational level where they can analyze it. It is the one thing that can fundamentally change the game, and shatter Obama’s magical immunity to all of his other faults, logical disqualifications, and deceptions. This can include the media changing their mind about Obama once they see who he really is and also helping to expose what Obama is doing in the interests of democracy. Many people do wake up from the effects of hypnosis once you tell them they have been hypnotized and explain what has happened to them. To a lot of people, it is just a missing piece of the puzzle that makes everything else

265

Mind Control Secrets make sense - almost as if it were the missing piece they were somehow even looking for on some level.1

PART 1 – HYPNOSIS BASICS You must understand the basics of Ericksonian hypnosis to see what Obama is doing Almost nobody realizes what Obama is doing. These techniques are nearly impossible for an untrained person to detect. With the exception of a few trained experts in hypnosis, nobody understands even what to look for. It sounds in every way like ordinary powerful speech. Hypnosis is not sleep, nor what is portrayed in movies. In order to spot what Obama is doing, one must first understand covert hypnosis and conversational hypnosis, and know how the science works. Only by knowing how hypnosis works will you see that Obama’s speech often diverges from normal and logical speech patterns, and clearly uses the non-logical, clearly artificial and intentional patterns of hypnotic trance induction, and hypnotic critical factor bypass as taught in the field of covert and conversational hypnosis. This document will explain what Obama is precisely doing and how it works by explaining hidden hypnotic language patterns and other hypnosis techniques, and pointing out these patterns and techniques in Obama’s speeches. Obama is using textbook, clinical trance inductions in his speeches. Obama’s hypnotic techniques work on a subconscious level, and are designed so that people watching him in an audience or on TV are completely unaware of his techniques and their effects. Obama is using clear hypnotic anchoring, pacing and leading, and numerous other hypnosis techniques designed to take away our rational judgment in deciding for whom

266

An Examination of Barack Obama’s 1. “The only thing you need to do to break a negative hypnotic spell that has been cast on you is begin to think rationally, to begin to think critically. And if you decide that you choose this message as one that’s good for you, by all means sit back, relax, and enjoy the ride. But, if you decide that this is not something you want to have in your life, just simply analyze it, criticise it, ridicule it, and say “Hey, that’s not how the world works.” And you’ll have protected your mind from taking on board something which you really dont need.” The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor Ledochowski, re the section entitled “The Dark Side of Hypnosis.” Not only is this the only explanation that makes sense for the amazing rise and “Obama phenomenon” sweeping our nation, but the evidence is undeniable. To say Obama’s amazing following and rise to power is simply because he is a great speaker is not logically sufficient. Even if Obama were the greatest speaker to come along in 30 years, it still would not explain why even being simply a great speaker would cause people to say he is the greatest “leader” of a generation, or “sent by g-d” or “JFK” and why that he should be trusted to make decisions like he has never made in his life, or that he will bring change when he hasn’t really changed anything in his 46 years. What he has done does not logically fit how he is perceived. In fact, the gulf is too wide to be random unexplained phenomenon. As shown, he does, however, use clever hypnosis techniques while discussing e.g. JFK to subconsciously transfer feelings conjured up in his audience onto him through, e.g. flashed hand gestures which appear innocent to uncritical observation.

267

Mind Control Secrets Real “hypnosis” explained Most people are hypnotized and fall into trance every day of their lives.2 It is a common, every day occurrence, whether for a brief second, or minutes or longer. A very basic example is when you are driving a car while in deep thought, and you suddenly realize you are much further along with no memory of driving the whole distance. Another example, is when you are on an elevator watching the numbers change and go into trance, and when everyone else gets off, you take that as a nonverbal suggestion to get off, before you “wake up” and realize it is not your floor. This elevator example is an example of mass hypnosis, where the close rapport with the hypnotist is not necessary, because many people are both hypnotized partly by whatever is causing the trance, and partly by the fact that you are being “paced” or also hypnotized by everyone else in the elevator doing the exact same thing as you. The reason you cry from reading sad book simply by reading ink on paper is because of the mind’s interaction with that information, which is also a hypnotic process.3 Two separate definitions of “hypnosis”: 1. First, hypnosis, is “a particular altered state of hyper-suggestibility brought about in an individual by a combination of relaxation, fixation of attention, and suggestion.”4 2. Second, hypnosis is also “bypassing the ‘critical factor’ and setting up acceptable selective thinking.5” The “critical factor” is the conscious part of the brain that you think with that has the ability to make rational logical judgments about what information is received.6 The critical factor acts as a filter, determining what

268

An Examination of Barack Obama’s 3. Erickson maintained that trance is a common, everyday occurrence. For example, when waiting for buses and trains, reading or listening, or even being involved in strenuous physical exercise, it’s quite normal to become immersed in the activity and go into a trance state, removed from any other irrelevant stimuli. These states are so common and familiar that most people do not consciously recognize them as hypnotic phenomena. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Milton_H._Erickson 4. The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor Ledochowski 5. Modern Hypnosis, Theory and Practice, Masud Ansari, Ph.D. 6. Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1, David X’s educational video, “How to Hypnotize with Covert Hypnosis and Hypnotic Language” See video online, such as at: http://www.revver.com/ video/834827/how-to-hypnotize-with¬covert-hypnosis-and-hypnotic-language/ 7. Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1 Hypnosis/NLP can pass into the subconscious mind which is a non-rational computer-like system which accepts everything in it as absolute truth.7 That is why sidelining it is so dangerous. Milton Erickson, had a broader definition of the unconscious mind, described as, “both the functioning of the dominant hemisphere of the brain that occurs below the level

269

Mind Control Secrets of awareness, as well as the functioning of the non-dominant hemisphere.” 8 Ericksonian trance induction has three dimensions which we will return to often and compare to Obama’s language patterns. They are:9 Pacing and distraction of the dominant (language) hemisphere; Utilization of the dominant hemisphere, language processing which occurs below the level of awareness; Accessing of the non-dominant hemisphere; This above three part process is extremely important to later analysis. Essentially, hypnosis is an altered and common state of mind involving intense focus, sidelining or disassociation of the rational critical thinking, and the state of hyper-suggestibility brought about while the subconscious mind is the dominant player.10 It happens while reading, listening to music, and even while hearing a great speaker.11 However, the power of such methods is what is difficult to grasp. What we are talking about is “transformational linguistics” – language that literally changes who you are at your deepest levels, your deepest passions, drives, and emotions while you are completely unaware. Under Freud, there is the conscious mind that you think with, called the “ego.” You also have a conscience, called the “super-ego.” Then, there is the largest part of the psyche, the id, which is the back-end of all our memory, our most basic instincts and drives, emotions, and suppressed desires.12 “The unconscious mind is the source of our energy, and no amount of conscious reasoning can override it. The unconscious mind is un-critical, it accepts as absolute truth any idea that is allowed to enter its computer-like system”13 The messages of hypnosis, including mass hypnosis, can be far more powerful than just someone’s conscious 270

An Examination of Barack Obama’s thoughts, as it affects their most basic biological drives and instincts.14 That is why many of Obama’s followers are so passionate for him, why they are fainting in his presence, comparing him to Jesus, and supporting him like no other candidate before. Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1 Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p13. Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p13. The Religion of Psychology by Marty Wilson, http:// www.mychristiansite.com/personal/shilohcomes/hd.html Roy Hunter, MS, CHt, cited at http://www.mychristiansite.com/personal/shilohcomes/hd.html Modern Hypnosis, Theory and Practice, Masud Ansari, Ph.D., Ch3, Unconscious Mind and Hypnosis Modern Hypnosis, Theory and Practice, Masud Ansari, Ph.D., Ch3, Unconscious Mind and Hypnosis, p43 The International Law of Propaganda, By Bhagevatula Satyanarayana Murty, discussing I.P. Pavlov, Conditioned Reflexes, an Investigation of the Physiological Activity of the Cerebral Cortex. (Such mass hypnosis is compared in psychological effect to “evoking responses that satisfy the drives of biological instincts.” The origins of “covert hypnosis” and “conversational hypnosis” aka “black ops” hypnosis Dr. Milton H. Erickson, also known as the father of modern hypnosis method, was the single greatest practitioner of hypnosis, having dramatically advanced the field.15 Dr. Erickson is internationally acclaimed as the leading practitioner in the field of hypnosis16 for his understanding of the science of both inducing and utilizing hypnotic states.17

271

Mind Control Secrets Dr. Erickson discovered while working as a therapist, that he could hide therapeutic hypnosis within the normal content of an inconspicuous conversation with the patient, and avoid much of the patient’s conscious resistance that normally accompanied hypnotherapy.18 Dr. Erickson realized the subconscious mind was always listening, and understood better than anyone before how to access it, and implant suggestions into it. What Dr. Erickson did was figure out how to put people into trance and hypnotize them and implant suggestions with seemingly normal conversation. He discovered that people could achieve this heightened state of hyper-suggestibility without the traditional difficultly-induced coma-like state traditionally associated with hypnosis. Though his pioneering understanding, he was able to do the same and much more often with simple plays on words and embedded meanings in a single sentence. The entire field of “covert hypnosis”, or “conversational hypnosis” is based on Dr. Erickson’s techniques, and is now primarily used by hypnotists and psychiatrists. 19 Conversational hypnosis is often referred to as Ericksonian hypnosis. The word “hypnosis” is never mentioned and there is nothing overt to give away that hypnosis is being used. It is impossible to detect unless you know precisely what to look for. Hack versions of these techniques are unfortunately taught to be used as persuasion tools for salespersons, and even more unfortunately also for men looking to enhance their success picking up and seducing with women. The reason this is so unfortunate, is because covert hypnosis is designed to sideline rational judgment. That is fundamental to how it works; to bypass the dominant hemisphere and critical factor. It essentially tricks the subconscious mind into accepting commands as absolute truths which include not only those approved by the conscious mind, but outside commands from a hypnotist who can 272

An Examination of Barack Obama’s implant any suggestion he wishes. Dr. Erickson was adamant that only doctors be allowed to practice his techniques because of how strongly he felt about how dangerous such science could be in the wrong hands. Milton E. Erickson, often looked at as the father of modern day hypnosis understanding, was founding president of the American Society for Clinical Hypnosis and a fellow of the American Psychiatric Association, the American Psychological Association, and the American Psychopathological Association. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ Milton_H._Erickson He felt very strongly that the field of hypnosis should only be allowed to be studied by doctors because of its power. Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p1. Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p1. Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p25 “by communicating indirectly, Dr. Erickson avoids the issue of resistance to a large extent.” “Erickson believed that the unconscious mind was always listening, and that hypnosis could be used whether the patient was aware of it or completely oblivious to the fact that a hypnotic technique was being used. Erickson would see if the patient would respond to one or another kind of indirect suggestion, and allow the unconscious mind to actively participate in the therapeutic process. In this way, what seemed like a normal conversation might induce a hypnotic trance, or a therapeutic change in the subject. Andre M. Weitzenhoffer (1976) Introduction/forward in Hypnotic Realities Erickson & Rossi. It is called conversational hypnosis because the subtleties are slipped into a conversation and the other person would not consciously realize it, while the

273

Mind Control Secrets tactics could have a very real subconscious effect.” http:// en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Milton_H._Erickson Sometimes the field is called “black-ops” hypnosis. and Subconscious suggestions are more powerful than even what the subject believes consciously – as such suggestions become parts of their deepest psyche. Because covert hypnosis is hidden in ordinary speech, the subject is not aware that it is being used, it is even more powerful than ordinary hypnosis. Since the conscious mind is not even aware of the messages being sent, conscious scrutiny and resistance is eliminated.20 The subject cannot even question the messages being sent – they are simply implanted by the hypnotist as the subject’s most fundamental beliefs. Then, even the subject’s own rational mind cannot overpower them. Bypassing the dominant hemisphere’s rational judgment (“critical factor”) The critical factor is the part of the mind that logically analyzes and scrutinizes all information like a filter, and decides what information is allowed to pass into your subconscious mind and become part of what your mind accepts as unquestionably true, like your deepest and most powerful emotions, drives, and instincts.21 It is the primary cognitive defense that usually stops all information and rationally analyzes it, whether consciously or unconsciously. It keeps your computer-like subconscious mind from literally believing that you are a chicken when someone calls you a “chicken”, and keeps you from literally believing that you are a square (box) when somebody calls you a “square”, and keeps you from literally believing you are a (snow or cereal) flake when somebody calls you a “flake.” you don’t consciously ponder it when someone calls you a chicken, your critical fator stops that information below the level of awareness.

274

An Examination of Barack Obama’s The critical factor is the cognitive function best analogized to a security guard (critical factor) who searches every person (information) entering into a nightclub looking for weapons. (and stops all information that is questionable)22 The critical factor stops all information and allows your thinking and rationality to determine whether it is acceptable to the subconscious mind or not. Hypnosis uses language patterns, visual tricks, body language, voice, tone, and other aspects of communication to get “suggestions” past the critical factor part of the brain and directly into the listener’s subconscious.23 This is wonderful if the command is to be free of a phobia, or quit smoking. The reason hypnosis is used for such psychological change, is that the critical factor allows in only what it accepts as true. Without bypassing the smoker’s critical factor, a smoker has a difficult time quitting because they have a difficult time accepting as absolutely true the information that they are a nonsmoker, because their critical factor and conscious mind knows differently and doesn’t let the information through. How one might simplify this point, is, in normal everyday life, calling someone a “chicken” will not cause them to literally believe they are a chicken and act like one. This is because the critical factor stops this information from passing into the subconscious. So how can a hypnotist get a subject to cluck like a chicken believing they are one? The hypnotist knows how to get the hypnotic suggestion that the subject is a chicken past the critical factor part of the consciousness, and get the subconscious mind to accept it as unquestionably true. Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p25 – “by communicating indirectly, he avoids the issue of resistance to a large extent.”

275

Mind Control Secrets Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1 David X’s educational video, “How to Hypnotize with Covert Hypnosis and Hypnotic Language” See video online, such as at: http://www.revver.com/video/834827/ how-to-hypnotize-with¬covert-hypnosis-and-hypnotic-language/ Analogy used in The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor Ledochowski Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p129 “voice, tone, body movement” in addition to the linguistic aspects. PART 2 – WHAT OBAMA IS ACTUALLY DOING Obama’s actions are far more deceptive than simply lying If used by a politician and discovered, such hypnosis technique, if understood as it should be, to be the height of manipulation and deception, would destroy a politician’s career.24 There is no other way to view such a politician other than disturbingly and disqualifyingly deceptive, someone whom we apparently know very little about, and cannot trust, who has been continually hiding something from us and manipulating us. To see a politician continue to perform a multitude of hundreds of deceptive acts, which he knows about but we are meant not to know about, that affect our judgment and mental processes, and that manipulate us in ways we are not even aware of, all the while thinking he is clever enough to get away with it until he finally gets caught, is the height of immoral deception. It is perhaps the biggest fraud and deception in American history. Most of our beliefs come to us from our own rational judgment and conscious analysis of the world. For example, we know it good to wake up in the morning and do 276

An Examination of Barack Obama’s something because we rationally know the consequences of staying in bed all day. When we like people, it is usually due to a combination of our rational judgment and how that person naturally makes us feel about them. We try to make people like us more by following social norms, making people feel good, smiling, and so on. However, a very small percentage of the population actually study subconscious manipulation of not only how people feel about them, but how to manipulate and alter the beliefs we usually come to by our rational judgment, reason, and experience. These people study specifically how to sideline this rational judgment, reason, and experience, and natural feelings, and bend people’s feelings and will through the application of this branch of psychiatry to their interactions. Obama is an expert at this type of artificial manipulation. His ability to convince rationally and any natural “charm” is only part of how a person feels about Obama. The rest is deceptive subconscious manipulation. His tactics are deceptive because he has mastered the science and art of lowering the effects of the rational scrutiny parts of the mind through his speaking, actions, and presentation. He gets you to believe not by convincing you rationally until you decide to believe it, but by knowing how to say to your subconscious mind literally the words that “you believe” in a way that your subconscious mind will simply accept the message and believe without having rationally decided to believe. He knows how to say to your subconscious mind that it “chose” (Obama) even when it hasn’t, in a way that you will believe that you have chosen. He understands subconscious manipulation enough to know how to talk about families, and your children, and John F. Kennedy, and conjure up feelings within you from speaking in certain rhythmic and unnaturally slow tempos, and then subconsciously 277

Mind Control Secrets transfer the emotions he conjures up onto him, such as with hand gestures or hidden content in language. You genuinely walk away from him feeling warm, and viewing him as a JFK, except it is artificial. He knows how to say one thing, but have your subconscious mind ultra-powerfully receive a different message and feeling than you are aware of. He is actually implanting feelings and emotions into your subconscious. They feel like your own. Rationally he is an unaccomplished man with shady connections, but you are tricked into feelings about him that overpower Also distinguished, are common political tactics. Such tactics, like making sure there is a Presidential podium in front of you, and American flags behind you to make you look Presidential. While they send messages, they are not analogous to the deceptive and unprecedented hypnosis used by Obama that is the focus of this document. those, that feel like your genuine feelings about him because they come from inside you, implanted into the deepest parts of your psyche. Obama’s deception here is not simply a few subliminal messages like those used in some advertisements. Obama is employing with art and skill a complex hidden system applying a multitude of the most advanced techniques in subconscious manipulation known to psychology. This entire system is designed to do one thing - to make us feel like the decision to support Obama is our own when it is really, at least for many, implanted artificially through hypnosis. What Obama is doing is in effect the same as if he dangled a silver watch in front of us and said “you are getting sleepy and going into trance... .you have an unstoppable urge that you cannot resist you must vote for Barack.” In fact, as discussed below, Obama was actually caught at least once saying something very similar with his own lips. Yes, Obama was caught giving an overt hypnotic command to 278

An Examination of Barack Obama’s vote for him.25 People even made fun of it, but nobody realized it was actual intentional hypnosis until it is now explained. (see below) Hypnotizing someone without their knowledge is the height of immorality. The level of deception involved here, in Obama’s use of covert hypnosis, and his presumption that he has the right to use hypnosis on us to gain votes is just unconscionable. If a stranger came up to you in a restaurant and tried to hypnotize you to get you to do anything, even so much as buy them a cup of coffee, and you figured out that they were trying to use actual hypnosis on you, you would run. If Obama simply lied, we voters would be able to use our rational judgment to make a logical decision about what is the truth, and what we should believe, and what we shouldn’t. However, because he is implanting subconscious commands we are not aware of consciously, into the deepest parts of our emotional and subconscious psyches, he is actually taking away our ability to make those rational judgments. He is making the decision to and taking away even our ability to question the commands he is hypnotizing us with. We never even know the commands are being implanted (until now with this document), and we are tricked into believing that our feelings are coming from deep inside us. Obama’s concealment of his hypnotic techniques can only be looked at as deception. The passion people feel for Obama is real because it comes from deep inside each of them. Thus, logical arguments against Obama become irrelevant. To all those who were wondering what the impaired rational judgment of millions of people looks like, here it is. It doesn’t matter that he has no accomplishments, never takes hard positions, or that he changes to opposite positions from almost one day to the next, or has long term connections to extremists, 279

Mind Control Secrets racists, and other shady people, is endorsed by Iran and Hamas, and simply says he didn’t know the character of his own pastor and mentor for twenty years. The logic of this disturbing information is on the conscious level, and cannot override the subconscious nor change how his supporters feel internally.27 Many may be somewhat bothered by it logically, but it hasn’t changed how See below, regarding Obama’s Statement featured in McCain ad, “The One”, - Obama’s hypnotic command that “a light will shine down from somewhere, it will light upon you, you will experience an epiphany, and you will say to yourself, ‘I have to vote for Barack’” – criticized for its being ridiculousness probably without even awareness that it is hypnosis. “Deception (also called beguilement or subterfuge) is the act of convincing another to believe information that is not true, or not the whole truth as in certain types of halftruths. Deception involves concepts like propaganda, distraction and/or concealment.” http://en.wikipedia.org/ wiki/Deception “The unconscious mind is the source of our energy. No amount of will power exerted by the conscious mind can override it.” Modern Hypnosis Theory and Practice, Masud Ansari, Ph..D., p43. many people feel about him. The fact that he has changed nearly every position from the primaries to the general election doesn’t register in us consciously what it should – that this unknown man can just as easily change the day after he is sworn in as President and be anyone he chooses, including a very different person than he has been portraying. Now, what sounds like frightening science fiction is reality. Someone whom we really don’t know, who is unaccomplished, with many shady connections and supporters, is 280

An Examination of Barack Obama’s trying to use hypnosis on millions to get us all to turn over control of the world’s largest nuclear arsenal to him, and he is about to succeed. The study of the effects of mass hypnosis A widely held view among psychologists and experts is that conversational hypnosis is literally a form of mind control. One author says: “Essentially conversational hypnosis allow users to gain control of their subjects mind through spoken word, and literally get them to do as they wish - within reason of course. Essentially the English language has various emotional triggers and tone’s which can be utilised to induce people into a trance. When people are in such a trance it is possible to alter their views and control their actions.”28 Some video examples of the power of hypnosis are included in the footnotes.29 However, this particular one at this footnote at the end of this sentence of hypnotist Derren Brown is amazing, and very exemplary of how conversational hypnosis works, and is highly recommended for a quick understanding.30 To give you an idea of the power of hypnosis in the wrong hands, hypnosis can be used to get a complete stranger to hand over a wallet in seconds.31 MSNBC32 and BBC33 reports a man stealing from stores and banks using hypnosis. One book that studied mass hypnosis called Rape of the Mind was written by Joost A. M. Meerloo, M.D., Instructor in Psychiatry, Columbia University Lecturer in Social Psychology, New School for Social Research, Former Chief, Psychological Department, Netherlands Forces. It examines the dangers of mass hypnosis.34 An excerpt of the book discusses what a hypnotist could get a subject to do through hypnotic commands, Chapter 3 – Hypnotism and Mental Coercion:

281

Mind Control Secrets http://ezinearticles.com/?Cant-Control-Your-Children?-Learn-Conversational-Hypnosis&id=959004 Hypnosis shows (examples) 1. http://www.youtube. com/watch?v=SEgrqg-abKM 2. http://www.youtube.com/ watch?v=Lg_-edxQ2Tw 3. http://www.youtube.com/ watch?v=W5H3MgHiaJY 4. http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=-219 1480905309037848&ei=o2biSIO2KJn-qAPMve2RCw&q=street+hypnosis+wallet&vt=lf ***See Derren Brown perform mind control conversational hypnosis NLP at: http://video.google.com/ videoplay?docid= 219 1480905309037848&ei=o2biSIO2KJn-qAPMve2RCw&q=street+hypnosis+wallet&vt=lf http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=-219 1480905309037848&ei=o2biSIO2KJn¬qAPMve2RCw&q=street+hypnosis+wallet&vt=lf http://crazymotion.net/news-hypnotize-people-through-conversation/wQ0C3cuuCZf8jAy.html http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/europe/7309947.stm THE RAPE OF THE MIND: The Psychology of Thought Control, Menticide, and Brainwashing, by Joost A. M. Meerloo, M.D., Instructor in Psychiatry, Columbia University Lecturer in Social Psychology, New School for Social Research, Former Chief, Psychological Department, Netherlands Forces, published in 1956, World Publishing Company. (Out of Print) Book available online at http://www. lermanet.com/scientology/mc-ch1.html There are many quacks who practice hypnosis, not to cure their victims but to force them into submission, using the victim’s unconscious ties and dependency needs in a criminal, profitable way. One of the most absorbing aspects of this whole problem of hypnosis is the question of whether people can be forced to commit crimes, such as murder or treason, while under a hypnotic spell. Many psychologists 282

An Examination of Barack Obama’s would deny that such a thing could happen and would insist that no person can be compelled to do under hypnosis what he would refuse to do in a state of alert consciousness. But actually what a person can be compelled to do depends on the degree of dependency that hypnosis causes and the frequency of repetition of the so-called posthypnotic suggestions. Rape of the Mind discusses psychological conditioning from World War II Nazi tactics, to Soviet Cold-War theoreticians, to our own democracy. (See Chapter 2 – Mass Conditioning Through Speech, and Political Conditioning. The Book also discusses the dangers of the real phenomenon of mass hypnosis: Suggestion and hypnosis are considered by some to be a psychological blessing, but they can also be the beginning of terror. Mass hypnosis, for example, can have a dangerous influence on the individual. Psychiatrists have found several times that public demonstrations of mass hypnosis may provoke an increased hypnotic dependency and submissiveness in many members of the audience that can last for years. Largely for this reason Great Britain has passed a law making seances and mass hypnotism illegal. Hypnosis may act as a trigger mechanism for a repressed dependency need in the victim and turn him temporarily into a kind of waking sleep-walker and mental slave. The hypnotic command relieves him of his personal responsibility, and he surrenders much of his conscience to his hypnotizer. As we mentioned before, our own times have provided us with far too many examples of how political hypnosis, mob hypnosis, and even war hypnosis can turn civilized men into criminals. Pavlov’s theory of psychology also says that propaganda can create mass hypnosis, and people can become conditioned to verbal or other symbols used in propaganda. Such 283

Mind Control Secrets masses can lose their discretion and be easily influenced.37 For Americans to presume that we are not subject to any propaganda just because we are Americans is insufficient logic. Illegality of Obama’s use of hypnosis Hypnosis-type mental pressure has been held by the Supreme Court of the United States to be so unduly influential as to deprive someone of their fundamental rights. The US Supreme court case was Leyra v. Denno, 347 U.S. 556 (1954), Leyra v. Denno, No. 635, Argued April 28, 1954, Decided June 1, 1954, 347 U.S. 556. After police questioned a suspect day and night unable to obtain a confession, a hypnotist tried, and did successfully get the suspect to confess. The legal battles over whether the confession was voluntary or not, undue influence or not, went all the way to the Supreme court of the United States, which decided that his confession could not be used as evidence against him in court. In discussing what the New York THE RAPE OF THE MIND, Chapter 3, Medication into Submission, Hypnotism and Mental Coercion, available at http://www.lermanet.com/scientology/mc-ch3.html THE RAPE OF THE MIND, Chapter 3, Chapter 2 PAVLOV’S STUDENTS AS CIRCUS TAMERS – Mass Conditioning Through Speech, Political Conditioning. The International Law of Propaganda, By Bhagevatula Satyanarayana Murty, discussing I.P. Pavlov, Conditioned Reflexes, an Investigation of the Physiological Activity of the Cerebral Cortex. Pavlov’s theories have inspired several works on propaganda and brainwashing techniques. Sergei Chakhotin, The Rape of the Masses (London, Routledge & Kegan Paul), William Sargant, Battle for the Mind, Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1957) and also citing to Rape of The Mind, by A.M. Meerloo. 284

An Examination of Barack Obama’s Court of Appeals held, that “were so clearly the product of ‘mental coercion’ that their use as evidence was inconsistent with due process of law”, the United States Supreme Court said “exhausted suspect’s ability to resist interrogation was broken to almost trance-like submission by use of the arts of a highly skilled psychiatrist.” It violated the most fundamental rights of the suspect to have this confession used, because it was not of his own free will. Hypnosis on a non-consenting person may arguably constitute fraud38, undue influence, and/or potentially other violations of the law, depending on the jurisdiction.39 Undue influence is “persuasion that overcomes the will without convincing the judgment.”40 Hypnosis works on mental and emotional weaknesses fitting the legal definition precisely. For example, with hypnotizing someone to get access to that person’s bank account – even the hypnotist makes the person believe they want to do it, they are using techniques which create an undue influence on the person. The Executive Committee of the American Psychological Association Division of Psychological Hypnosis has said, “clinical hypnosis should be used only by properly trained and credentialed health care professionals (e.g. licensed clinical psychologists), who have also been trained in the clinical use of hypnosis and are working within the areas of their professional expertise.” The Appellate Division of the Los Angeles County Superior Court has held that practice of hypnotism as curative measure or mode of procedure by one not licensed to practice medicine amounts to unlawful practice of medicine.41 What Obama is doing is making some people’s support of him in this election not of our own free will. He us using hidden techniques so we cannot even question the commands he is slipping into our subconscious. Many genuinely 285

Mind Control Secrets want to support him like smokers want a cigarette, and as smokers, we find the logic to justify how we feel. The hypnosis technique of “pacing and leading” to sideline rational judgment In a nutshell, “pacing and leading” is using hypnosis to bypass the critical factor. By bypassing the cognitive functions that would normally critically analyze and scrutinize information, the hypnotist tricks the patient’s subconscious mind into accepting external information from the hypnotist into the subconscious, as a hypnotic suggestion, as absolutely true. It is a more powerful implant of information than even the subject can usually communicate to themselves with his or her own thoughts. Pacing and leading is a fundamental tool in conversational or covert hypnosis.42 Normally only what you consciously know to be true is allowed to pass. If you are a smoker, but tell yourself consciously that you Fraud does not require an express false statement, though subconscious connections to JFK and the like are clearly that. Fraud can also constitute withholding information in some cases, such as when there is a duty to disclose. One article by Peter C. Johnson, describes conversational hypnosis as mind control - http://ezinearticles. com/?Cant-Control-Your-Children?-Learn-Conversational-Hypnosis&id=959004 - While stating it is “not illegal” in his opinion, this example is relating to using it to get your children to do things, and he cannot make a statement on what is legal across a spectrum of varied situations, including the use of hypnosis to get political support, votes and campaign contributions. Undue influence is “Undue influence, in the sense we are concerned with here, is a shorthand legal phrase used to describe persuasion which tends to be coercive in nature, persuasion which overcomes the will without convincing 286

An Examination of Barack Obama’s the judgment. (Estate of Ricks, 160 Cal. 467, 480-482, 117 P. 539.) The hallmark of such persuasion is high pressure, a pressure which works on mental, moral, or emotional weakness to such an extent that it approaches the boundaries of coercion. In this sense, undue influence has been called overpersuasion. Kelly v. McCarthy, 6 Cal.2d 347, 364, 57 P.2d 118.” Odorizzi v. Bloomfield School Dist., 1966, 246 Cal.App.2d 123, 54 Cal.Rptr. 533. People v. Cantor, 198 Cal.App.2d Supp. 843, 18 Cal. Rptr. 363, Cal.Super. 1961 Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p13. are a nonsmoker, that information is stopped by your own critical factor, not allowed to pass into your own subconscious because your own critical factor knows it is not true. Thus even you can’t get information past your own critical factor. Dr. Erickson discovered that through pacing, a hypnotist could neutralize the filter of a person’s critical factor so he can slip suggestions past the critical factor into the subconscious. 43 “Pacing” can be almost any technique by which a hypnotist gets your critical factor to lower its critical analysis and scrutiny of the information you are receiving. The “lead” is the new information, suggestion, or command the hypnotist wants to implant. When done effectively, the hypnotist can “lead” – implant suggestions and commands that pass through into your subconscious that will be taken as unquestionably true.44 The lead can be something you are aware of such as a statement you hear, or it can be embedded, hidden, something you are completely unaware of consciously, yet still pass through into your subconscious. The word “suggestion” is used in hypnosis, but it is not a suggestion as we 287

Mind Control Secrets think of one, that we consider and rationalize. “Suggestion” in the hypnosis world is actually a suggestion into the subconscious, something your mind will take as unquestionably true, thus, in effect, more powerful than even a command as we use this term. How pacing is done: Working with our analogy, if many people entering the club are searched by the security guard and nothing questionable is found, the security guard’s defense efforts become tired, lazy, and lowered. Normally though, everything in our world is questionable keeping the critical factor sharp and alert. The hypnotist paces the subject by providing the mind with information that is undeniably true, something the subject strongly believes, or is absolutely and immediately verifiable, in successive patterns until the subject’s guard is lowered. This pacing can take the form of almost any information that serves as an accurate representation of the subject’s current ongoing experience, including what they see, what they hear, what they truly believe, and describing or imitating the subject’s conscious experience or even subconscious experience, such as their breathing.45 Breathing is a common pace in hypnosis. Breathing is something conscious when we are focused on it, but when we do not focus on it, we do not stop breathing, it is simply taken over by the subconscious mind. Often times, just the mention of “breathing” is sufficient to bring the activity into conscious focus for seconds or minutes, until such focus is not needed and the subconscious takes over it again. Pacing can be such as obvious statements the subject truly believes or knows are true, or subconscious act/messages that the hypnotist does which the subject is not even aware of, e.g. mimicking or describing

288

An Examination of Barack Obama’s Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1 Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1 David X’s educational video, “How to Hypnotize with Covert Hypnosis and Hypnotic Language” See video online, such as at: http://www.revver.com/video/834827/ how-to-hypnotize-with¬covert-hypnosis-and-hypnotic-language/ Essentially, David X summarizes the conversational hypnosis process as: 1. Capturing focus, 2. bypassing the critical factor/thinking, 3. activating an unconscious or emotional response, (emotional people will not reason) and 4. leading those responses to the outcome the hypnotist desires. 45 Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p138 – Pacing, Distraction, and Utilization of the Dominant Hemisphere. breathing. Commonly, the hypnotist describes the experiences, sights, thoughts, and feelings the subject is having.46 This is not just a politician saying what his audience is sure to agree with. The hypnotist purposely describes absolute truths on multiple levels related to the subject’s current reality, and thereby tricks the subject’s critical factor into lowering its guard and gets the subject to accept the hypnotist as a source for information to be taken into the subconscious as absolutely true. The brain regularly absorbs representations of the subject’s current ongoing experience, what the subject sees, hears, feels, as a natural part of communication between the conscious and subconscious mind. Pacing works by disguising information as part of the subject’s ongoing verifiable experience to trick the critical factor into letting that information pass through to the subconscious.

289

Mind Control Secrets By repeatedly providing information to the subject that the subject genuinely believes to be true, the hypnotist disguises himself as a source for absolutely true information acceptable to your subconscious. The hypnotic commands of the hypnotist can be disguised as information being communicated in between the conscious and unconscious mind of the subject. The subject trusts this information believing it is approved by the conscious mind, and the command slips through the critical factor of one person hypnotized, or millions watching on TV. Unknowingly to the conscious mind, when this happens, the lead, or the new information from the hypnotist is accepted as absolutely true, and becomes part of the subject’s deepest beliefs.47 Specific examples of Obama using 14 separate hypnotic pacing statements in his Denver 2008 Convention speech Elementary pacing examples from Obama include, “now is the time”, and “as I stand here before you.” These statements are undeniably true in the simplest terms and commonly used parts of his pacing techniques, because of course now is the time, and if he is there speaking, of course he is standing before us. These are things the hypnotist says that are verifiably true, and used to lower our critical factor defenses to allow implantation of subconscious messages. Looking at “pacing” statements alone, Obama’s 2008 Democratic National Convention Speech in Denver48 uses them throughout. Yet, nobody suspects these language patterns to be anything other than an innocent part of his powerful speech. Three of Obama’s favorite hypnotic paces are “that’s why I stand here tonight”, “now is the time”, and “this moment.” Just these three pacing statements are used by Obama a total of fourteen (14) times throughout this single speech.

290

An Examination of Barack Obama’s In this speech, Obama essentially said “as I stand before you tonight” three separate times, around the beginning, middle, and end of the speech to continue pacing the audience throughout, as follows: Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p138 – Pacing, Distraction, and Utilization of the Dominant Hemisphere. Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1 Speech excepts from Obama’s Denver 2008 Democratic Convention Speech, http://www.demconvention.com/ barack-obama/ 1. That’s why I stand here tonight. Because for two hundred and thirty two years, at each moment when that promise was in jeopardy, ordinary men and women - students and soldiers, farmers and teachers, nurses and janitors -- found the courage to keep it alive. 2. The fundamentals we use to measure economic strength are whether we are living up to that fundamental promise that has made this country great - a promise that is the only reason I am standing here tonight. 3. But I stand before you tonight because all across America something is stirring. What the nay-sayers don’t understand is that this election has never been about me. It’s been about you. In the same speech, Obama says “now is the time” six times throughout. While he phrase is apparent, it sounds to everyone like just his power-phrase or theme for the speech. 1. Now is the time to end this addiction, and to understand that drilling is a stop-gap measure, not a 291

Mind Control Secrets

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

long-term solution. Not even close. Now is the time to finally meet our moral obligation to provide every child a world-class education, because it will take nothing less to compete in the global economy. Now is the time to finally keep the promise of affordable, accessible health care for every single American. Now is the time to help families with paid sick days and better family leave, because nobody in America should have to choose between keeping their jobs and caring for a sick child or ailing parent. Now is the time to change our bankruptcy laws, so that your pensions are protected ahead of CEO bonuses; and the time to protect Social Security for future generations. And now is the time to keep the promise of equal pay for an equal day’s work, because I want my daughters to have exactly the same opportunities as your sons.

It is no coincidence that he happens to use these phrases that are subconscious pacing statements because they are immediately and verifiably true by their most simplistic terms, and cause the subconscious to accept the hypnotist as a source for such absolute truth. Obama also says essentially “this moment” five times, serving the same pacing purpose. 1. We meet at one of those defining moments - a moment when our nation is at war, our economy is in turmoil, and the American promise has been threatened once more. 2. This moment - this election - is our chance to keep, in the 21st century, the American promise alive. 292

An Examination of Barack Obama’s 3. You have shown what history teaches us - that at defining moments like this one, the change we need doesn’t come from Washington. 4. America, this is one of those moments. 5. At this moment, in this election, we must pledge once more to march into the future Notice how for each instance without exception, he has words before or after “moment” to make it absolutely immediately and verifiably true, such as “we meet at”, or “this election”, moments “like this one”, or “this is one of those moments.” The notion that this is all also a coincidence is absurd. This is carefully crafted hidden hypnotic pacing. And, this is only the beginning. Obama put these 14 pacing hypnotic language patterns into his speech knowing them to be part of a hypnotic trance induction. It is not “just the way he talks” nor “coincidence.” A more detailed play by play analysis of Obama’s hypnosis techniques in this and other speeches is below. Obama uses a variety of other statements nobody can disagree with as pacing statements. More simplistic are statements like “we need change”, “We are the hope of our future,” and “Yes we can.” They are logically meaningless but they hit a chord, a subconscious chord, especially in younger people, and are his most powerful words. See the analysis on vagueness and trans-derivation below. However, such pacing statements alone are only a small part of the complex hypnotic trance induction Obama intentionally uses. Embedded and hidden meanings – “deep structure” of language vs “surface structure” Most people do not realize Obama is using hypnosis because everything he does is below the radar – hidden inside normal speech. There is nothing special about these 293

Mind Control Secrets words or phrases to give them away as “hypnosis.” The general public does not have an understanding of the field, and Obama is hoping that these explanations will be too difficult for the general public to understand, and too complex for the media to try and explain. In fact, Obama is counting on the media to do what it has done for the past few elections – control their coverage to keep the race as close to even as possible until the end, making the story exciting, so that the effects of Obama’s hypnosis triggered in the voting booth will push him over the edge to victory. The communications we are aware of are called the “surface structure” – that is what the subject hears and realizes. The science of hypnosis requires understanding the “deep structure” of what the subject sees, hears, and experiences – the communication that is designed for our subconscious to receive. our brains delete, change, distort, and jumble content on its way to the subconscious mind. Hypnotists speak in a manner to put us into trance, and then intentionally send “deep structure” communications designed for only our subconscious minds without conscious awareness. While below is an example of hidden pacing, imbedded commands in all aspects of hypnosis serve the purpose of making commands to the client indirectly, and thereby avoiding resistance. Indirect suggestion is such a pivotal part of conversational hypnosis, that entire hypnosis practice manuals have been written precisely on indirect suggestion techniques. Obama has used as part of pacing, statements such as “we rise and(or) fall as one nation.” That sounds powerful and true. In fact it is something no one can argue with, as all pacing is. But why the “or fall” part if he is trying to be optimistic? The hidden subconscious effect is that Obama is pacing us in a hidden way we don’t even realizeRemember, 294

An Examination of Barack Obama’s pacing is something that is unquestionably true and is an accurate For “change we can believe in” – the word “believe” is key – it is one of the most powerful words in hypnosis, and a word anchored continually by Obama’s apparently innocent hand gestures. The Illinois senator sprinkles speeches with “we” and “you” – “Yes we can” and “you have done what the cynics said we couldn’t do” – as if he were as much guiding a movement as running for president. How the Candidates’ Speaking Styles Play, By Ariel Sabar | July 11, 2008 edition, http:// features.csmonitor.com/politics/2008/07/1 1/how-theKiller Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1, states how genuinely difficult it is to get caught using covert hypnosis, because without an understanding of the techniques, there is nothing to suggest any element of hypnosis. Often you can only even detect that hypnosis is being used by the effects, such as irrational actions. See http:// en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Covert_hypnosis - Signs you’re not using analytical mind. Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p153 Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p172 See, for example, Conversational Hypnosis, A Manual of Indirect Suggestion, By Carol Sommer See discussion on trans-derivation below regarding alternate deep structures. These\representation of the subject’s ongoing experience. It is not just that the nation rises and falls, but as we breathe, our chest “rises and falls.” We are not aware of it consciously, but with this statement we are being subconsciously paced by Obama’s words. Thus, without even realizing it, Obama elicits a subconscious response - us 295

Mind Control Secrets subconsciously increasingly seeing Obama as a source of acceptable absolute truth. Notice how Obama rarely if ever asks for our vote in his speeches. (or money) After repeated and continual pacing an entire audience of millions with statements that are undoubtedly true that lower our critical factors’ defenses, Obama just slips in the hypnotic command (the lead) e.g. .. .“and that is why I will be your next President.” The hyper-confidence Obama uses, after having used multiple language patterns to lower rational defenses, is because he must speak in a way that your subconscious mind will have no reason to doubt. This does not raise suspicion because politicians generally have to sound over-confident, e.g. saying they will win. The reason Obama sounds so hyper-confident with certain language patterns is because he has to in order to input a command effectively so your subconscious takes it as absolute truth. How Ericksonian “linking statements” mimic the way the brain accepts information After pacing you repeatedly in multiple ways and on multiple levels as described above, and thus lowering your cognitive critical factor defenses, the hypnotist will implant a “lead” - the command or absolute unquestionable truth he places in your subconscious. Essentially, the pace or truth is connected to the new hypnotic message or “lead” using connecting or linking language. Paces are connected to the lead through the use of the linking words including “and”, “as”, and “because” or “that is why.”59 The latter linking words each being increasingly more powerful than the former, especially the ones containing an element of causation, because causation mirrors the way the subconscious mind accepts information. Saying, for one example: “We need change.. .and. ..that is why I will be your next President.” is a basic pace and lead. 296

An Examination of Barack Obama’s No person can disagree with “we need change.” Change is inevitable anyway, certainly when problems exist. However, the fact that change will happen, or that we need change, has absolutely nothing to do with being a valid reason why the choice for President should be none other than Barack Obama. 56 See Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, staring p 16 and throughout – pacing techniques describing the subjects ongoing observable experience such as breathing in and out is a frequently used and primary pacing technique. “In standard inductions, the hypnotist will frequently use descriptions such as. ..breathing in and out.. .in the process, the hypnotist is making himself into a sophisticated bio-feedback mechanism .. .to.. .match the client’s subjective experience on both conscious and unconscious levels. See Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, staring p 16 See McCain ad “The One” Obama is asked, “do you ever have any doubts?” He responds, “never” and smiles obviously. Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p19, re implied causative and cause and effect statements, “the strongest form of linkage occurs with what we call Cause – Effect. ..The important feature of these types of linkages is not whether the logic of the statement is valid, but simply whether they constitute a successful link between the client’s ongoing behavior and what the client experiences next.” See a detailed discussion of the linking statements and causal linguistic process modeling including, “as”, “while”, “during”, “and”, starting p146. Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1

297

Mind Control Secrets Re causation - “this structure mirrors the structure of internal belief.” - Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1 Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p19, causation is “the strongest form of linkage.” See also Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1. Logically there is no connection at all between “change” and why he should be President. Same when Obama describes how bad the economy is, and how bad government is, and then follows with “and that is why I want to be your next President.” When he has only listed problems, the logical derivative is only that someone who is good at solving those problems should be President. But he has not made any logical argument as to why it should be him. As a Harvard attorney, Obama knows clearly that his speeches have faulty logic. But the use of these basic words as hypnotic linking statements in your subconscious, connects an absolute truth you believe deeply, from a (now) trusted source of absolute truths, to a new message that is slipped past the critical factor because it comes from the same trusted source, using the fundamental way your brain understands information. The subject walks away believing we need change, therefore we need Obama. It doesn’t matter whether the cause and effect linking statement has any truth or logical connection to it. It works because it links statements the subject knows subconsciously to be true, with statements from the hypnotist, that the hypnotist tricks the subconscious mind to believe are connected, and thus also absolutely true at the subconscious level. Basics of Obama’s pacing and leading: The “because we need change, that is why I should be your next president” argument 298

An Examination of Barack Obama’s Building on this basic framework, you do not hear specifics largely because much of Obama’s entire presentation is pacing the audience. Obama’s sentence structure is often exactly what is taught by Erickson in ways that cannot be coincidence. If he went into specifics, he would not be pacing, he would be encouraging the use of the conscious mind, something he is attempting to avoid. Obama’s entire campaign, essentially, can be summarized as: 1. The economy is bad, or the country is going in the wrong direction (pace) or we need to get an education for every child (whatever statements no one can disagree with (pace) and therefore creates a “yesyes-yes” response, or “yes room.”)64 2. Change (can be used as a pace, an anchor, and/or a preprogrammed response) 3. And or because or that is why (conjunction linking statement)65 4. I will be your next President. (subconscious lead) Saying that things are bad and we need change is only a logical basis for the conclusion that we need someone able to solve our current problems for President – but the suggestion that the person to do this is Obama is rationally under-supported or entirely unsupported. It doesn’t matter though, because the connection is made on the subconscious level through the use of linking statements applied precisely per Ericksonian techniques. Obama says he offers hope, but actually much of Obama’s pacing is negative, e.g. based on how negative things are. In fact, anger works well as an emotion with which to change behavior through hypnosis. Notice how Obama rarely if ever smiles during the substantive parts within his formal hypnotic speeches. 299

Mind Control Secrets Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1 The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor Ledochowski , p35/631 Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p147 fact, he has been described as looking angry.66 The hypnotic analysis is simple, angrily pointing while frowning and making emotionally strong points in speeches send the subconscious message of a person in commanding authority over you ordering you to act a certain way.67 Many feel is that Obama is the person for whom to vote because he magically “inspires”, when in fact, Obama has commanded subconsciously. Obama says he is the person with judgment, and he says he is the person to solve our problems because he recognizes what is wrong, but these are logically empty arguments. His arguments based on his “ability to see” what is wrong provides no real logical basis. His point is no more advanced nor specific than the average listener’s viewpoint. He opposed the war in Iraq in 2003, but so did half the world, logically, making Obama no more qualified than half the planet to be President. However, because he uses pacing and leading so effectively, he says, “because we need change, that is why I want to be your next President” - it is absorbed into the subconscious as absolute truth. The fact that this argument has no logic is irrelevant to such feelings. Similarly, just because Obama powerfully says “its time for new energy and new ideas” doesn’t mean he actually has any new ideas, but through his hypnotic techniques, that’s what people walk away feeling. Obama’s speeches as one big hypnotic trance induction using extra slow speech, rhythm, tonalities, vagueness, visual imagery, metaphor, and raising of emotion 300

An Examination of Barack Obama’s Everyone knows the sensation of hanging on Obama’s every word as he speaks. It is no accident. In fact, Obama intends to speak in such a way that it is almost impossible to listen at all without hanging on his every word. His unnaturally slow, rhythmical, four to eight word phrases with huge pauses after, are delivered to be complete ideas by themselves on some level, even though only part of a sentence or complete thought. He is sensitive to exactly how to speak to fixate your attention based on his understanding of hypnosis. Obama’s speeches often use an unnaturally slow language to start. Unnaturally slow speech is a common hypnotic technique in order to allow the subject time to respond to suggestions, imagine images, and feel sensations conjured by the hypnotist.68 The unnaturally slow speech holds focus intensely, because the mind waits for new input, and is meanwhile left analyzing what it has just heard. Absorbing attention is about making sure people’s thoughts are what you set out for them. The intense focus of the conscious mind frees the subconscious mind to act beyond normal constraints of what the conscious mind thinks is real or normal or even proper.69 Hypnosis is so closely aligned with this super intense focus on a single thing that the study of mesmerism actually almost renamed hypnosis “monoideaism” – mono for one, and See discussion and images below regarding his Democratic Convention Speech for 2008 The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor Ledowchowski, p104 of 631 How To Perform Hypnosis, by: William Hewitt, The Llewellyn Encyclopedia, http://www.llewellynencyclopedia.com/article/225 You do need to give some thought and practice to the pace of your speech. The speech pattern needs to be slow enough to give the subject time to 301

Mind Control Secrets respond to your directions and yet fast enough to retain his or her attention and interest. If you go too slow, the subject’s mind will most likely wander to other thoughts. You want to maintain the subject’s attention to your voice. You will find that some people need a faster pace while others need a slower pace. Experience will help you find just the right pace. A pause of two to five seconds is a good average. 69 The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor Ledochowski , p33/631 We all know what it is like to go along with our imaginations on the ride Obama takes us on with his powerful metaphors, and captivating visual images and sensations, and passionate emotion as his speeches accelerate from unnaturally slow, into fireworks. Being hypnotized is enjoyable, reportedly affecting both serotonin and endorphins in the body. Per the definition of hypnosis by Dr. Ansari, hypnosis is essentially the subject’s fixation of attention, and while in that state of hyper-suggestability, receiving a suggestion from the hypnotist. Every type of hypnotic induction involves a fixation of attention, which is what Obama accomplishes with his extraordinarily slow and rhythmical and powerful speech pattern, hand gestures, and logo, always present on his podium, small and barely noticeable (consciously). Hypnotists use a rhythm of phrases of few words, usually approximately four to eight word phrases, almost like a melody, not just because it holds attention. Such rhythm to be used is taught as part of conversational hypnosis. The “melody” of words delivered by the hypnotist in almost a music like fashion accesses the non-dominant hemisphere because that is where music is interpreted. A hypnotist can become a master of using rate of speaking, tonalities, and pauses to communicate indirect suggestions. Hypnotists also use tonality and changes in tonality 302

An Examination of Barack Obama’s while speaking to hypnotize and send subconscious messages.74 Based on Erickson’s advancements, entire works have been written just on indirect suggestion, hidden meanings within language, and communicate of those hidden meanings to only the subconscious mind of the subject. The use of Ericksnian “vagueness” in speech as a linguistic induction tool: “Change” and “Yes we can.” We all know Obama continually uses vague statements without being specific of their meaning, including “yes we can”, and “change.” In fact, he gets audiences to chant them. Remember the three dimensions of Ericksonian trance induction discussed above: 1. Pacing and distraction of the dominant (language) hemisphere; 2. Utilization of the dominant hemisphere, language processing which occurs below the level of awareness; 3. Accessing of the non-dominant hemisphere; A statement that we hear consciously contains only one surface structure (unless we do a double-take and realize a secondary meaning). However, one such statement can contain multiple deep structure meanings to our subconscious.76 The process by which the mind searches between alternate meanings is called transdiravational search . The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor Ledochowski , p33/631 Marshall Sylver, Hypnotist The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor Ledochowski, p94 of 631, The performance element of hypnosis: Rhythm and tone (regarding using rhythm in conversational hypnosis to be more compelling by being almost music-like) 303

Mind Control Secrets Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p191 – Accessing the Non-Dominant Hemisphere by Melody Using The Tonality Of Your Voice To Covertly Hypnotize Someone, By Michael Bass, http://ezinearticles. com/?Using-The-Tonality-Of-Your-Voice-To-Covertly-Hypnotize-Someone&id=737888 See, for example, Conversational Hypnosis, A Manual of Indirect Suggestion, By Carol Sommer See Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, staring p 164 – Ambiguity, surface structure vs. deep structure, and derivation. The searching through these various meanings is part of what distracts the rational part of the mind as part of hypnotic induction, even if we are not consciously aware of our search between different meanings. This trans-derivational search occurs below the level of awareness. A vague statement introduced as part of a hypnotic induction and pacing and leading has multiple functions in facilitating hypnosis – it makes the subject a participant in the hypnotic process, it makes the subject select between alternative meanings thereby ensuring a satisfactory pacing, and depending on the nature of the vagueness, it employs his linguistic (or cognitive) processes with a trans-derivational search for meaning in the vague statement. “The unconscious mind responds to openings, opportunities, metaphors, symbols and contradictions. Effective hypnotic suggestion, then, should be “artfully vague”, leaving space for the subject to fill in the gaps with their own unconscious understandings - even if they do not consciously grasp what is happening. The skilled hypnotherapist constructs these gaps of meaning in a way most suited to the individual subject - in a way which is most likely to produce the desired change.”78 304

An Examination of Barack Obama’s The fact that Obama uses vague statements with which nobody can disagree is not just politics, it is part of the linguistic component piece of the puzzle of Obama’s knowing and intentional use of Ericksonian hypnosis techniques. When Obama says “change” is can mean a lot of different things to everyone. He is not specific in what he means because then he would lose his pacing of the audience. Obama creates a trans-derivational search just by saying the vague word change, allowing that message of change to slip into the subconscious, as a command, that he has associated with himself in a number of subconscious and conscious ways. People do not rationally desire a change they do not have any idea of what it means. Some of the people want change in this election but cannot explain what Obama will actually do and can’t name anything Obama has changed in his 46 years are supporting him because his implantation of this hypnotic suggestion of “change” has been effective. partly why he is so frustrated about McCain saying that he, the maverick is the true change candidate, is because Obama spent all this time programming change, and doesn’t want McCain getting votes from Obama’s hypnotic programming. Use of visual imagery and imagination as an induction tool Visual imagery, like Obama’s, is a key component of facilitating hypnotic trance induction. Using metaphor in hypnosis is especially effective because it engages the conscious and unconscious mind at the same time, communicating logically while activating imagination and emotion allows the use of “ultra-compelling communications.” Imagination is a powerful hypnotic tool because creativity is an altered state of consciousness. Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, starting p 170 – While this discussion 305

Mind Control Secrets discusses mostly language patterns that have secondary meanings which are specific interpretations, the concepts are applicable to all vagueness. See http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Milton_H._Erickson, Indirect Techniques re vagueness as part of hypnotic induction. See also The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor Ledochowski, Appendix 2 – p541/631 – With artfully vague language, the listener is employed to give the language concrete meaning, that search for meaning is called a trans-derivational searh which is a specialized trance state. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Milton_H._Erickson, Indirect Techniques Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p180-191, quoting Erickson, Deep Hypnosis and its Induction, 1967, p.9, “the utilization of imagery in trance induction almost always facilitates the development of similar or related, more complex hypnotic behavior. David Livingston, www.hypnosis101.com “Triggering Emotions During Hypnosis: Anchor Collapsing” Together, all three dimensions of Ericksonian trance induction are present, as well as all three means of hypnotically accessing the non-dominant hemisphere are present in Obama’s speeches (Dr. Erickson’s three classes as visualization, melodic accession and linguistic) 82. Per the Power of Conversational Hypnosis, the four steps to hypnosis are also identical to the principles of Obama’s speech. 1. absorb attention. 2. bypass the critical factor (with pacing) 3. create an unconscious response (the classic one is emotion) and 4. lead the subconscious mind to the desired outcome. 306

An Examination of Barack Obama’s An emotional response is an unconscious response. Raising of emotion is a fundamental technique in hypnosis to make the subject more programmable, more effectively, because emotion is a subconscious reaction, and can be connected to other subconscious elements, including commands. Obama uses a visually, cognitively, and emotionally stimulating language that forces your mind to follow slowly by experiencing his phrases, instead of just listening to them. The pauses never get boring like other people who speak slowly, because each phrase by Obama that is only a few words long, is by itself sufficient to capture your attention, and hold it with thought, or imagination, or an image, until the next phrase is spoken. Visual and sensory imagery in the hypnotist’s speech is an effective element that uses the subject’s own imagination while listening to the speech to bring them deeper into trance. Together, every hypnotic element is present in Obama’s speeches, all working together to hypnotize the audience. You will notice Obama has all of these in his speeches, unnaturally slow language in simplistic phrases which catch and hold your attention, and countless images that grab and hold your imagination, such as “turn the page”, and “a breeze is blowing across this nation,. ..and change is in the air.” and “write the next chapter in American history.” “There’s a new breeze blowing across this nation...”88 The phrase is a visual and hypnotically captivating statement that you cannot disagree with because it makes your subconscious associate relaxation, pleasure, and other emotions and your most tranquil moment with his voice, preparing you for his following sentence, “and change is in the air.” The stacking of hypnotic language patterns in 40+ minute long speeches 307

Mind Control Secrets The more a hypnotist paces and leads you, and uses other hypnotic speech patterns in succession, the more effective they become at manipulating you because the repetition wears down your critical factor. Doing what Obama does once or twice doesn’t do as much, but doing it throughout a speech, and continuously throughout a campaign, subconsciously brainwashes you. http://www.hypnosis101.com/stock-metaphor.htm Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p60, Inquiry with Aldous Huxley An example from Erickson, is “you know how a raindrop can cling to a leaf before it finally lets go.” Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p199. The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor Ledochowski , p34/631 The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Meed and Igor Ledochowski, p32 of 631. www.conversational-hypnosis.com David Livingston, www.hypnosis101.com “Triggering Emotions During Hypnosis: Anchor Collapsing” http://www.hypnosis101.com/wordpress/hypnosis-tips/ hypnosis-emotions/ “Using hypnosis, the information that was gathered during the guided imagery session is now reframed into positive suggestions that are accepted by the unconscious mind.” GUIDED IMAGERY & HYPNOSIS, By Rhona Jordan, C.GIt, C.CHt. http://www.lagunaplayhouse.com/ onstage/2008/tranced/GuidedImagery.php Barack Obama in his speech on Super Tuesday night Obama made this statement in his speech on Super Tuesday. Obama speaks for 40-50 minutes, 20-30 minute longer than most political speeches. Have you ever wondered why 308

An Examination of Barack Obama’s Obama gives these long 40-50 minute speeches? Probably not, because most people do not even realize time has gone by. This process of pacing then leading, pacing then leading, again and again, as well as using other hypnotic language patterns is called “stacking language patterns” (as in, one on top of the other)89 The hypnotist blends the process with embedded commands, anchors, emotional transfers, and other techniques. What occurs is that the critical factor is bored, worn down, gets tired, and stops being critical because it is too much work – then, the hypnotist’s effects increase.90 Obama’s unusual use of hand gestures as subconscious programming and hypnotic anchoring designed to be triggered in the voting booth on November 4th While most people believe that Obama’s hand gestures as he speaks are meaningless, or innocent emphasis to enhance the presentation, this may be sometimes perhaps to reserve the argument that they are meaningless, but is not always the case. Sometimes Obama does use his hand gestures simply for emphasis or to help illustrate what he is saying. However, sometimes, his hand gestures are designed to have very specific effect under the principles of hypnosis. Obama uses certain hand gestures as hypnotic anchors, and others to aid in hypnotic command implantation. Anchoring is a hypnosis/NLP technique where the hypnotist programs the subject to respond a certain way from a specific trigger or stimuli. A “hypnotic anchor” is any stimulus that triggers a consistent psychological state. An anchor is essentially an internal state that is triggered by an external stimulus An example would be, a hypnotist eliciting a certain response from the subject, whether outward or inward, e.g. emotional, and then the hypnotist doing a certain act (the anchor) which is a touch, or a keyword, or signal, that the 309

Mind Control Secrets hypnotist associates subconsciously to the response. The hypnotist can then bring about that response just by repeating the anchor. It is similar to how Pavlov would ring a bell whenever he fed his dogs, and then eventually, his dogs would salivate just from the sound of hearing a bell ring. The hypnotist stirs up feelings or emotions. “When that feeling is at its strongest, “anchor” is by making a gesture. Anchors do not have to be created or triggered by a physical touch, and could be any symbol or gesture that is a unique association. What is the different between innocent use of hand gestures by Obama and deceptive hypnotic use of hand gestures? Obviously, it is Obama’s knowledge of such hypnotic and manipulative effects of certain hand gestures, and his intended use of such hand gestures for hypnotic effect. Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1 Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1-6 Neuro-Linguistic Programming – a way of programming the subconscious mind through language ‘Anchors occur throughout all of our sensory channels in a potentially infinite number of ways. There are four keys to anchoring: The intensity of the state; Timing (peak of experience); Uniqueness of the stimulus, including the number of senses used (visual, auditory, kinesthetic, olfactory, gustatory), and; Exact replication of the stimulus, or trigger..” http://www.hypnos.co.uk/hypnomag/valente. htm See also, Anchoring is one of the most useful nlp techniques developed by Bandler and Grinder, it’s a method for using the powerful unconscious resources of others to get the responses you desire. http://www.nlp-hypnosis.ws/ nlp_anchoring.htm

310

An Examination of Barack Obama’s Gemma Bailey 4 Tips For Anchoring, An NLP Practitioners Tool http://weslandinstitute.com/blog/ date/2007/03/ Gemma Bailey 4 Tips For Anchoring, An NLP Practitioners Tool http://weslandinstitute.com/blog/ date/2007/03/ You may have noticed how Obama holds his thumb and forefinger. Because a gesture is subconsciously linked by programming to a response, it must be unique.95 Obama uses this thumb and forefinger hand position essentially uniquely, differently than all other speakers, and continually, far more frequently than other speakers who use any similar hand gesture. It was even made fun of on Saturday Night Live. So besides the fact that he has a somewhat unique hand gesture, which he uses more often than other speakers, what is the proof that this is part of Obama’s unethical use of hypnosis? Obama uses his thumb and forefinger pressed together as a hidden (deep structure) hypnotic anchor. He also uses it to deliver hypnotic commands. The evidence it is not an innocent hand gesture e.g. for emphasis, but rather as a hypnotic anchor is that Obama is repeatedly caught using it extraordinarily often and specifically for very specific words and concepts like “believe”, and “chose.” In fact, often he is caught using certain it for such hypnotic programming words more so than at the point of his sentence that he would be emphasizing. Specific examples are plentiful below. Obama also uses hand gestures to aid in delivery of hypnotic commands, and this is evident from his use of very specific hand gestures at very specific times. What is meant by the above two examples, is that while Obama’s hand gestures often are simply for emphasis or to 311

Mind Control Secrets assist visually with his narrative, they are caught repeatedly diverging from this purpose, and following entirely different principles, the principles of hypnotic anchoring and programming. The hand gesture can symbolize anything, and it is possible that Obama’s hand gesture of his thumb and forefinger pressed together symbolizes a “C” for change, money, an infinite (hypnotic) connection between himself and the audience (by pointing with his index finger to the audience repeatedly and then emphasizing a point with his two fingers together, and others. Most likely, because it is a hypnotic trigger, Obama’s thumb and forefinger hand gesture, as shown below, is meant to hypnotically anchor and be triggered by the voter’s own hand holding a pencil, at the voting booth, or when signing in to vote. This way, the voter would trigger all of the hypnotic programming right when Obama wants it triggered, while voting, for maximum effect. It is actually a very convenient design to have an anchor that looks like almost like an ordinary speech hand gesture, and also looks like the holding of a pen. Obama rarely needs to twist his hand to show you the backside. The image can be an effective anchor and trigger even if not understood consciously. Obama uses his thumb and forefinger hypnotic anchor in strategic ways. He does this repeatedly and often, programming (anchoring) many messages into your subconscious. The hypnotic anchor that Obama is programming you with continually in his speeches is designed so that when you are in the voting booth holding a pen, or sign in your name, and see the same image Obama has been flashing at you throughout his campaign, you recall all of the messages he delivered during his speeches as he flashed the hand signal that consciously you didn’t even realize were connected. His subconscious messages may influence 312

An Examination of Barack Obama’s your vote because you will be re-enacting what he has been preparing you for by loading that image of you holding the pen with his subconscious commands. Even people who did not intend to vote for Obama may do so at There are four keys to anchoring: The intensity of the state; Timing (peak of experience); Uniqueness of the stimulus, including the number of senses used (visual, auditory, kinesthetic, olfactory, gustatory), and; Exact replication of the stimulus, or trigger..” http://www.hypnos.co.uk/hypnomag/valente.htm that moment. It is also effective because a primary message is Obama himself, and Obama has to a certain degree, anchored himself to the image of your hand as you hold a pen. Obama is also caught loading this hand gesture with very specific concepts, such as JFK, and then pointing this same hand gesture inward towards himself a moment later, in ways that are clearly no accident, and ways in which he does at no other time other than with a concept he expects us to subconsciously associate with him. Obama has also anchored and programmed you verbally with imagery for another part of this same experience in the voting booth through his clever use of the words “turn the page.” His “turn the page speech” hypnotically anchors messages to the idea of literally turning the page, which you do not realize consciously, but subconsciously means, e.g., the voting ballot “page.” Thus, holding the pen and holding the paper ballot are anchored your subconscious for an experiences that will be recreated when it is time to act he has programmed you to act with multiple subconscious anchors triggered by the same experience in the voting booth.98 As far as voting machines where you push buttons, or electronic voting, Obama’s other very common hand 313

Mind Control Secrets gesture is pointing and poking, including for example, pointing straight downward and saying “there is no destiny we cannot fulfill.” Many speakers point occasionally, or on a very strong point, but not continuously and strenuously like Obama points. Most have never wondered what he is actually pointing at, or whether there is any rhyme or reason to it, probably assuming it is simply part of his presentation. In fact, Obama’s hand gestures often do symbolize what he is talking about perfectly, so that when he does do something hypnotic with his hand gestures, the message is received as having meaning subconsciously then also. Obama’s other primary hand gesture tool, pointing, also often has meaning. Pointing sends the subconscious of the subject the message that a person in authority over them is commanding a certain action; ordering you to act a certain way and is a textbook part of hypnotic programming when giving commands of actions the subject is required to take. If Obama said, “I command you to vote for me”, Photo http://weblogs.newsday.com/news/local/longisland/politics/blog/2008/03/obamas_speech_what_did_ it_mean.html Photo http://www.zimbio.com/Race+Relations/articles/2 1 Barak+Obama+speech+race+thoughts+economy In a blog questioning whether Barack Obama is the anti-christ, bloggers’ reports are described as “Some people have reported Obama appearing in dreams and even mysteriously controlling their actions in the voting booth.” http://timmcnellie.blogspot.com/2008/08/enter-antichrist.html which the subconscious mind interprets, because it often deletes negatives, as “we fulfill destiny.” The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor Ledowchowski, p104 of 631

314

An Examination of Barack Obama’s people would get this consciously and reject it. However, if he does it in a way that you only pick it up subconsciously, you can’t question it, and can’t reject it. See the analysis below of Obama’s Denver Democratic National Convention 2008 speech in which he uses this command as he is programming the audience to vote for him on “November 4th.” *Obama’s hypnotic command that “a light will shine down from somewhere, it will light upon you, you will experience an epiphany, and you will say to yourself, ‘I have to vote for Barack’” An example of Obama using both of these hypnotic hand gestures, hypnotic programming followed by hypnotic anchor back to back, in a way that can be nothing other than hypnosis In this speech by Obama, he is caught giving an overt set of two hypnotic programs back to back. This is probably one of the most simple to understand proofs of his undeniable use of hypnosis: Perfectly demonstrating both the hypnotic hand gestures explained above is Obama in this sentence. Yes, that’s correct. Barack Obama actually said in a speech once: “a light will shine down from somewhere, it will light upon you, you will experience an epiphany, and you will say to yourself, “I have to vote for Barack”’102 It was even made fun of in a McCain ad entitled “The One”, probably without any realization that he was serious, and actually attempting to use hypnosis103 In this statement, Obama went too far, too obviously, and was clearly overtly hypnotically programming his audience. Probably, he intended to use statements like this more often, and probably stopped either because he thought it was too obvious, or because he was ridiculed for this by Hillary and McCain, or both. 315

Mind Control Secrets First, notice how voting for Obama is made absolutely compulsory with the words “have to” – precisely as a hypnotic command. He is not asking for our vote – he is telling us how we will vote. Notice the language “light shining down”, and “it will light upon you” a description of some supernatural (subconscious) force. This statement by Obama leaves no doubt that he is using hypnosis – which a mysterious force shining down and causing you to say to yourself obviously is. It leaves no doubt that his mindset is on completely non-logical, but rather mystical/supernatural (subconscious) forces will be compelling people to vote for him. Why would a politician who logically convinces voters ever joke about something like this? What purpose would there possibly be for any politician ever saying that a mysterious force will guide you and you will “have to” vote for me? This is potentially his worst slip up. Video of Obama saying this phrase in this McCain ad http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mopkn0lPzM8 http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mopkn0lPzM8 See the McCain ad entitled, “The One.” Available, e.g. at www.johnmccain.com Hillary Clinton has also criticized this statement. Notice the language, “you will experience an epiphany” – a revelatory manifestation of a divine being.104 While hypnosis text contains considerable information about hypnotists attaining g-d complexes, it is quite disturbing to see a presidential candidate, even in jest, suggest that he presence would cause such an “epiphany.” More disturbing, see below why it is provably not jest in which he makes this statement.

316

An Examination of Barack Obama’s Undeniable evidence that this is hypnosis: Obama hypnotically anchoring the statement about a light shining down and an internal voice saying “I have to vote for Barack” Obama, while saying this sentence uses both his pointing gesture as a hypnotic command implantation, and his thumb and forefinger gesture as a hypnotic anchor, back to back. In fact, watch this video to see how Obama uses these hypnotic hand gestures. Notice how Obama, as he says “you will say to yourself” – points up into the air, as explained and analyzed, pointing is the hypnotic gesture for commanding someone to do something, to perform a specific act. Then, notice how Obama clearly uses his typical thumb and forefinger hypnotic anchor for the words “I have to vote for Barack.” By no cosmic miracle does this happen by coincidence. He is clearly using a back to back set of hypnotic hand gestures while giving this sentence containing overt hypnotic programming to be compelled by a mysterious internal voice, taken over by a mysterious force, and to “have to” vote for him. It is clear he was not joking either. Because if he were joking, he would not use any hand gesture as emphasis for the commands of a statement he was not serous about. Let alone two hand gestures. If he uses a hand gesture even for innocent emphasis, that means he is seriously emphasizing the underlying statement, “a light will shine down from somewhere, it will light upon you, you will experience an epiphany, and you will say to yourself, “I have to vote for Barack”’ While this is a caricature of what Obama is doing throughout his campaign, this statement cannot be viewed 317

Mind Control Secrets any other way than an obvious attempt at sending a hypnotic message to voters in the voting booth. Convincing without logic: “The Fierce! Urgency! of Now!” argument (Obama caught anchoring) While giving speeches, Obama often poses to himself the question: “Why are you running so soon? You can afford to wait.” He then answers his own question by saying the powerful language “because the Fierce! ... Urgency! of ... Now!” First, notice how he posed the question to himself, to give himself an opportunity to use the anchor. It doesn’t make much sense to pose a question to oneself that you then fail to logically answer. He then answers flashing just during those words his unique thumb in forefinger anchoring hand gesture. These words have preprogrammed emotional meaning to all of us, which he with such techniques anchors you to recall as you hold the pen and “turn the page106” in the voting booth.107 American heritage Dictionary – Fourth Edition Example: Billings, Montana, 1:07pm EST See below more detailed discussion of Obama’s preprogrammed hypnotic response use of his famous phrase “turn the page” and Watching such gestures in his speeches, they are clearly intentionally designed to coincide for a specific hypnotic purpose, not just innocent emphasis and enhancement. Notice how powerfully saying “the fierce urgency of now” provides absolutely no logical basis for why he should not accomplish at least something in the senate first, nor any logical argument as to why we should elect an inexperienced person. It is effective because he uses causation, by saying “because the fierce urgency of now!” Again, he uses the most powerful causality linking statement “because” (with no logical value) followed by powerful words “fierce” and “urgency” – both of which are not only powerful but 318

An Examination of Barack Obama’s have embedded meaning to each listener, and then he puts his emphasis on “now!” “Now” is not only a powerful word in hypnosis because it brings the subject’s focus and attention on the present, but, is a command that the voter take action “now.” Those in the marketing field know that adding “now” to the end of any command, such as “buy this product” “now!” increases sales by measured degrees. Obama caught in subconscious hand gesture linking McCain to Bush Giving a speech about healthcare in Raleigh North Carolina, right as Obama mentions Bush and McCain, he slips a barely noticeable double handed gesture with two fingers (the same of each hand) pointing parallel, to suggest to you subconsciously that Bush and McCain are on parallel courses.108 A primary value of this little gesture is critical because it is a slip up, it is obvious. If there is any doubt that Obama is using hypnosis including hidden hand signals, watching this tape clearly shows him flashing a parallel signal which cannot be an accident, right when he mentions Bush and McCain. From the ethical perspective, Obama could make policy arguments and try to convince you logically that he feels McCain will follow similar policies to Bush. However, Obama apparently feels that he needs to do more to convince you. What Obama decides to do, is to implant a subconscious image of parallel, which you subconsciously associate with Bush and McCain, that in many people is the deep psyche source of associating their policies. Whether true or not, Obama through this subconscious programming, decided voters should not even be able logically analyze or debate the issue, but should simply have the image of parallel implanted without their conscious awareness to look at Bush and McCain as parallel. Obama caught using one-finger subconscious hand gesture regarding Hillary 319

Mind Control Secrets 107 Speech by Barack Obama in Billings, Montana, “the fierce urgency of now”, around 1:07pm EST “why are you running so soon, can afford to wait, ruining now “because of the fierce urgency of now” and he flashes the thumb and forefinger together exactly for that sentence in a way that cannot be accidental. 108 Barack Obama in speech, Raleigh North Carolina June 9, 2008 ~1 :40m EST http://weblogs.newsday.com/news/local/longisland/ politics/blog/givefinger.jpg Obama was caught doing this. While pretending to be innocently scratching, he was caught giving this subconscious signal regarding Hillary, with his middle finger.110 This alone might be excused as an accident, but in combination with everything else, is clearly another piece of the puzzle. Like the “light shining down” statement discussed later, like his logo, like the “lipstick on a pig”, and all of his other slip-ups, it also gives you some insight into Obama’s true character. Further proving that this Hillary gesture was not an accident, see Obama’s similar gesture regarding McCain discussed directly below. Obama caught in another undeniable subconscious hand gesture regarding McCain Even after Obama’s Hillary gesture above was caught by the media, he didn’t stop. On Wednesday September 17, 2008 at around 2:56pm EST in a televised speech in Nevada, Obama made some remarks about terrorism, then the economy. Shortly after Obama began to discuss John McCain, with his right hand he apparently reached up to scratch the top of his head, then again scratch the top side of his head. As Obama pulled his hand away, he clearly flashed the “L” symbol with his hand (thumb and finger perpendicular), which to many young people, is the symbol for “loser.” He did it as he was mocking how bad 320

An Examination of Barack Obama’s John McCain was on the economy. This was no accident. It is unusual for someone like Obama with such perfect body language to have to scratch in the middle of a speech anyway. (without doing a hand gesture which insults his opponent) It is even more unusual for someone to have to scratch in two different places as he did. When watching this video, it is clear that he was pretending to scratch as an intentional diversion to slip in the subconscious message. He even appeared to hesitate to be sure to “pull it off” inconspicuously. It was intended to be a subconscious message to millions of people, to associate the “loser” symbol with John McCain. This act was designed to take away votes from John McCain not with any logical explanation of policy differences, but with messages to an unaware audience - messages to our subconscious that we are not intended to question the correctness of. To those who think this may have been accidental or coincidence, watch the video of Obama on 8.4.2008, where Obama gives a speech discussing John McCain’s economics. When Obama says “McCain” in the sentence “Senator McCain has been eager to share some of his plans” – notice Obama again flashes the “L” symbol with his hand. PART 3 – WHAT OBAMA IS EXACTLY DOING – SPECIFIC SPEECHES “PLAY BY PLAY” This Part 3 is the primary analysis of the document. The quotes herein are taken uncut from Obama’s speeches. Readers and experts are encouraged to confirm this analysis by watching these videos firsthand, and seeing that the language patterns, manner of speaking, and timing of hand gestures prove undeniably the points raised in this document. All of these videos are available online and example links are provided in the footnotes. The times, minute: second (3:16 means 3 minutes 16 seconds) are measured 321

Mind Control Secrets per the videos cited. While these are only a few examples, close examination of most or all of Obama’s major speeches under expert scrutiny will likely be found to contain hypnotic tactics throughout. As evidence of Obama’s use of hypnosis, he generally doesn’t do these hypnotic techniques and hand gestures as much when he gives impromptu speeches that are not prewritten. Obama’s hypnosis is something he carefully crafts, plans for, and rehearses. Town halls with impromptu questions do not lend themselves to be a forum for Obama’s hypnosis, and that may part of why he has avoided town halls with John McCain. http://latimesblogs.latimes.com/washington/2008/04/obamaflipsoffcl.html Obama’s California Democratic Convention speech 2007 - a “play by play” of his undeniable use of embedded commands, hypnotic induction, and hypnotic storytelling Embedded suggestions are messages within other messages, in which while the conscious mind is receiving one message (the surface structure), the subconscious is receiving another, the real message. This can be done a number of ways, including by change in tone, or pauses, even ones so subtle the audience is not consciously aware of it, such as a split second pause or breath by the hypnotist at a specific time. Pauses during speech and changes in tonality and in emphasis are a primary technique of conversational hypnosis. This is because you can say one sentence, and buried within it is another word or phrase with another meaning. A pause in speaking by the hypnotist, even is only for a split second, even if you are not even consciously aware of it, can turn that hidden meaning into a subconscious command because it is isolated, and emphasized in the subconscious. The subconscious mind does not interpret 322

An Examination of Barack Obama’s and analyze as the conscious mind does, and often many words are removed “deleted” from what you experience, and only specific portions fall through to the subconscious mind. His statement is heard by the audience in one way, but subconsciously received another way, the way actually intended by Obama. Obama performs an undeniable Ericksonian hypnotic induction: Obama’s “Turn the Page” Speech at the California Democratic Convention in 2007. Note: While there are many examples and play by plays which are undeniable evidence of Obama’s hypnosis. carefully reviewing and understanding just this analysis of this part of this speech leaves little doubt of Obama’s intentional use of hypnosis. One journalist describes Obama’s turn the page speech as having “had the California Democratic Convention spellbound for 23 minutes.” Seeing the analysis below of just the first paragraph of this speech explains why his audience was in a spell from the very beginning. Obama began his speech: (notes added) “It has now been a little over two months (pause) since we began (pause) this campaign for the Presidency. (pause) In that time we have traveled all across this country. (pause) And before every event we do (pause), I usually have a minute to sit quietly and (pause) collect my thoughts. (pause) And recently, I’ve found myself (pause) reflecting on (pause) what it was that led me (different tone, and thumb and forefinger anchor for “me”) to public service in the first place.” Barack Obama’s speech to California Democratic Convention, 2007, available at http://www.youtube.com/ watch?v=UZUXhCW-OGM

323

Mind Control Secrets See a thorough discussion of embedded commands starting page 172 of Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson M.D. See Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, throughout. Barack Obama’s speech to California Democratic Convention, 2007 http://www.youtube.com/ watch?v=UZUXhCW-OGM By Frank D. Russo Barack Obama’s “Turn the Page” Speech Wows California Democratic Convention, http:// www.californiaprogressreport.com/2007/04/barack_ obamas_t_2.html First, notice how much Obama uses storytelling in his major speeches, especially at the beginning of nearly all of his speeches. Storytelling is a primary hypnotic tool because it employs images, metaphor, the imagination, rhythm, makes us feel like children, and takes us to another time and place so the mind tells itself “it is only a story” and allows it to pass into the subconscious. However, this is just the beginning. Obama tells a hypnotic story to start this speech with his ultra-slow speaking style with huge pauses after 4-8 word concepts, to force you to hang on his every word. But this is only a small part of the proof that he is intentionally using hypnosis. The key is, that the story he is telling is a story about a “trance theme.” In one of the most popular conversational hypnosis courses available online, the Power of Conversational Hypnosis, the first principle taught in how to use hypnotic stories, is exactly what Obama does in this paragraph. This primary technique is to “Use Simple Stories About Trance Themes”, or in other words, tell stories about processes which are hypnotic, such as per the examples given, relaxing on a holiday or being fascinated by a film. 324

An Examination of Barack Obama’s Obama follows precisely this technique in telling a simple story in slow hypnotic rhythm about himself “sitting quietly”, “collect his thoughts”, and finding himself “reflecting.” Hypnotic stories use embedded suggestions so that while in trance and you believe something is happening to a character in the story, in reality the story is about you, implanting messages in your subconscious. The story requires you to use your imagination, and then the only way to understand the story is to imagine the themes Obama is presenting. Obama’s first storytelling language pattern about a trance theme is “Sit quietly” – also a pacing statement because everyone in the audience is sitting quietly. The story is, as taught by this course, “isomorphic” in the sense that the story precisely mirrors what is happening with the subject e.g. sitting quietly. Then, it is also an embedded command, because when someone sits quietly, something they have rehearsed many times throughout their lives, because external stimuli are absent, sitting quietly makes someone’s thoughts turn inward or internally – as in trance. Notice how the story is in past tense, but the trance theme (command) comes out in present tense. Notice how Obama puts the focus on this word “quietly” with the pause afterward, to use it as a hypnotic message, as the silence emphasizes the last word spoken. His pause after “sit quietly” also serves another purpose. (Even though he says “and” after “quietly”, there is a substantial pause there.) It is also a pace in the manner that Obama says the word “quietly . ..and”, and for a brief second there is silence afterward. He is in fact making his statement about quietness an absolute immediately verifiable truth, because he makes it true by pausing, and finds a way to pace you in yet another way. The more different ways he can pace the audience on different levels, the more effective it is. 325

Mind Control Secrets Obama’s second storytelling language pattern about a trance theme is “collect my thoughts.” Though The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor Ledochowski, “How to Destroy Resistance With Stories” p244 – discussion of how “it’s just a story” and mind goes on “automatic pilot.” The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor Ledochowski, “How to Destroy Resistance With Stories” p245 The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor Ledochowski, “How to Destroy Resistance With Stories” p245-246, and see discussion how Dr. Erickson used a story about a tomato plant feeling good to in fact make the patient feel good. Your subconscious interprets the story and applies it to you, even though Obama tells the story as if it were him speaking innocently about himself. As a basic hypnosis example, I can say “don’t think of a black cat” – in order to understand the message, you have to think of the cat – it doesn’t matter that I say “don’t.” The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor Ledochowski, “How to Destroy Resistance With Stories” p246 Obama says it from his perspective, to make sense of it, and because of his pacing, your subconscious also hears it as collect “my” thoughts, and thus the minds of everyone in the audience is commanded to become more in depth into each’s own thoughts, and go deeper into trance. Notice again this story about past actions is again delivered in present tense. Obama’s third storytelling language pattern about a trance theme is “I’ve found myself reflecting.” It works similarly. The pause after “myself”, and then again after “reflecting” cause the audience’s subconscious mind to pick up on 326

An Examination of Barack Obama’s these commands. Thus Obama uses this as a command for all listeners to collect their thoughts (as in hypnotic focus) and be reflecting (essentially focus on another deeper level). Notice again how he starts out telling the story in the past tense, but then says “reflecting” in the present progressive tense to be a command for his audience to do what they are doing now. The course on conversational hypnosis is not the only source to say such language has specific trance induction effect. See also Dr. Erickson’s discussion of use of words like “reflecting”, and how a hypnotist will construct sentences using the internal states consistent with a human being undergoing trance induction (e.g. wondering, learning, thinking, feeling, remembering, recalling, experiencing). Obama then directs this focus. Obama says “reflecting on (what it was that led) me” While the sentence continues, the hypnotic message is for the audience to “be reflecting on me” (Obama). Obama’s emphasis and use of a different tonality for the word “me” is undeniable – it can clearly be heard when one is listening for it. When not consciously focused on that emphasis, it is just heard by the subconscious. After being paced by three separate stories with trance themes, delivered in hypnotic slow speech, the subconscious mind is waiting for clues about what to be so focused on and reflecting on, and surely enough, Obama tells our subconscious minds, “me.” Because he is speaking, the message is actually to focus not only on him, but his voice. Then, perfectly timed, at the same moment Obama says the word “me”, he flashes his thumb and forefinger hand gesture, his classic anchoring tool. Watching this tape – it is amazing, yet undeniable. Obama is not just using a subliminal message. He is

327

Mind Control Secrets knowingly and intentionally performing a clinical Ericksonian hypnotic induction and putting his audience trance. Obama has hidden undetectably in normal-sounding speech what a hypnotist would do to start an induction by saying “sit quietly, begin to internalize your thoughts, collect your thoughts, reflect, and focus on the me and the sound of my voice.”123 He is talking to your subconscious mind, preparing it for deeper induction and programming, while you think he is just telling you stories. Then, for the rest of the speech, your subconscious mind will be receptive to messages on this level that you wont even be aware of. Look at how cleverly Obama disguises this induction as him simply telling you a story about himself sitting quietly and reflecting. Logically, there is no reason why Obama would be talking about himself sitting quietly and reflecting. Yet, you would never notice this unless you understood the science behind it. By no Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p137 focus as a key to hypnotic induction. Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p214, Use of these words as part of an ill-formed sentence, as a means of ensuring successful pacing of a client’s experience.(ill-formed here because Obama says “recently found myself” – a play on words the literal meaning of which is ill formed – as one cannot lose or find themselves. Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p17, the most basic pacing and induction example given is “as you sit there, listening to the sound of my voice.” astronomical coincidence could Obama simply happen to be telling an irrelevant story which just happened to innocently contain three separate hypnotic trance 328

An Examination of Barack Obama’s induction themes in precisely this way, with pauses after each, with such an emphasis on the word “me” in conjunction with his unique hand gesture for this word. Let alone a story allegedly about past experiences that somehow ends up with each trance theme being delivered in the present tense. There is no logical reason why he would have pauses after the concepts “sit quietly”, “collect my thoughts”, and “reflecting on” because those aren’t (supposedly) the ends of the idea nor the sentence. Unless, that is exactly what he wants! There is no logical reason why he would place an unnatural emphasis on the word “me” – nor reason to use any hand gesture precisely for this word. What else watching this tape a few times also shows, is that Obama is a pro. He performs this so smoothly and comfortably, that he is clearly well rehearsed, and an expert. Obama caught intentionally controlling pace in obvious attempt to maintain trance As additional evidence that Obama purposely places and keeps his audience in trance, he is here caught controlling the tempo of his speech to make sure everyone is kept in trance. He says at 5:30124 “Why would you want to go into something dirty and nasty like politics?” Then, he realizes he is speaking too fast, and he may not be properly leading everyone in the trance he is inducing, so to ensure he has everyone in trance, he repeats the sentence, slower, much slower, and with an extra extra long pause before “politics.” The second time he says, “Why would you want to go into.. .(huge pause to slow down the audience mentally and slow them down to his unnaturally slow rhythm) .. .politics.” He does this to make sure he does not speak so quickly as to lose the trance he is putting his audience into. This act, obvious on video, clarifies the difference between a person who just happens to be a good speaker who may have some innocent trance effect on some, and someone 329

Mind Control Secrets who knowingly and intentionally makes sure he has everyone in trance as he speaks. Watching this video, it is clear Obama knows exactly what he is doing. While there is too much to analyze every hypnotic aspect of such complex speeches, this speech is a roller coaster ride of raising emotion, slow accelerating to fast, moderate volume leading to loud, and at each peak of the emotional highs he creates, he anchors the emotion he has raised to his “turn the page” language pattern. Occasionally an interesting concept can be caught, for instance this tidbit: At one point when Obama talks about “parting of the sea”, his corresponding hand gesture is not one of the sea parting with his palms turning upward, but of pushing apart downward the water palms down, as if he were himself g-d parting the water. Perhaps accidental, or perhaps an intentional small part of some larger themes and concepts discussed below, connected to the reason why people like Nancy Pelosi make some strange comments, e.g. referring to Obama as “sent by g-d”, and other people refer to Obama as the Messiah. The frightening part is, if Obama is doing this intentionally, he either wants to send the subconscious message that he is the messiah, or he actually believes that he is. More on this later. 5 minutes and 30 seconds into the start of the speech per the video used for analysis. Remarks of Senator Barack Obama: Final Primary Night, Date: 06/03/2008, Location: St. Paul, MN, video available at http://video.google.com/videosearch?q=obama+speech+ St.+Paul+&ie=UTF-8&oe=UTF-8&rls=org.mozilla:en-US:official&client=firefox-a&um=1&sa=N&tab=wv&oi=property_suggestions&resnum=0&ct=property-revision&cd=2# Obama’s speech Tuesday after primaries ended June 3, 2008125 – undeniable evidence of Obama’s use of hypnotic principles of anchoring, deletion, distraction, and leading 330

An Examination of Barack Obama’s Obama, also began his speech on the Tuesday night after Primaries were over with an undeniable hypnotic induction, using the paragraph below. First he said, in his ultra-slow speech with huge strategic pauses, “after fifty four (pause) hard fought contests (pause) our primary season has finally come to an end.” – A pace for which he got tremendous applause. Then, Obama continued: “Sixteen months have passed (pause) since we first stood together on the steps of the Old State Capitol (pause) in Springfield, Illinois.(pause) Thousands (pause) of miles have been traveled. (paused) Millions of voices have been heard. (pause) And because of what you said (pause) because you decided that change must come to Washington (pause); because you believed (pause) that this year must be different than all the rest (pause); because you chose (pause) to listen not to your doubts or your fears (pause) but to your greatest hopes and highest aspirations (pause), tonight we mark the end of(pause) one historic journey (pause) with the beginning of another (pause) – a journey (pause) that will bring a new and better day to America. (pause) Because of you (pause) tonight, I can stand here and say that I will be (pause) the Democratic nominee (pause) for President of the United States of America.” The analysis below explains what Obama is really doing, and what message your subconscious mind is actually receiving and why. First, again the unnaturally slow speech as discussed, which forces you to hang on his every word, creating focus. Notice how his pauses are designed to have you reflect and ponder, and have your mind wander during each pause. As your mind wanders, his words echo in the subconscious mind while your conscious mind is left hanging. This technique is designed to strain your critical factor’s efforts until 331

Mind Control Secrets it gets tired, and begins to tune out, leaving your subconscious mind in his hands, unprotected. While he starts out ultra-slow, his plan is to guide you by slowly accelerating his speech to the point where he increases volume, raises emotion, and delivers the lead. This is almost like how a horseracing announcer starts out speaking slow when the horses take off from the staring gate, and by the final stretch he is yelling and speaking very rapidly. Just like how a horserace announces builds excitement in his audience to promote the emotion-charged intensity and betting. It is not accidental. It is done and learned and rehearsed to manipulate us. He brings the listeners into trance with this process. Subconsciously, the raising of rate of speech, volume, and emotion send the message that all of the before is building up to his grand finale of the paragraph, the lead, e.g. that he will be President. However, while a horseracing announcer does it once per race, Obama in his speeches repeats this roller coaster again and again while combining it with complex hypnotic pacing and leading, anchoring, and other manipulative subconscious techniques. The repetitiveness is also hypnotic.126 This is all part of the hypnotic trance induction. Again, like all of Obama’s major speeches, he starts off from the beginning using hypnotic storytelling. Storytelling e.g., of standing on the old steps together, traveling thousands of miles, having heard millions voices. It is not only magically captivating, but as discussed, is a textbook hypnosis induction. It makes your conscious mind imagine things and drift off to another time and place using imagination – an altered state of consciousness and fundamental tool of hypnosis. Listening to this, you have no option but to strain your conscious mind trying to figure out what comes next, while using your imagination to follow along through his

332

An Examination of Barack Obama’s images and stories. This helps bring the usually protected subconscious mind to the forefront, making it vulnerable. He not only forces you to focus, and asks you to use imagination, but he has you count numbers, e.g., “sixteen months”, “thousands of miles”, “millions of voices heard.” Firstly, “one of the techniques employed by hypnotists in inducing or deepening a trance state in a client is that of having the client count.” Now here is where it gets really interesting. Obama uses the following key hypnosis technique, now his fourth separate and distinct fundamental hypnosis technique in just his first paragraph. He applies a dominant hemisphere distraction technique precisely as taught by Erickson’s three dimensions of hypnosis. Distraction is a common and fundamental technique in hypnosis in which the dominant hemisphere is distracted by the language its job is to process. The dominant hemisphere is sent on an assignment using the linguistic processes and imagination. The critical factor is thus occupied, to make the non-dominant hemisphere and subconscious more susceptible to suggestion Here is how it works. He asks you to imagine sixteen months, so you do. You follow where the storyteller takes your mind and so you try to imagine thousands of miles, and continue following along where he leads you. However, the conscious mind cannot imagine a million voices, the number is too big, though Obama tricks you with the first two numbers into trying, by leading you down a path of increasingly difficult concepts to imagine consciously. Notice how cleverly he leads you down a path which causes the dominant hemisphere to be distracted, and tune out of trying to do exactly what he is asking you to do. Your mind tries to imagine a million and is distracted, sent off on an assignment it can’t perform, tuning out, and exposing your subconscious mind. This is a calculated and 333

Mind Control Secrets pre-scripted hypnotic induction technique, and the only specific and logical explanation that makes any sense for what he is saying. Does this seem a bit too unlikely to be coincidence? What other purpose for this could there be for this language to be delivered exactly this way? What is he even talking about? There are four chapters on Hypnotic Storytelling in Conversational Hypnosis, The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor Ledochowski, “How to Destroy Resistance With Stories” as well as a cheat sheet on using hypnotic storytelling to break resistance. Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p60, Inquiry with Aldous Huxley Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p187 Erickson’s three dimensions are: Pacing and distraction of the dominant (language) hemisphere; 2. Utilization of the dominant hemisphere, language processing which occurs below the level of awareness; 3. Accessing of the non-dominant hemisphere; Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p13 – “[Erickson’s] overall strategy while conducting trance inductions appears to have these three dimensions. 1) pacing and distraction of the dominant (language) hemisphere; 2) Utilization of the dominant hemisphere, language processing which occurs below the level of awareness; and 3) Accessing of the non-dominant hemisphere.” See also, p137, “The induction of the altered state of consciousness called trance requires and implies the distraction and/or utilization of what Milton calls the conscious mind.” One cannot imagine all the grains of sand on a beach individually. you can imagine a lot of them, or the beach,

334

An Examination of Barack Obama’s but the conscious mind cannot process numbers of that size. Then, right after the distraction, notice the causality linking statements, FIVE of them, back to back, “because of what you said... because you decided change must come to Washington... because you believed that this year must be different... because you chose to listen to your doubts not your fears... because of you” - all pacing and leading techniques with the causation already embedded, with the paragraph ending with the words “President of the United States” as the effect brought about by all those “becauses,” thereby becoming subconsciously linked. The most powerful linking statement “because” according to Dr. Erickson and every covert hypnotist cited in this document, is used not once, but five times, connecting Obama’s concepts to the lead, not that he is the democratic nominee, but “President of the United States,” the only words of that sentence he can be seen using pointing down hand gestures for. This is something nobody would never notice without an understanding of pacing, leading, and causality linking statements, but now that it is pointed out it certainly seems more than odd that he is using the word “because” so obtrusively. Why would anyone set up sentence structure for any concept this way? (Because A, because B, because C, because D, because E,. ..therefore X) Concepts are never set up to be communicated this way. It is too difficult to follow and impractical, and there is no purpose for it. Not unless one had a very specific purpose for using the word “because.” Now let’s look at his use of hypnotic programming words: “decided”, “believed”, and “chose.” (other hypnotic programming words include “realize”, “know”, “understand”, and so on.) These are hypnotic programming words because instead of convincing you rationally until you actually decide, or believe, or choose, the hypnotist simply puts 335

Mind Control Secrets you in trance, distracts your dominant hemisphere, and implants the command into your subconscious. He hypnotizes you and simply tells you that you chose, that you believe, that you decided. Implantation of this word is more powerful than hours and hours of convincing you rationally. It is neither simply presumptuous nor coincidence that he is telling you what you decided, believed, and chose. So these words stand out in your mind, he places the most minute emphasis on “decided”, then a much larger emphasis on and pause after “believed”, and then a huge emphasis on and pause after “chose.” Some of these concepts are in the past tense, and that is also effective, sometimes even more so, because telling us prior our mind states may make them even deeper. Obama uses “because” before each of these programming words because you must accept the premise in order to be able to follow the concept to the end and understand it. That’s why starting with five separate “because”s leading to one later “therefore” does not other than hypnotically make good communication structure. Because normally it tries to get you to accept precursor concepts before you even know what they are connected to - before you even know what the alleged actual concept being communicated is. Now let’s look at the pacing used in this same paragraph. “Tonight Minnesota” is a pace, because it is tonight, and he is in Minnesota. “Primary season has finally come to an end” is a pace because it is obviously true. Standing together and voices heard may help pace the audience because that is what they are doing literally, standing there and hearing the voices of the crowd. “You decided change must come to Washington” is a pace, because it is something we all know is needed – almost nobody can disagree with that. However, when you accept that, the hidden meaning to accept is 336

An Examination of Barack Obama’s that Obama should be President. “This year must be different than all the rest” is a pace, because literally every year is different. When you accept that, you also accept his hidden meaning, that this year will be different because Obama will become President. “I can stand here and say” is again a literal pace because he is standing there and saying something. Also notice how, because of the five “because”s, he not only connects these concepts to the lead, but connects these concepts to each other. Starting with a literal pace, he connects standing there hearing voices, to wanting change to come, to this year being different, which he connects subconsciously to your greatest hopes and highest aspirations, to back again to another literal pace, the fact that he is standing there saying something. He doesn’t even need to know what your greatest hopes and highest aspirations are, and he doesn’t even need to care. He has linked your greatest hopes and highest aspirations, no matter what they are, as sure as he is standing there speaking, to him being the President of the United States. That’s how hypnosis works. it doesn’t get you to believe, it tricks your subconscious mind into accepting the word “believe.” Now let’s look at his perfectly timed hand gestures for the same paragraph. His hand gestures with his right hand give essentially the same thumb and forefinger hand gesture starting precisely at the words “believe (that this year should be different than all the rest)”, and “chose.” He does not, however, do this hand gesture, if it is truly for innocent emphasis, for what you normally think he would, the alleged message, e.g. “change must come to Washington”, not for “greatest hopes and highest aspirations”, nor for “a new and better day for America”, nor does he do that gesture for “I will be the democratic nominee.” While he 337

Mind Control Secrets uses this hand gesture at some other parts, from the beginning, he doesn’t use them at all until, and then primarily for “believe”, and “chose.” Then, as he says “democratic nominee” his hands appear motionless form this video, and he emphasizes and points downward for the word “President.” Now we look at “deep structure” – how the audiences’ subconscious minds might interpret the same paragraph as delivered by Obama. Under the fundamental hypnotic principles of “deletion”, “distortion”, and “generalization”, the mind alters the content it receives as it goes into the subconscious. – A translation which is used and planned for by hypnotists. While your critical factor is distracted and captivated deeply by Obama’s trance, the same paragraph, to your subconscious, may be received something like this: [this is one possible translation with partial analysis added] “we stand together ... my voice is being heard. ..because you said. ..because you decided that change must come. ..because you believed [anchor] this year must be different than all the rest. ..because you chose [anchor] to listen [trance theme in storytelling] your greatest hopes and highest aspirations. ..we bring a new and better day.. .Tonight I can stand here and say [pacing] I will be the Democratic nominee [no visible hand gestures on the video] ‘the President of the United States’” [Pointing hand gestures downward (as if on a touch screen or push button voting) command gesture] Also notice yet another distraction technique – rhyme. He rhymes I will be with the democratic nominee – a distraction technique which again distracts the linguistic processing part of the mind, as he points downward and says “President!” An apparently innocent yet powerful paragraph on the surface structure, is actually intended to be received as clear commands to feel as one with Obama and hear his 338

An Examination of Barack Obama’s voice. He programs into you that you have already chosen, you have already decided, and you already believed. Before your conscious mind can say “wait, did I decide that?” he rewards you by conjuring up your own feelings “greatest hopes and highest aspirations.” Then, the “because”s come together for the lead, with hand gestures, “President.” By reviewing Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, as well as other works on Ericksonian hypnosis, one may see a more detailed discussion of “deletion”, “generalization”, and “distortion.” Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p165, discusses how a single surface structure communication can have not only different, but multiple “deep structure” representations to the subconscious mind. A subconscious deletes parts of communication that it does not understand or are incomplete. For example, “It seemed like an impossible task” – since it is unclear to whom it seemed impossible, there is no way for the subconscious to comprehend the meaning of it, so all that the subconscious takes away from this sentence is “task.” Now one might argue that half of this is coincidence, and the other half is just him being a great and powerful speaker. But let’s look at it. Why would he speak so slowly? We know he speaks faster in interviews and debates – why speak so slowly in speeches? What about the acceleration of his rate of speech to the lead? Why such storytelling? Why the exorbitant use of visualization and imagination? ...Which lead the audience down a path of imagining things until asking the imagining of something that can’t be consciously imagined? Why the five “because”s and why the unusual message structure from someone who speaks so well? Why the hyper- confidence for specific words like “decided”, “chose”, and “believe” with pauses after each one when they 339

Mind Control Secrets are not supposed to be the end of neither the sentence nor the idea? Why the hyper-arrogance for “greatest hopes and highest aspirations?” Why the repeated stating of the obvious and undeniable “I stand here tonight?” (used in all his speeches) Why no hand gesture for “democratic nominee”why only for “President? And finally, how come all of these “coincidences” can all be explained by a single reason – all under the principles of hypnosis?.. .Which causes exactly the type of mesmerized effect everyone admits they have from him? Obama caught delivering another powerful hypnotic command Not every hypnotic technique of Obama in this speech is discussed herein – only a few examples are listed. Notice his anchor at 9:17 of the word (independents and republicans who) “understand.” Notice his extraordinarily long pauses after “change” 9:20 and 9:28. At 9:55, Obama slips in a powerful hypnotic command. A moment after he can clearly be seen anchoring it with a hand gesture. At 9:55, Obama says, “All of you chose (notice the different tone and volume and microsecond pause after chose) to support a candidate you believe in deeply. (pause) ” No, it is not simply presumptuous or arrogant to tell his audience that they “believe in him” “deeply.” Again, it is hypnotic programming. First, he uses “chose” to program our subconscious minds that our conscious minds have already analyzed and made a decision. Again, the same hypnotic programming word he used in his opening paragraph discussed in the above example. If effective, this programming can even override our conscious knowledge that we haven’t in fact 340

An Examination of Barack Obama’s chosen. We will simply believe that we have chosen, and simply choose Obama. As he speaks the word “chose”, while your critical factor is analyzing whether in fact you chose any such thing Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, Starting p 7, discussion of how models of the world we create differ from reality, then, on p 20, “One of the most powerful of these linguistic modeling techniques is deletion, the case in which a portion of the meaning of the sentence (the Deep Structure) has no representation in Surface Structure...” Under complex deletion principles, the audiences minds filter out certain aspects of the speech, and such speeches are designed by hypnotists to have certain parts deleted, to communicate to implant the real message into the subconscious, hidden in the speech, the content of the speech is largely to distract the conscious mind, to make the remainder, the commands, be implanted into the subconscious more effectively. See a thorough discussion of deletion from p 159. (See also discussion of generalization and distortion of language in deep structure) and what you might have chosen and is distracted136, Obama uses the other hypnotic programming word “believe” (also discussed above), and he ends the sentence with “a candidate you believe in deeply.” He is not asking us to believe in him by any means. He is implanting the hypnotic command into a hypnotized audience that they already “chose.” Then, he is compiling the command by programming the audience with the utmost “hyper” confidence that they “believe in (him) deeply.” The reason he sounds so confident is because he is inputting a hypnotic command. Notice the pause after to allow “deeply” to sink in. Let’s look at this phrase again: 341

Mind Control Secrets “All of you chose to support a candidate you believe in deeply.” When thinking about this language carefully, it becomes clear how unusual it is. A candidate may say “thank you for believing in me”, or “please believe in me”, or might say in any number of ways that his supporters believe in him. But to simply say as if it were fact “you believe in me” is unprecedented. If he didn’t use hypnosis, people would stop and say “no we don’t”, or “who are you to tell us what we believe.” However, people are so entranced, it slipped past everyone. And how odd is it that a candidate would say “all of you chose” and then refer to himself as a candidate “you believe in deeply.” This is beyond presumptuous, and beyond any confident political speak. He is not saying he will be President. He is telling us what we “believe.” He is telling us what we believe as though it is fact. He is telling us something he could never know, as though it is fact. This is a fundamental of hypnotic programming, that he does not convince the rational mind with logical basis, he simply puts the subject into trance, and literally tells them what they believe. And, he says we “believe” this “deeply.” People don’t speak like that accidentally about others’ feelings. This is all unacceptable as either arrogance, political confidence, or coincidence. Especially the word “deeply” a word that does not even require explanation to sound like hypnotic programming. This is a slip up that he got away with. It is hypnosis commands intentionally being laid by Obama in the subconscious minds of the audience. Notice again the hypnotic programming words “chose”, “believe”, the same ones that were analyzed earlier at the beginning of this same speech, again, back to back, this time, in the same sentence. He was clearly in the same train of thought as he was while drafting the earlier part of this speech. 342

An Examination of Barack Obama’s Then Obama anchors to himself this concept of believing in this candidate deeply. Then, a moment right after he says “deeply” (it needn’t be simultaneous138), in his next sentence he does his thumb and forefinger hypnotic anchor, and points to his torso with his fingers in that position, subconsciously associating in the audience those deep feelings and emotions with himself. That next sentence is about “we aren’t the reason you came out.” For this, he would have no logical reason to point to himself at the word “reason” – Also notice how he doesn’t say “you believe in me.” He leaves it to the subconscious mind to put that together to make it as subconscious as possible. Before this phrase, Obama says “there are young people, and African Americans, and Hispanic Americans, and women of all ages who have voted in numbers and who have inspired a nation.” But he is not referring to these people when he says “All of you chose a candidate you believe in deeply, though me may be trying to reserve that as an excuse. The reason is, he doesn’t say “all of them chose”, he says “all of you chose.” He is talking about these people in the third person, and he is saying this hypnotic phrase in the second person. As an attorney, he knows this is incorrect, and that he is applying this phrase to his entire audience, not just the people he listed prior. The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor Ledochowski, on the discussion of pacing with body language as an example, of how subconscious gestures need not be simultaneous to be effective, and delay of a couple of seconds is effective, and sometimes necessary, including so as to not be obvious. especially when all of his other hand gestures are timed well to correspond to his words. There is no other

343

Mind Control Secrets explainable reason for his thumb and forefinger to be in that position, and then turn it inward to point to his torso. As discussed below, in Obama’s 2008 Denver Democratic Convention Speech, he uses this exact same technique of his thumb and forefinger, talking about John F. Kennedy, then pointing that hand gesture inward toward his torso a moment later, to create a subconscious association between himself and JFK. Odd once to be sure, but caught twice, or more, with the same hand gesture, it is no coincidence. Obama caught pacing and leading again In another classic Obama pace and lead, notice how he gets the crowd all roused up around 20:40, with his peak speech, peaking in intensity, emotion, volume, and rate so much so he doesn’t have even a high or low at the beginning or end of his points. He discusses how teachers should be paid more, everyone should have healthcare, and then he says “that’s the change we need ...that’s why I’m running for President (pause) of the United States.” Again, this is his classic pace and lead. It makes no sense that because we need those miraculous changes he described, that is the reason why the President should be none other than him. Logically he has not said why he should be the one, what he would do, or anything of the sort. However, because his leading is so powerful, it is something the cheering audience believes in strongly, he adds the element of causation, “that’s why” and then his two part lead, 1. President, and 2. (reinforcing it again) of the United States. Because this lead is embedded in our subconscious, we simply create the logic to justify how we feel – the missing component – that supposition that Obama is the person who can and will create this type of change and make all these miracles happen. Obama’s 2007 California Democratic Convention “turn the page” speech – further analysis

344

An Examination of Barack Obama’s “Turn the page” is not just colorful visual metaphor that Obama happens to like to say. In Obama’s 2007 “turn the page” speech he uses the phrase “turn the page” fourteen (14) separate times. 140 141 He uses it as a hypnotic anchor, and as a preprogrammed response, to stir emotion, and as a hypnotic metaphor. Obama using “turn the page” as a preprogrammed response: A preprogrammed response is anything to which your body has already been conditioned to react to with a certain response. For instance, you have been already preprogrammed to know that change is a 100% It appears Obama does this a third time in his speech on race in Philadelphia, when he says Telling story about a poor kid, he says, “Now, Ashley might have made a different choice”, then he hand gestures like writing with a pen, clarifying the meaning of his thumb and forefinger trademark, similarly as he does in his 2008 Denver speech, discussed in that analysis. Then, while talking, a moment later, he gestures to himself with the thumb and forefinger his anchor - making the subconscious message that he is that “different choice.” Barack Obama’s speech to California Democratic Convention, 2007 http://www.youtube.com/ watch?v=UZUXhCW-OGM Transcript, Obama’s Turn the Page speech, April 29, 2007, available, e.g. http://www.californiaprogressreport. com/2007/04/barack_obamas_t_2.html certainty, and when you are reading and holding the page in your hand “turning the page” is a 100% certainty. When a person reading gets to the end of the page, the decision to turn the page is automatic, subconscious. It also happens at a time when we are reading, and in trance. This is something each of us is programmed with because 345

Mind Control Secrets we have each rehearsed this thousands of times by turning pages in books, students and more intellectual people even more so. It is an automatic reaction. What Obama tries to do is apply that level of certainty and automaticnesss to your decision to support him as President. Obama using “turn the page” as a hypnotic anchor: “Turn the page” is also used by Obama as a hypnotic anchor, to cause you to recall his planted hypnotic suggestions when you are in the voting booth, with the pen in your hand like his thumb and forefinger, the other primary anchor. It is a hypnotic anchor that is used very cleverly by Obama by taking advantage of a preprogrammed response in the subject. Turn the page is not just a vague and colorful way to say that Obama will improve America. It is designed to be triggered when we are holding the pen and “turning the page” in the voting booth. The vagueness of such language used in hypnosis, and the multiple meanings, as discussed aove, are part of precisely what makes it work. See the discussion on secondary meanings, embedded commands, surface versus deep structure, and trans-derivation. Obama’s Democratic Convention speech 2008142 – A “play by play” of his undeniable and extensive anchoring, pacing, leading, and delivery of subconscious commands This first example isn’t a documented hypnosis technique, just a bit of classic deception that is part of Obama’s show. When Bill Clinton gave his speech earlier in the Convention, he could barely get started for minutes because the applause and cheering was so loud he genuinely could not speak, and it refused to die down. Obama didn’t have that problem, so he faked it. He didn’t have such applause and cheering, but he faked it by pretending it was so loud he couldn’t speak, and pretending it was interrupting him, saying “thank you”, pausing and 346

An Examination of Barack Obama’s allowing the low level of applause to continue, and then saying “thank you” again, and repeating, as if he was trying (though not really) to quiet down the unquietable crowd. Comparing his opening to Bill Clinton’s, it is clear that Bill Clinton genuinely could not speak, and Obama could easily speak over the much quieter cheering and applause had he wanted to. Before I discuss Obama’s use of hypnosis in his speech, I really have to point out one other amusing point. Obama said “I am grateful to finish this journey with one of the finest statesmen of our time.” (referring to Joe Biden) What journey is he finishing that is almost over? Wouldn’t he be President for four years? Americans certainly hope the end of the election season is not the end. This is a slip. He looks at the election as the journey because his entire mission is simply to make it into the Presidency before we realize what he is doing, or who he really is. Obama’s typical pacing, leading, storytelling, and hidden meanings induction: Above in this document under the heading “What is “pacing and leading”, and how does Obama use this hypnosis technique?” – are listed Obama’s use of three pacing statements fourteen times in this speech which are not repeated in this section. Obama’s Democratic National Convention Nominee Acceptance Speech, August 28, 2008, available at http://www.huffingtonpost.com/2008/08/28/barackobama-democratic-c_n_122224.html Again, like all of Obama’s other major speeches analyzed in this document, he starts off with hypnotic storytelling. This is not because he figures we would all want to hear a story. His calculation is how to get the quickest and deepest trace induction without anyone knowing what he is doing. 347

Mind Control Secrets Obama says: “Four years ago, I stood before you and told you my story, of the brief union between a young man from Kenya and a young woman from Kansas who weren’t well-off or well-known, but shared a belief that in America their son could achieve whatever he put his mind to. It is that promise that’s always set this country apart, that through hard work and sacrifice each of us can pursue our individual dreams, but still come together as one American family, to ensure that the next generation can pursue their dreams, as well. That’s why I stand here tonight.” Again, Obama uses hypnotic storytelling in his unnaturally slow pace. The story starts past tense, to have you imagine another time and place. The story is also a pacing statement, “I stood before you and told you my story” which is a present account of exactly what he is doing now, an accurate current representation of the subject’s ongoing verifiable experience because he is standing before us now telling a story. This is a very powerful trance induction technique, because Obama tells a story, forcing you to apply and use imagination, an altered state of mind and different perspective, to look at the present situation. He is making you apply an altered and subconscious state of mind to your present experience of watching his speech. The well-off or well-known statement is again, a play on words for dominant hemisphere linguistic distraction in order to access the non-dominant hemisphere per Erickson’s three dimensions of hypnosis. He is already pacing, and the play on words is precisely the type of “utilization of the dominant hemisphere, language processing which occurs below the level of awareness.” Your dominant hemisphere below the level of awareness analyzes this play on

348

An Examination of Barack Obama’s words, and becomes distracted, leaving it open for implantation of hypnotic suggestion. Then, sure enough, notice how he flashes his thumb and forefinger gesture again starting with when he says the word (shared a) “belief.” The “belief “ that he is anchoring here is: that in America their son, (Obama) could achieve anything he set his mind to. It is difficult to follow consciously, but that is the belief they shared. What in fact their son has set his mind to, is to become President. Consciously, it is difficult to follow that when Obama says “belief”, and anchors it with his hand gesture, Obama is really anchoring himself achieving the Presidency. He is anchoring and implanting the command of his becoming President without expressly saying it, so it remains subconscious. Notice his words, “promise”, “hard work”, “sacrifice”, “each of us can pursue our individual dreams” and then ends the paragraph with “That is why I stand here tonight.” Promise, hard work, sacrifice, each of us Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p 218 - Utilization of plays on words in hypnotic induction works because, in addition to employment of conscious linguistic processing mechanisms, it “activates additional meaning recovery processes which develop meanings which are available to the to the unconscious portion of the client’s mind but not the conscious.” – What Erickson’s book means by this is that the “play on words” isn’t caught consciously, but trips up and confuses your subconscious linguistic processing mechanisms, thereby facilitating the distraction necessary for hypnotic induction. See also the discussion on trans-derivational searches brought about by phonological ambiguity incl. p166, knows/nose, here/hear etc.

349

Mind Control Secrets pursue our dreams are beautiful concepts nobody can disagree with, and they are pacing statements. In no logical way however does Obama connect these beautiful concepts to why he would make a great President. Instead, he simply uses causation, the strongest Ericksonian linkage statement, and says “That is why I stand here tonight.” This statement is a brilliant use of Ericksonian hypnosis techniques, including pacing and leading, because this statement is both a pace and a lead in one. Obama has actually set it up in the run up to this paragraph, so “that is why I stand here tonight” – is both a pace, as it is immediately and verifiably true that he is in fact standing there tonight. Also, he has set it up in the whole preceding paragraph, that what this obviously true statement means, is that he will become President, by starting with and connecting his parents dream, and stating all the beautiful concepts, and then saying “that is why....” he stands there tonight – obviously meaning he is there because he wants the Presidency. This is the really clever part. When he says “that is why I stand here tonight”, your subconscious mind accepts that as absolutely true. But the question is, which interpretation? 1. That he is literally standing there tonight? or 2. That he is standing there so his parents’ dream will be realized? or 3. That he is standing there is because that promise, hard work, sacrifice, and our children’s dreams is the reason why he is there? The mind is distracted with this trans-derivational problem that occurs below the level of awareness. Meanwhile, the subconscious mind accepts all three interpretations as absolute truth. Remember, the subconscious mind cannot make rational distinctions. Once the subconscious mind labels this statement (that is why I stand here tonight) as absolutely true, it accepts it, including all of its meanings, including hidden meanings. You look at him standing there tonight and confirm below your level 350

An Examination of Barack Obama’s of awareness that that statement is true on one level, and that acts as a confirmation of the other meanings in the paragraph, that his parents dream will be realized, and that promise, hard work, sacrifice, and our children’s dreams is the reason why he is there. And remember, this all awhile you are entranced by his unnaturally slow, poetic, melodic, hypnotic storytelling, imagination provoking, emotion provoking, and passion provoking content. He doesn’t send this message to you consciously, but intentionally and powerfully implants and programs you with it subconsciously. The statement that is verifiably true is the very same statement that means he will achieve the Presidency and associates him with all those beautiful concepts. This is no coincidence. This is classic embedded suggestion programming containing every element in hypnosis trance induction through all of the required elements, from pacing and leading, to pacing, distraction, and utilization of the non-dominant hemisphere. It is beautifully crafted and advanced Ericksonian hypnosis. He uses the same phrase “that is why I stand here tonight” again at least two more times later on in the speech. Millions of people feel like voting for Obama and cant point to an accomplishment or change he has brought. This hypnotic gamesmanship is the cause for many. Obama caught stacking language patterns Obama’s speech contains similar hypnosis techniques throughout, including this very same technique immediately following the previous command. This repetition of hypnotic language patterns one after the other is typical stacking language patterns, and is very effective at subconscious programming without conscious awareness. Obama follows the above with: “Because.. .Every time our nation has been in jeopardy, ordinary men and women” (points to his audience) .. 351

Mind Control Secrets .students, teachers, nurses, janitors.. .had the “Courage” (points to his audience) “to keep it alive.” “We meet at one of those defining moments now.” He paces everyone in the audience by talking about “ordinary men and women, teachers, students, ....” for identification. Then, notice how he points to the audience when he says “defining moments”, as if voting for him will define us e.g., as open minded, as courageous. While difficult to follow consciously, he just said, essentially, that because you (points) have had courage (points) at every dark time, and this is one of those times, that is why he is standing before us. The pace and lead is again a single statement, “we meet at one of those defining moments.” Again, same technique as in the previous sentence. You can immediately verify that we indeed are meeting, at this moment, and thus you subconsciously accept this statement as a true pace. When this statement is accepted as true, you again also accept as true all the other programming and meaning that Obama sends along with it into your subconscious. What logical sense does that make though? What does him standing there have to do with people’s courage throughout history? Because he is standing there people can pursue their dreams? At 15:50, Obama uses this same technique again. After discussing economic issues, building emotion by mentioning a waitress who can take off from work to take care of a sick kid without being fired, and having an economy that honors the dignity of work, Obama says: “The fundamentals we use to measure economic strength are whether we are living up to that fundamental promise that has made this country great - a promise that is the only reason I am standing here tonight.” He starts out saying things nobody can disagree with, and building emotion. Again, he uses causality to link 352

An Examination of Barack Obama’s beautiful and emotional concepts he conjures up to himself with causation language that logically is completely without any logical support. Why use this language of causation without any basis for it, when there is no need for causation language “the only reason.” More importantly, yet again, Obama links these beautiful concepts with causation to a statement that is both verifiably true in the literal sense in order to implant the meaning he has built into it. He talks about “the fundamental promise that has made this country great”, and says “a promise that is the only reason I am standing here tonight.” He uses language about the promises that make this country great and builds that meaning into “that is why I am standing here tonight.” He doesn’t say “that is why I am running for President.” “I am standing here tonight” is something more easily and immediately verifiable and serves as a more literal and effective pacing statement. When your mind accepts the statement “that’s why I am standing here tonight” as absolutely true, it allows it to pass into the subconscious. However, this statement has two meanings, 1. that he is in fact literally standing there, and 2. the meaning he built into himself standing there, he is there to make sure that we are living up to the fundamental promise that has made this country great. When your mind accepts “that’s why I am standing here tonight” as absolutely true, all meanings attached to it are absorbed into the subconscious as true, because your subconscious mind cannot differentiate and rationalize which meaning he intended. What he is doing is no coincidence and no accident. He is repeatedly setting up language patterns that support subconscious beliefs of why he should be President to intersect and be embedded within statements immediately verifiable by the subconscious as absolutely true, such as “that is why I stand here tonight”, or “we meet at one of those defining 353

Mind Control Secrets moments.” Then, the audience sees him standing there as he says it, processes this below the level of conscious awareness, and unknowingly accepts subconscious programming as absolute truth consisting of all of the underlying meanings he has set up to correspond with the obvious surface statement. Nobody just happens to speak like that. Not once, let alone again and again, one after the other. *Obama caught clarifying his hand gesture as unmistakable hypnotic anchor of writing with pen (twice): You have to watch these videos. As he says “the only reason I am standing here tonight, he waves his palm towards his chest, taking that emotion and saying “me”, then he points upward signaling “command”, and then he does this: Right after that, at 16:22, right after he says, “the only reason I am standing here tonight” analyzed above, notice his hand gesture when he says “the faces of those young veterans.” Notice how he appears to be writing with a pen, to complete the three-part hidden hand gesture, “me” “command” and “write”(or probably “vote”). At 16:22 – his gesture of writing with a pen is unmistakable. Similarly, at 6:5 1, Obama also clarifies his hand gesture. He says, “more of you have lost your homes, and even more” and at that moment, he does a very strange thing with his thumb in forefinger technique, clearly making a gesture as if he is using his hand as a pen writing. It is unmistakable. We don’t consciously recognize it, but he anchors us for when we are holding the pen in the voting booth, thereby clarifying for us subconsciously the meaning of his consistent thumb and forefinger anchor. (being our hand, our pen) Watching this video of these two of Obama’s hand gestures, no reasonable person would believe Obama accidentally made these gestures. You can watch these scenes 354

An Examination of Barack Obama’s in these videos all day long and you cannot come up with another reasonable explanation for what he is doing than hypnotic programming. A few tidbits:: Obama says “come together” – notice his hands towards his mid section, to signal come together to him. He points to us as he says “(these) challenges,” suggesting that we are being challenged, or that we have a challenge to fulfill i.e. to follow his commands. Look at how he blends commands to stay in trance into his speech. He says at 17:08 “When I listen to another worker tell me his factory is shut down.” – listen to how he enunciates “listen”, to keep people subconsciously listening to his voice. When he says we are “better than this. ..more descent” notice how he uses his hand palm towards himself, to send us the signal subconsciously that he is ‘better” and “descent.” He does the thumb and finger anchor again as he tells the story about the man who “chokes up” – anchoring the symbol with our emotion. This is just before the primary command explained below. He also does an unmistakable hand gesture for the word “keep” just before the primary command explained below. He says “we are more compassionate” and again puts his palm towards his chest, to send the message that he is compassionate. The reason this is deceptive and manipulative, is that Obama is not telling us that Obama is compassionate, nor is he providing any logical basis for us to believe that he is compassionate. He pretends he is talking about someone else. He is tricking our subconscious minds to believe that he is compassionate without even telling our conscious minds that he is communicating that message. Consciously, we can’t even 355

Mind Control Secrets analyze it or make a rational judgment about it because we are not even aware of having received the message. Obama caught giving the primary hypnotic command of the speech: After having raised in us a number of emotions, and having paced considerably, and prepared us for a hypnotic suggestion, Obama delivers the following paragraph, his primary hypnotic command of the speech: Tonight, (pace - it is tonight) I say to the American people (pace - he is obviously saying to the American people), to Democrats and Republicans and Independents across this great land - enough! This moment (pace - it is this moment) - this election (pace - it is this election) - is our chance to keep (thumb and forefinger anchor - as in to keep his hypnotic messages), in the 21st century (pace), the American promise alive (pace – who would disagree). Because (causality linking statement) next week, in Minnesota, the same party that brought you two terms of George Bush and Dick Cheney will ask this country for a third. And we are here (pacing) because (causality linking statement) we love this country (pace) too much to let the next four years look like the last eight. On November 4th, we must (strongest command word possible) stand up and say: “Eight is enough.” The command is not “eight is enough.” Obama executes the hypnotic lead that follows his emotional stirring and pacing just before that, as he says, “on November fourth, on November fourth!” Obama says “on November fourth” twice, attempting to make it seem as if he unintentionally double-spoke. However, this is very intentional. Notice how he has his thumb and forefinger together anchoring “November fourth”, together with the emotion he just stirred up, for the first time he says “on November fourth” He does this so we will recall his 356

An Examination of Barack Obama’s hypnotic messages and programs and emotions when we hold the pen in the voting booth. Then, notice how the second time he says “on November fourth” with the same hand that was thumb and forefinger for the first, he changes it to firmly point. He is pointing, which is the international and subconscious signal that he is giving us a command. Frowning and pointing is a common technique in conversational hypnosis to get someone to do something, because on the subconscious level, we perceive it as a command that we must perform, regardless whether consciously we feel like we are doing it voluntarily.145 Look at the firmness of his point, with a serious face perhaps a slight frown, as he says it the second time. Obama is not asking us for our vote, he is absolutely commanding it. One website even discuses how angry Obama appeared during parts of his speech.146 He is commanding all subconscious minds under his trance to support Obama. In fact, it was so good at looking accidental;, that the written speech transcript only has “on November fourth” once. The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor Ledowchowski, p104 of 631, “And likewise, when you are suing ‘command’ tonality, maybe you want to frown a bit. I used to point my finger at an imaginary client, and then give him instructions. So that, every time I pointed my finger and frowned, my voice started going down, because the physiology of commands, or instructions, is to point and frown slightly, and really get someone to do something. The Angry Barack Obama Acceptance Speech, August 29th, 2008, http://www.mikefrancesa.com/wordpress/?p=101 1 is easily proven that his double-speak is intentional, because his hand gestures are so pronounced and clear, and how clearly he switches from one hand gesture, the anchor, 357

Mind Control Secrets to the second, the command. Were the double speak accidental, he would not have such clear and definitive and purposeful and different hand gestures. The reason he says “On November fourth” twice is because he is giving us a twopart hypnotic command, 1. recall the hypnotic commands by the hypnotic anchor, and 2. act on them and vote for me – both commands to be recalled “on November fourth” – That’s why he gives you the specific date. . This is undoubltable evidence that he is implanting commands in a way we are not designed to be consciously aware of. He doesn’t coincidentally happen to again use the hypnotic anchor, and the pointing technique. Notice how these are the same gestures he uses in his statement for the same two principles, reception of the hypnotic message, and taking the commanded action by voting, that he uses in his overt hypnotic statement discussed above: “a light will shine down from somewhere, it will light upon you, you will experience an epiphany, and you will say to yourself, “I have to vote for Barack”’ Any forgiveness of this is simply because one may not understand how powerful and effective such techniques are. How effective these tricks of Obama’s are, can only be shown by the effects – millions of people completely irrationally in love with him, and compelled to vote for him. While you do not see it as consciously swaying you in any way, as of course it doesn’t logically, or you may not even notice it, in fact, it is a powerful command that compels millions to want him president, regardless how they feel logically. Obama’s aggressive pointing- the subconscious signal of giving commands: Here are some general examples of Obama aggressively pointing – the hypnotic symbol for giving a command. At this point, Obama goes into a pattern, as he occasionally does, where his hand gestures just normally flow 358

An Examination of Barack Obama’s with the conversation without any specific meaning for the most part – essentially using his hands the way be believe he always is, in order to not be obvious. Shortly thereafter, Obama anchors the word “believe” yet again with his usual thumb and forefinger Images from Democratic National Convention speech in Denver, 2008 (as examples of aggressive pointing, like those he uses as commands, not necessarily designed to coincide with specific commands discussed.) Photos http://www.mikefrancesa.com/wordpress/?p=101 1 technique. Is it again a coincidence? If there were no rhyme or reason to his hand gestures, why is it that he uses the same thumb and forefinger gesture for the same word (“belief”) that he anchored the same way at the start of his speech? He is subconsciously training us to “believe’ his hypnotic programming. Obama caught in another hypnotic command, anchor, and a strategic pause: Obama then says 15:50 “its time for us to change America...” (pacing statement) “...and that’s why I’m running for President (pause) of the United States.” (causality linking statement and the lead, delivered again with his standard hypnotic anchor, the thumb and forefinger flash) This is another classic Obama 1. pace 2. causality linking language 3. lead 4. hypnotic anchor in which he inputs the hypnotic command - that he will be President of the United States, to be recalled in the voting booth on November fourth. Why does he pause between ”President” and “of the United States”? Because when you are in the voting booth holding the pen as he has anchored, and all these commands are coming back, when you read the actual ballot, it reads, “President”, and then on the next line below, “of the United States”148, and as you read the ballot in the voting booth, you will subconsciously pause for a split second 359

Mind Control Secrets as your eyes skip because you read from one line to the next. By pausing when he gives you the command, it will more perfectly match the situation in which you must act according to that command, to make the subconscious link more effective. That is how clever and strategic and precise Obama’s hypnosis techniques are. This is how the unconscious mind works. Everything he is doing, the thumb and forefinger “holding the pencil” hand gestures, the pointing, the pauses, the hand gesture where he appears to be writing with a pen (in his democratic speech), the metaphors (anchors like “turn the page”, are all preparing you, anchoring you for recall of all his hypnotic commands recalled by you yourself holding the pen and the ballot card that day on November fourth when you are in the voting booth. Notice his palms towards himself again when he says “rewarded by a grateful nation.” It is difficult to tell, but he may actually be implanting the subconscious suggestion that he is so wonderful, that we as a nation must reward him (by giving him the Presidency). He talks about soldiers, and says “(these are my) heroes” and at that moment points to himself, to cause us to subconsciously associate the word “hero” with him. He then rouses emotion for the troops and hard working people, and says he will keep their dream alive “as President of the United States.” He uses “as” here as an implied causality, another powerful linking statement.149 Notice then how he keeps his palms towards himself, as the crowd cheers, sending the message of focusing that cheering on him. This is the same gesture he uses sometimes to discuss himself.150 Obama can change positions from one day to the next151 to mirror McCain’s positions, and through his

360

An Examination of Barack Obama’s hypnotic speech make people believe that Obama feels as strongly as McCain does on these issues. h t t p : / / w w w. l o n d o n d e r r y n h . n e t / w p - c o n t e n t / uploads/2008/01/20080108_dem-ballot.jpg Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p147-149. The primary focus of this document has been the linking statement using overt causation, the most powerful, however, other linking statements are also used by Obama. “my background, my politics” palms inward towards himself. – his speech on race, Philadelphia. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YbnKoJP1_xk&feature=related 2:25 He then anchors “we will keep our promise to every young American” with his thumb and forefinger technique – suggesting he will keep his promise to us. Obama consistently delivers a very simplistic hypnotic pace. “Now is the time. ..now is the time...”. The message is simply 1. pen in your hand, and 2. Obama. and 3. now is the time. Obama caught hypnotically linking himself with John F. Kennedy: Obama then mentions John F. Kennedy 27:47 (“what John F. Kennedy called our international and moral strength”), which he anchors with his thumb and forefinger. He then says “yes government must lead. ..but each of us” and as he says “us” he points that same thumb and forefinger anchor at himself (it doesn’t have to be simultaneous or immediate), subconsciously programming us to look upon him as John F. Kennedy. Then he repeats the word “yes’ in the middle of that anchoring, and does another palm towards himself, reaffirming the JFK programming yet again.

361

Mind Control Secrets It is an unlikely coincidence because he uses the same thumb and forefinger hand gesture to discuss Kennedy’s values, and then points that same gesture at himself a moment later. People believe he is John F. Kennedy, and have no conscious awareness of the connection that he is causing through subconscious manipulation. Notice this is the exact technique Obama used in his St. Paul speech, discussed above, when he anchored “a leader you deeply believe in.” Obama again pacing and leading This is just another of countless examples. Barack Obama said regarding healthcare: “It’s time to finally challenge the special interests and provide universal health care for all.” (Pace and Pace) “That’s why I’m running for President of the United States” (Lead) “because I believe that health care should be guaranteed for every American who wants it and affordable for every American who needs it.”152 (Pace and Pace) Notice how powerful this statement by Obama sounds, while logically empty. Notice how he says that’s why he’s running for President, before the “because.” Odd to be certain, but we let is pass because we do not understand the causation linkage that he is prepping our subconscious for. Notice how it makes no logical sense that its time to change special interests and provide universal health care, that’s why I am running for President. There is no logical connection between those statements - Maybe that is a reason why someone who has fought against special interests, or someone who has solved healthcare problems or at least has knowledge about these issues should be President. However, what he says is its time to change Washington and provide healthcare, and “that is why I am running for President.” The purported logic comes after as to not interfere with the pace and lead causality statement. Even 362

An Examination of Barack Obama’s that purported logic provides no real basis. It is just another pace. If Obama would have said the reason he should be President is because he believes in healthcare, it wouldn’t work as a pace because the audience doesn’t know what he believes – that is why he uses what the audience believes, even though it diverges from logic in order to follow perfectly the hypnosis principle of pacing and leading. Because he believes healthcare should be guaranteed for everyone who wants it, and affordable for everyone who needs it? Who doesn’t believe that? It is a statement everyone can agree with, used as a pace. Notice how powerful this statement sounds, yet has absolutely no logical basis. Because he believes everyone who wants medical care should have it, that’s Remarks of Senator Barack Obama: Health Care Town Hall, Date: 06/05/2008 why the President of the United States should be no person other than Barack Obama? The use of the most powerful linking statement here repeatedly, “because”, is more that suspicious. However, the proof, is that he is a Harvard Attorney, and he knows not to use a “because” when he is not making a proper argument that one thing causes another. Drafting such false logic sticks out to attorneys like a sore thumb and he cannot accidentally make this mistake once, let alone three times in one paragraph, and consistently throughout his speeches. PART 4 – ADDITIONAL SPECIFIC ASPECTS OF OBAMA’S HYPNOSIS Obama’s technique of head turned to the right side in interviews described by body language expert as one of the most powerful subconscious manipulation techniques possible by a speaker’s body language

363

Mind Control Secrets Notice how Obama has his head tilted to the right in interviews such as the Fox News interview with Chris Wallace April 27, 2008, his ABC News Nightline interview, as well as the August 16, 2008 meeting with Rev. Rick Warren,153 and many others. It is undeniable how Obama significantly tilts his head to the right in these and other interviews, but not when Obama is giving speeches. According to Tonya Reiman, Author of “The Power of Body Language,” such a head tilt to the right is “one of the most powerful manipulation tools of body language.”157 Tonya Reiman describes how there is no difference between what such gestures and manipulation. Barack Obama is actually manipulating you subconsciously by tilting his head without you even consciously realizing it. The reason is that tilting your head to the right specifically is a sign of vulnerability, a very effective one. Per our animal instincts, a head tilted to the right exposes an animal’s jugular vein, their weakness, and in turn, causes us to lower our defenses subconsciously as a counter-measure, without even being consciously aware of it. This is a clear example of Obama intentionally using a subconscious technique for gaining trust and lowering the subconscious guard and resistance of his audience, using one of the most powerful manipulation tools of body language. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KjqOXEOzSc0 See also Obama can be seen with his head tilted to the right in many interviews where he faces the camera. Google “Obama head tilt” - See “Watching the Saddleback Church Forum with Pastor Rick Warren interviewing Senator Barack Obama on Saturday August 16, I was struck by the marked and obvious tilting of the Senator’s head Forum. The tilt is to the right side. This phenomenon has not been widely written 364

An Examination of Barack Obama’s about from a medical perspective.” at http://www.drnoahklein.com/blog/35/senator¬barak-obama-has-a-head-tilt/ As an example http://www.foxnews.com/ story/0,2933,232960,00.html As an example http://lifeisanongoingprocess.com/ imageshome/obama_mtp.jpg Obama at Saddleback church interview The Power of Body Language, Tanya Reiman, p95-96. This is not just confident body language. When Obama lowers his head to the right as he often does, he is not convincing us logically, he is manipulating us without our knowledge. We may say, “oh, well this doesn’t seem so bad, his head tilted to the right doesn’t make me vote for him any more so.” You may feel none of these tactics do. In fact, because they are subconscious tactics, we do not realize how effective they are. Only after November fourth can one be sure they are unaffected. We are subconsciously tricked into trusting him more and liking him more, not logically, but in our internal feelings to vote for him.158 This goes beyond deceit, and is in fact mind-control. People watching him listen to him, and like him, and trust him, they genuinely feel it, and it is artificially induced. Now a single tactic like this head tilt by itself has effect. However, it is when Obama combines it with hundreds of other gestures, techniques, language patterns, and other aspects of hypnosis. There is an “Obama phenomenon” of millions of people who call him JFK, or Jesus reincarnated, and nobody can explain why. We are ready to turn over the united States of America to this largely unknown man and nobody can explain why. This is why. His arsenal of hypnotic and subconscious manipulation brainwashes causing an unstoppable grade school-like crush on him in some cases, and in others, simply pushes us over the edge, overpowers our

365

Mind Control Secrets logical concerns, to supporting him when we otherwise wouldn’t. Much of Obama’s body language may be considered beyond confident, to actually manipulative. As another example, when appearing with his opponents Hillary Clinton and John McCain, in debates and elsewhere, notice how, when he shakes their hand such as after the debate, Obama does an additional touch on the arm or shoulder of his opponent. He is not being friendly here. He does this to purposely appear “commanding” and “in charge” to his audience. He is showing that he has the right, power, and authority and confidence to touch this person. This is all conscious and intentional. He even makes sure that after every debate, he takes the forefront walking across the stage at the end, to the front center, and meeting the moderator or other people up in the front and center, so people are left with the end thought of him being at the forefront. Obama’s manipulative body language is so perfected, that you actually have to consciously detach yourself from it to try to not be influenced by it. He never shows a hint of nervousness in his body language, and is always commanding in his presence. He is so strategic in his body language, that when he is on stage with Hillary after primaries or Joe Biden talking about and praising him, he actually consciously sits slouching a little hunching his shoulders, with his back arched in his chair, as if to put the other person as the perceived leader while they speak well of him so their message is more effective. Interview of Professor of Psychiatry on CNN in which Dr. comes close to hinting of her suspicion that Obama is using covert subconscious techniques throughout his campaign. Excepts from an interview of Dr. Gail Saltz by Erica Hill, Professor of Psychiatry, New York Presbyterian Hospital, on

366

An Examination of Barack Obama’s Anderson Cooper 360, CNN June 7, 2008 22:00 EST speak for themselves. “Obama used words like “change,” “hope,” “action.” They have high emotional valence, particularly at this time. Clinton used words like “conversation” and “leader,” and they didn’t have the same emotional valence. And in addition, Obama delivered them with a tremendous inspirational tone. That also affected things greatly. So yes, I think actually it did play a big role. ... http://flickr.com/photos/jbenson2/253 1469404/ The details that go into Obama’s “look” If you think about it, a campaign is really about PR and marketing. And interestingly, the father of public relations was the nephew of Sigmund Freud. He used those same concepts of the subconscious. And that’s what we’re talking about here. It’s not the conscience meaning of the word: it’s the unconscious emotion it evokes. Because when it’s out of your awareness, it has the ability to make you behave and do certain things that you wouldn’t if you knew it was present. ... I do think Obama really has a special talent in this arena of deciding what words to use with a particular valence.” Dr. Saltz seams here to strongly suggest that Obama is indeed using subconscious hypnosis techniques in his campaign. However, she only scratches the surface of Obama’s techniques and does not put together the ethical issue of how deceptive and immoral his tactics are. Hypnosis/NLP expert discusses Obama’s use of mind control techniques on radio Dr. Horton, who has been working in the field of hypnosis and NLP for 25 years has called Obama’s methods clearly the use of hypnosis and effectively “Mind control.”159 The discussion on this radio program160 describes Obama’s 367

Mind Control Secrets use of the 48 Laws of Power, by Greene, a treatise on mass deception, total absence of emotion.161 Obama is often referred to as detached emotionally, and not just “cool” but in fact so detached as to be of concern to some people. Discussed is Obama’s ability to project people’s hopes and dreams onto him, and Obama’s use of hypnosis to get masses to view him as the vehicle to get whatever he wants through Obama’s vague “yes we can”, “change” and “we are the ones we have been waiting for” speeches. The discussion addresses Obama’s cadence rhythm and speaking tone, taking breaks after 5-8 word phrases, and how he cleverly uses pauses such as “together, . ..as we look to the future,” to send subconscious messages we are not even aware of. One specific hand gesture being used by Obama discussed was Obama’s rousing emotion from the audience, and then touching his face, or tie, as a method of subconsciously transferring those emotions onto him by bringing the person’s focus back to him while in that elicited state. Also discussed is how Obama morphs into a different person with different voice depending on which group he is talking to. Website analyzes Obama’s use of hypnosis in speeches A website looking at the hypnotic aspects of Obama’s speeches and comparing them to other candidates, and Hitler, who was well-known to use hypnosis, provided the following commentary: http://www.nfnlp.com/ Dr. Wil Horton, licensed clinical psychologist, 8/2/2008 2:00:00 PM clintons4mccain radio,http:// www.blogtalkradio.com/clintons4mccain/2008/08/02/ Does-Hillary-REALLY-Have-a-Chance

368

An Examination of Barack Obama’s Law 3: Conceal Your Intentions. Law 7: Get Others to Do the Work for You, but Always Take the Credit. Law 15: Crush Your Enemy Totally. Law 33: Discover Each Man’s Thumbscrew. 162 by Michael, website at http://www.transformdestiny.com/blog/?tag=conversational-hypnosis Barack Obama: Democratic candidate, Feb 5, 2008, remarks on Super Tuesday 58% hypnotic language. Complete mastery of the language, including highly abstract pacing and leading language for creating emotion and motivation. In addition to the language patterns, he is fantastic at going higher up in level of abstraction beyond details, while still managing to sound relevant. He uses Ericksonian-style language patterns, including presuppositions and nominalizations extensively. This is only a sample of 500 words from a single speech, but as you can see, Obama tops the crowd using nearly 60% hypnotic language patterns. In my opinion, this is purposeful language, likely written by a very skilled speech writer — perhaps someone trained in Neuro-Linguistic Programming or Hypnosis. Another website also provides similar commentary.163 Obama uses hypnotic command to dismiss the Rev Wright questions Regarding Rev. Wright, Obama in an interview with Chris Mathews on MSNBC, simply says, with his amazing hyper-confidence, “three weeks from now, everybody will have forgotten..” He doesn’t even say, I hope this will be forgotten. He clearly states it as a command. That easily, for millions of Americans, the question of why he sat in a racist, anti-American church for 20 years is unimportant.

369

Mind Control Secrets When Obama faces any attack or issue that hurts him, he simply says this is the old politics, and that this issue doesn’t solve the people’s problems. He calls it a “distraction.” A word that clearly has a very powerful message, to be overlooked. When the idea of a distraction is commanded hypnotically, in can, as we see, sometimes be more powerful than all the logic which says, “wait, Obama’s character is relevant.166 He groups everything that hurts him politically, from his empty record to his connections with Farakhan and Hamas, to his elitism, and all the questions about his character and patriotism under his magical umbrella of issues that “distractions” or what he calls “fear tactics.” The rational part of one’s mind should realize that Obama’s connections to these people, combined with how little we know about Obama disqualify him from the Presidency, but as emotional beings, many are driven by simply wanting him as President. Obama’s speech on race March 18, 2008 Philadelphia – hypnotic storytelling throughout This speech is symbolically in the “city of brotherly love.” Notice how he carefully plans venues for such speeches, Berlin to be like JFK, “Unity” when he and Clinton are trying to get along. Has any candidate before ever paid this much attention to such small symbolisms? Obama is using hypnotic storytelling techniques from the start of the speech, when Obama is talking about a different time, “221 years ago...in a hall that still stands across the street....farmers, scholars” in his slow rhythm, through to the end. As discussed above with regards to the California Convention 2007 Speech, hypnotic storytelling is a fundamental of hypnosis. The stories in this speech are countless, practically http://greatguys.blogspot.com/2008/09/i-mustveseen-different-speech.html 370

An Examination of Barack Obama’s Hardball College Tour interview Barack Obama, Chris Mathews, http://www.msnbc.msn.com/id/23925495/ page/4/ As he said it, in three weeks’ time, it was forgotten by most. Coincidentally, Wright, happened to shortly thereafter come public with some more extreme comments precisely giving Obama another chance to now denounce him more concretely. This had the precise effect of Obama then being able to say he did denounce Wright, after Obama initially refused to, so that the story would die down, and Wright has been largely silent since. -Another interesting coincidence nobody suspected. Obama said in his democratic convention acceptance speech that issues such as his character are off limits. throughout. Through much of Obama’s speech, what is a story and what is not are completely blended and intertwined. He takes you through a host of emotions starting with guilt about slavery, to all types of stories about brotherly love and togetherness, meanwhile using his thumb and forefinger anchoring technique almost throughout, and implanting messages hidden within the stories into your subconscious. He gets your imagination prevail over your rationality, and you find yourself feeling the heartwarming tales that the people in all these stories felt, and associating those with him. He consistently paces throughout, “This presidential campaign” or “I chose to run for president – at this moment (in history)” just two of many pacing statements with anchors, and “this moment”, “this election”, and “this time” (repeated nearly half a dozen times). He builds warm emotions with generic statements like “We all want to move in the same direction. ..towards a better future.. .for our children and grandchildren.” The way he dismisses the whole Rev. Wright affair without discussing how he could have not known Wright was 371

Mind Control Secrets racist and anti-American (which he denies) is by saying he is “not the most conventional candidate.” Notice how you have to agree with it because you do not have time to dissect what part of non-conventional is due to his race, and what part is due to something improper that he has done for twenty years. At 4:56 he says “A story that has seared into my genetic makeup the idea that this nation is more than the sum of its parts, that out of many, we are truly one”, meanwhile pointing down as if to command almost the whole way through that statement. Notice how many times he talks about being one with his audience. This is building and reinforcing a subconscious connection with his audience, often by using his hypnotic anchor hand gesture. In fact, such stories are designed to “sear” their way into your subconscious with the message that he and you, the subject, “are truly one.” More include “let us all find our common stake in one-another”, and “we can come together.” He describes children of different races getting along at multiple times throughout the speech. He tells stories containing embedded all the warm feelings that he in fact places into the subconscious minds of the audience, which warms, or at least thaws the outrage over Wright.167 He beautifully plays the audience like a violin taking positions on both sides, and criticizing from all angles and perspectives. In the end, we forget that he fails to address what he calls “nagging questions” because he cannot. They aren’t “questions”, they are impossibilities for which there is no answer, but which he dances around and dodges beautifully. It is impossible that he could not have know his pastor’s true views and character for twenty years. It is impossible that someone who says “g-d.d-mn America” loves this country in the same way as someone who is shocked by these words. It is impossible that Obama had he good and 372

An Examination of Barack Obama’s strong character, would have stayed in that church. It is impossible, that had Obama possessed good judgment, that he would have stayed in that church. It is impossible, that had Obama not agreed with such views, would have stayed in that church. In the end, he convinces many on emotion and warm feelings driven through to the subconscious through continuous hypnotic storytelling, telling hypnotic story after hypnotic story each with a theme about how he wants the audience to feel. Obama ends up slipping out of the consequences of a personal history what would rationally have destroyed any candidate. The Power of Conversational Hypnosis, Clifford Mee and Igor Ledochowski, How to Destroy Resistance With Stories: Priming the Subconscious Mind, p246-247. Obama’s hypnotic logo Obama adds to this by giving a visual point of fixation – his logo. No doubt that one intended meaning, of many, is that the circle is also an “O” for “O”bama. By itself that is not all that significant. Obama’s logo is highly hypnotic, because unlike any other logo in presidential history, you do not look at it, but through it. One subconsciously looks though the circle to the light inside, like the light at the end of the tunnel, without consciously realizing it. This visual point of focus is helpful in multiple ways to focus one’s attention, as well as to distract the critical factor. Notice how it is always there on the podium – a small one in the middle, just enough for your conscious mind to miss, but for you to see subconsciously. Additionally, Obama’s logo looks very much like a crystal ball. Notice how it looks like it is shining brightly. Crystal balls are used by hypnotists as one of their favorite focus points for aiding in trance induction. 168 373

Mind Control Secrets Also notice how Obama’s podium messages are never something like “country first” like McCain has, which needs conscious interpretation. Obama’s podium messages are always simplistic hypnotic commands including the words “Need” or “Believe” or “Change.” A common Obama podium message is the word in large letters “CHANGE”, and beneath it “WE NEED.” The reason this is hypnotic, and part of his hypnotic trance induction, is because the message is vague, and has two meanings because it can be read both as “change we need”, and as “we need change.” Per the discussion on trans-derivation in this document, as your mind tries to figure out which meaning is intended (and cannot resolve it because both are in fact intended) your mind is subject to trance induction and distraction, while your subconscious mind becomes more accepting of suggestion. Obama’s strange hand gesture & hand-holding conversation with Senator Lieberman In a very unusual report, Obama is reported to grab another Senator with whom he is in a disagreement with, Sen. Joseph Lieberman, and lead him by the hand across the Senate floor and then speak to Lieberman in a passionate manner with strange had gestures.169 The reason this is strange, is, besides the investigation of Obama for use of hypnosis in his speeches and other aspects of his campaign, is that the description of this “heated conversation” sounds somewhat like some very specific hypnotic induction techniques, including one hand and handshake instant induction techniques.170 Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p189 re use of crystal balls in trance induction.

374

An Examination of Barack Obama’s Obama in heated Conversation with Lieberman http:// www.huffingtonpost.com/2008/06/04/lieberman-carries¬mccains_n_105179.html The Handshake Induction (from http://en.wikipedia. org/wiki/Milton_H._Erickson) Confusion is the basis of Erickson’s famous hypnotic handshake. Many actions are learned and operate as a single “chunk” of behavior: shaking hands and tying shoelaces being two classic examples. If the behavior is diverted or frozen midway, the person literally has no mental space for this - he is stopped in the middle of unconsciously executing a behavior that hasn’t got a “middle”. The mind responds by suspending itself in trance until either something happens to give a new direction, or it “snaps out”. A skilled hypnotist can often use that momentary confusion and suspension of normal processes to induce trance quickly and easily. By interrupting the pattern of a “normal” handshake in some way, the hypnotist causes the subject to wonder what is going on. If the handshake continues to develop in a way which is out-of-keeping with expectations, a simple, non-verbal trance is created, The article states: “Obama In Heated Conversation With Lieberman, June 4, 2008 12:24 PM, Sam Stein, The Huffington Post: Furthermore, during a Senate vote Wednesday, Obama dragged Lieberman by the hand to a far corner of the Senate chamber and engaged in what appeared to reporters in the gallery as an intense, three-minute conversation. While it was unclear what the two were discussing, the body language suggested that Obama was trying to convince Lieberman of something and his stance appeared slightly intimidating. Using forceful, but not angry, hand gestures, Obama literally backed up Lieberman against the wall, leaned in very 375

Mind Control Secrets close at times, and appeared to be trying to dominate the conversation, as the two talked over each other in a few instances. Still, Obama and Lieberman seemed to be trying to keep the back-and-forth congenial as they both patted each other on the back during and after the exchange. Afterwards, Obama smiled and pointed up at reporters peering over the edge of the press gallery for a better glimpse of their interaction. Obama loyalists were quick to express their frustration with Lieberman’s decision and warned that if he continues to take a lead role in attacking Obama it could complicate his professional relationship with the Caucus.”171 It sounds more unbelievable than to even suggest seriously, but certain aspects of the “conversation” just have hypnotist written all over it. This report is not inconsistent with the absurd-sounding possibility that Obama tried to use hypnotic techniques on Senator Lieberman right there on the Senate floor. This includes the motive, Lieberman’s recent criticisms of Obama, and Obama’s alleged method of grabbing Senator Lieberman by the hand and leading him by the hand across the Senate floor (see handholding as part of instant induction techniques), the forceful hand gestures, backing Lieberman up against the wall, and leaning in very close, appearing to try to dominate the conversation, the patting on the back, all until being apparently interrupted by reporters.172 Obama’s use of a fake presidential seal Obama at one speech had on the front of his podium a fake presidential seal which he created, which looked like the Presidential Seal of the United States, except with a few modifications such as “Obama” written on it, and his hypnotic logo in the center.173 This was likely an attempt at another subconscious message

376

An Examination of Barack Obama’s which may then be reinforced or utilized by the hypnotist. All these responses happen naturally and automatically without telling the subject to consciously focus on an idea. The various descriptions of Erickson’s hypnotic handshake, including his own very detailed accounts, indicate that a certain amount of improvisation is involved, and that watching and acting upon the subject’s responses is key to a successful outcome. The most important thing is that the “normal” handshake is subverted in such a way to cause puzzlement, which may then be built upon. Richard Bandler was a keen proponent of the handshake induction, and developed his own variant, which is commonly taught in NLP workshops. Any habitual pattern which is interrupted unexpectedly will cause sudden and light trance. The handshake is a particularly good pattern to interrupt because the formality of a handshake is a widely understood set of social rules. Since everyone knows that it would be impolite to comment on the quality of a handshake, regardless of how strange it may be, the subject is obliged to embark on an inner search (known as a transderivational search, a universal and compelling type of trance) to identify the meaning or purpose of the subverted pattern. (see also “instant induction techniques” online, such as “one handed induction”) Obama in heated Conversation with Lieberman http:// www.huffingtonpost.com/2008/06/04/lieberman-carries¬mccains_n_105179.html See previous footnote on instant induction and handshake induction. http://www.victoriataft.com/2008/06/obama-unveils-presidential-seal.html looking Presidential, that, like the light shining down statement described above, was caught and ridiculed 377

Mind Control Secrets because of its impropriety. Both probably without went without anyone’s conscious awareness of their small role in Obama’s broader hypnotic efforts. Both were simply ridiculed because of their impropriety. This could be argued to simply have been an effort by Obama to appear Presidential, but why the subtle modifications then and why his logo in the middle? Assorted other points: Obama often uses a variety of other subconscious verbal tricks. At 4:55 pm on September 24, 2008, in a response to McCain suspending his campaign as a show of non-partisanship to work on the economy, Obama made a statement about how in this crisis, there are some immediate aspects, and also some long term aspects that the net administration will have to deal with. Then he says in the next few sentences “we”. ..”we” several times, and then follows up with how “we” will have to deal with those long term issues down the road. He separated it so he was not obviously saying that he will be the next administration, but subconsciously, that is probably an intentionally sent message. There are too many issues to address, and too many hypnotic techniques to look into even in a single speech. However, here are a few miscellaneous points. Notice how often he starts his turn speaking with the words “Now look...” Not just once or twice, but repeatedly, especially when he is in trouble in an interview or conversation. When Obama first introduces Biden as his vice president to take the stage with Obama for the first time, Obama announces Biden as, “the next president of the United States” and then corrects himself to say vice-president, as if he misspoke. It is difficult to know whether Obama did this on purpose to make people who are uncomfortable with him feel more at ease as though Biden would be running 378

An Examination of Barack Obama’s the show. Perhaps he misspoke, but then again, how often does Obama misspeak? .. .As compared to his proven prior acts of misspeaking purposely as part of subconscious tactics. Notice Obama’s sparkling eye-shadow makeup. On Hannity and Colmes, Mary Matalin said Obama was “attacking McCain subliminally”, calling McCain “confused.” In another Obama ad, when McCain was criticized for not knowing how many houses he owned, the voice slowly paused before saying “he cant remember,” in a deep powerful voice. Clearly this was a similar tactic to get people to be concerned about McCain’s age. When Hillary had lost the nomination, Obama came to meet with her. As the story was relayed, Obama had all journalists board his plane to cover him, and then, in an unbelievable move, Obama sent his plane, without him, to another city to intentionally do away with the press so Obama could talk to Clinton privately without journalists there. Regarding the lipstick on a pig comment, it is hard to know whether Obama intended this to be subconscious or not. However, on Wednesday September 10, 2008 in what appeared to be a small library, Obama did try to cover it up. He said, “nobody actually believes...” that the McCain camp is offended. Notice how much emphasis he puts on his favorite programming word “believes” – and the huge pause thereafter. That is not (supposedly) the end of the idea nor the sentence. Why a huge pause and emphasis if that were not the end of the idea? Notice how the whole statement is made as if it were a command, “nobody actually believes!” Notice how Obama copies and piggybacks the popular points of every candidate he is going against. This is so people will look at him as equal to every issue logically, and 379

Mind Control Secrets only differentiate Obama on the issues where he chooses to, where he is strongest. It allows him to appropriate the best of the other candidates without ever taking a position. Look at how he does this even in debates. He would allow Hillary to answer a question with her wealth of experience, and then he says that he would have given the same answer, sometimes even using a metaphor like “dovetail” but he is also Barack Obama. Remember how starkly different he was than John McCain? What issues can one name where he is even describably different than McCain on? PART 5 – THE VISIBLE EFFECTS OF OBAMA’S HYPNOSIS The effects of his hypnosis are undeniable “The unconscious mind (where Obama is implanting his hypnotic commands) is the source of our energy. No amount of will power exerted by the conscious mind can override it.” Modern Hypnosis Theory and Practice, Masud Ansari, Ph..D., p43. - this is why many people are so passionate about Obama. Nobody knows who, not even they. It is difficult to know how many people have been affected and how much until November 4th when people actually vote. Because of Obama’s tactics, we can expect people to change their mind at the last minute, feel entranced in the voting booth, vote for people other than they intended, and other interesting reports. We can expect irregularities because the lengths people will go to elect Obama to be unusual, as that desire will supercede some people’s interest in democracy. We can expect significant voter fraud, and other problems. We have already seen such strange behavior, including many instanced of voter fraud, people bending the rules as if Obama winning is more important than the rule, the obviously biased positions of most journalists, and reports that a respected journalist Gwen Ifill, who is moderating a debate, who may not have properly disclosed 380

An Examination of Barack Obama’s that she is writing a book on Obama, which should have been done even to avoid the appearance of impropriety. Obama’s perceived greatness Bill Richardson called him the “greatest leader of a generation.” Nancy Pelosi called Obama “a leader that g-d has blessed us with at this time.” Millions of people are worshipping a man who has accomplished virtually nothing but given speeches. Obama is drawing crowds like only John F. Kennedy could, except John F. Kennedy was in the military as commander of a torpedo boat, a congressman for six years, a senator for seven years, won the Pulitzer Prize, and was President of the United States before he had such support. Obama now is practically more popular than John F. Kennedy, except without any of the accomplishments. Obama puts us in a trance where it doesn’t even seem like it is the Presidency of the United States on the line – he makes us feel like it is American Idol and we are kids who want the guy we have a crush on to win. The media admits Obama is so memorizing it is difficult to remain objective, that they get chills and shivers from watching him. The McCain web ads “Love”, as well as “The Road To Denver” have examples of how people are spellbound by Obama174, including media persons. Journalists admit how swept away they are, how they have a crush on Obama like they haven’t had since grade school, and feel sensations going through their bodies while listening to him.17 5 Journalists admit “its hard to remain objective,” describing the sensations running up their legs as they listen to him speak. “I feel a need to do this, I have to” one Obama supporter says.

381

Mind Control Secrets “Regarding the “turn the page” speech, one typical supporter comments online: “I was there - i heard, i saw, i witnessed what i had been hearing only over the media. This guy is a myth, a legendary figure around who we must all assemble. He is the man to remember, the tree to lean on, the rock on which to build. Let America give this guy a chance and it is obvious that it will not be a regretable decision. I am quite sure that that rustic Medical Doctor who manifested a high degree of ignoramus when he naively spoke against Barack the day after he announced his candidacy on C-Span must be gnashing his teeth now. Barack has demonstrated that he is not only eloquent, but he is savvy, apt, sound and good enough for this country, so let’s all endorse him, and work hard to ensure that we place him in the White House. He has made it clear that this campaign is not about him, and not about his family. It is about us, so let us take this whole thing into our hands, get iito every nook and crany of this country and win voters for our darling candidate. Barack, you are the man!!!!!!!!!!” Another supporter shortly thereafter, writes, “I believe this wonderful man is a gift from God.” Others compare him to John F. Kennedy.176 These above are just a small sample. Obama’s trance Mark Bergin of World Magazine writes: ~ ~ ~Obama spell mesmerizing but empty - Candidate’s appeal takes on cult quality, Charles Krauthammer, Washington Post Writers Group, And now, in the most amazing trick of all, a silver-tongued freshman senator has found a way to sell hope. To get it, you need only give him your vote. Barack Obama is getting millions. ... “We are the hope of the future,” sayeth Obama. We can “remake this world as it 382

An Examination of Barack Obama’s should be.” Believe in me and I shall redeem not just you but your country -- nay, we can become “a hymn that will heal this nation, repair this world, and make this time different than all the rest.” http://www.chicagotribune.com/ news/chi-oped0218krauthammerfeb18,0,7036639.story Obama casts his spell – by Charles Krauthammer - ABC’s Jake Tapper notes the “Helter-Skelter cultish qualities” of “Obama worshipers,” what Joel Stein of the Los Angeles Times calls “the Cult of Obama.” Obama’s Super Tuesday victory speech was a classic of the genre. Its effect was electric, eliciting a rhythmic fervor in the audience -- to such rhetorical nonsense as “We are the ones we’ve been waiting for. (Cheers, applause.) We are the change that we seek.” http://www.realclearpolitics.com/articles/2008/02/ obama_casts_his_spell.html 175 http://www.hypemovie.com/?gclid=CM7LtP3 17ZUCFQhJagodWnYpeg Tucker Carlson on the press’ early teenage crush for Obama being beyond love. 176 Tracy Smith says Obama’s “stoic eloquence, “ with lines like, “WE are the ones we’ve been waiting for,” conjures up images of President Kennedy. http://www.cbsnews. com/stories/2008/02/14/earlyshow/main3829938.shtml “In typical fashion, Obama roused the crowd with soaring rhetoric: “We are the ones we’ve been waiting for.” With heads cocked, many onlookers seemed to glaze over with trance-like admiration for the man they believe will reinvent American politics.177” Another Obama fan writes: “...so I switched to a video of Barack and within a few moments, I had faded and gone into a drone-like TRANCE! Like an altered state. Anyone else notice this? What could it mean?178” Nicholas M. Guariglia describes Obama’s effect on many as: 383

Mind Control Secrets ~Everyone is telling me he’ll tickle my fancy. I’m supposed to be endeared. Apparently he does all sorts of amazing trance-like things to you: he’ll “look into your eyes,” “inspire” your political senses, and when he speaks to his audiences, he bestows upon you feelings you “haven’t felt in ages.””179 Daniel Zanoza writes: “It’s as if a significant portion of the American public is under some sort of ungodly spell when it comes to Obama and someone needs to give me a good explanation for it.”180 Another blogger writes: “It continues to stun me that people are hypnotized by Obama’s rhetoric given his lack of substance. His only message is “I offer hope” followed by “trust me”. He offers no plan for change and becomes annoyed when asked directly for details (hear his interview with Steve Inskeep on NPR 1/9/08). He depends on young voters who- apparently - do not realize he stands for nothing.”181 One blogger on HuffingtonPost.com writes: “Like ‘vsign’ I actually started out liking Obama and thinking that he had a chance to make a difference. After listening to him and reading about what he proposes to do as president, I no longer trust him. It’s a pity that so many people seem to be in a trance and believe that he is some kind of a god. I hope that they will come to their senses before it’s too late.”182 http://www.worldmag.com/webextra/13750 http://www.godlikeproductions.com/forum1/ message594429/pg1 http://www.globalpolitician.com/24075-elections http://r ffm.typepad.com/republicans_for_fair_ medi/2008/02/obama-the-antic.html

384

An Examination of Barack Obama’s http://politics.wikia.com/index.php?title=Why_ I_will_Not_Vote_For_Obama http://www.huffingtonpost.com/users/profile/ vanessar?action=comments&display=all&sort=newest As a final example, see Reverend James Manning’s video, likening him to other world leaders, in which he says “Barack . ..has got you all in a trance”, “Paralyzed hypnotic people that follow Barack” – essentially arguing that Obama with virtually no accomplishments has more support than JFK did, and more that Martin Luther King did, and that this is unnatural,, and this should be a wake up call that something is not right.183 We know the “Obama phenomenon” is occurring, and that it is powerful. To many who see through it, it is a quite creepy. Not only because his image does not match his complete lack of accomplishments, and complete failure to bring any real change in his 46 years. People who follow Obama with sparkles in their eyes try to bring you into what is a very intense and frightening cult-like following – a childish trance-like religious experience wherein you give up all resistance and submit to Obama love and it fulfills you completely184 There are significant reports of even high level political people breaking rules to support Obama. One narrator of a criticism of Obama supporters’ improper voting tactics describes Obama followers as simply not being able to see through it. The first question that no one really wants to examine, that we must examine, is, what is the logical explanation for the Obama phenomenon? As logical human beings, everything has a logical explanation. The media writes it off as “he is simply very charming and a great orator.” Does that suffice? His popularity is historic already. Historically, with some of the horrible leaders who have come to power through their guile, can we presume such cannot happen 385

Mind Control Secrets in this case just because this is America, and not even examine this phenomenon? Perhaps the best way to know Obama’s hypnosis techniques are having an effect is because he is continuing to use them. If these techniques weren’t working, he wouldn’t continue to risk his entire political career. The effects of Obama’s hypnosis on young people, and more educated people The effect Obama is clearly having on younger people is undeniable, and common knowledge that young people are one of his primary bases of support. Polls, colleges and the internet are flooded with young people raving about Obama. Obama also apparently has an increased effect on people who read more, or are more intellectual. In a recent article in Newsweek Magazine entitled, “Letter to the Obama Generation”, author Jonathan Darman advises “cut the blind devotion.” In hypnosis science terms, this is not surprising, as young people are known in psychology to respond better to hypnosis.185 The critical factor is something that one is not born with, but is something developed through life experiences.186 Dr. Erickson’s said of younger people’s susceptibility to hypnosis: These two case reports have been presented in considerable detail to illustrate the naturalistic hypnotic approach to children. There is seldom, if ever, a need for formalized or ritualistic technique. The eidetic imagery of a child, his readiness, eagerness and actual need for new learnings, his desire to understand and to share in activities of the world about him, and the opportunities offered by “pretend” and imitation games all serve to enable him to respond competently and well to hypnotic suggestions.187 h t t p : / / w w w . y o u t u b e . c o m / watch?v=yTp_atr2G9E&feature=user 386

An Examination of Barack Obama’s h t t p : / / w w w. y o u t u b e . c o m / w a t c h ? v = G O qe-JPLKfw&feature=PlayList&p=D2DE4AD0F8 129 8F1&index=0&playnext=1 Young people often respond better to hypnosis than adults, and have the imagination necessary to make the process work well. http://www.morpheusclinic.com/content/ frequently-asked-questions Killer Influence Secrets of Covert Hypnosis, by David X, Part 1 Also discussed on the radio program with Dr. Will Horton cited above, was how young people under thirty don’t have reference base to compare information with, and Obama is easily able to implant suggestions that are unchallenged in people without developed life experiences because they have nothing to draw from to compare and contrast such absolute truths with. Younger people do not have prior experience with which to compare such compelling speech. As adults, many of us have heard at some point very compelling speech, and know it does not mean that anywhere near the claimed results will follow. Younger people are more subject to the influence of hypnosis generally. The period from age 14 to age 21 is the best period for both speed of induction and depth of hypnosis.188 After age 20 there is a gradual decline. Younger people, and people with more intellectual minds, like readers, are also more subject to the influence of hypnosis techniques that work by distracting the conscious mind in order to access the subconscious, non-dominant hemisphere.189 This is because the processing part of the mind in these people will be more proactive in trying to solve the problems and chasing the distractions thrown by the hypnotist, as intended, leaving the subconscious more vulnerable to implanting of suggestion. Same with younger people being more creative, for similar reasons. 387

Mind Control Secrets Younger people have a general need to believe. Younger people have internally a need to be imaginative, to do something different, to change the world, by their nature. They have a compelling internal drive to be part of something, and in a way, do something different to make the world a better place. Obama makes very effective use of this about young people. However, just because Obama passionately shouts, “its time for change, new energy, and new ideas”, does not mean he really has any new ideas. Unfortunately, in helping young people understand that they are being unduly influenced, they may not want to believe it just like many adults will not. Perhaps those people not convinced by this document can explain who Obama sat in Rev. Wright’s church for 20 years but did not know Wright’s racist and anti-American views. You can never get a hypnotist to admit he is wrong. When you ask him how he didn’t know Wright’s views, he says he knew some of them but there were also positive things about the guy. When you ask him how he stayed in the church, he says he didn’t hear these particular statements. Obama has played this dance successfully with every journalist until they gave up and moved on. Conclusion and commentary Obama is beguiling us. He is hypnotizing us like sheep. Fooling us like children. The Obama phenomenon is essentially idol worship, caused by the well-studied and well-rehearsed mind control tricks of a man who is very clever, able to play the media, and thinks he has the right take the Presidency of the United States through such deceptive means. He takes it upon himself to decide he has the right to do so, and manipulate us without our knowledge by sidelining our rational judgment. What does such a person think of Americans? 388

An Examination of Barack Obama’s Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p186, Erickson 1967, p423. Modern Hypnosis, Theory and Practice, Masud Ansari, Ph.D., p31. Patterns of the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D. Volume 1, p13 – “[Erickson’s] overall strategy while conducting trance inductions appears to have these three dimensions. 1) pacing and distraction of the dominant (language) hemisphere.” See also, p137, “The induction of the altered state of consciousness called trance requires and implies the distraction and/or utilization of what Milton calls the conscious mind.” Worse yet, his hypnosis probably has at least some effect on millions. Jews voting for the candidate endorsed by Iran, Hamas, Farakhan, and Khalidi should be a wake up signal that something is not Kosher. Obama could not have picked a worse list of supporters than Wright, Ayers, the Black Panther Party, Farakhan, Iran, Hamas, Khalidi, Rezko if he were the Anti-Christ himself. This unknown man is trying to gain control of the world’s largest nuclear weapons arsenal by knowingly and intentionally using a form of hypnosis on America that is the most deceptive and manipulative form of communication known to man. We are being played like a violin by someone very smooth, who knows he can just play his games dodging questions and avoiding issues until the election. This document barely scratches the surface of his use of hypnosis. He knows he can promise anything. If questioned with skepticism, he downplays. Then, he goes right back to promising everything again. He can take neutral positions covering himself both ways, because what he is doing is never analyzed closely enough. He easily makes audiences feel like he has answered a question without having done so, simply 389

Mind Control Secrets by saying he has. If caught with evidence of his hypnosis, first, he will surely deny it. He will probably stop doing it. If it is prove, he will admit it, but say it is not his fault. Then, he may say that all advertising is part subliminal, and that everyone does it. Nobody has ever tried to gain the Presidency like this. It literally doesn’t matter what he says, because the conscious mind cannot override the subconscious, and he knows that. Obama is an eloquent speaker, and very clever, but the rest is hypnosis. He is able to tell us exactly what the polls say, exactly what he knows we want to hear. – even if he has to change positions from one day to the next.190 He knows exactly how to manipulate us. And he is false. Obama’s use of hypnosis and mind games gets you to make a different decision than you logically would have, yet he makes you feel like you came to that decision on your own rational reasoning. our own feelings are false. If a person is willing to be this deceptive and smile as broadly as Obama smiles, there is not telling what else he may be lying about, and no telling even who he really is. One must wonder why someone would risk their entire political career, so certain that if America was given another four years to find out who Obama really is, that we would never elect him, and that he must get the Presidency now, or never. This is a man we know nothing about, except that he has no virtually accomplishments, many shady connections, and lacks the judgment and character to disassociate such persons, and is an influential orator. We as Americans have to be stronger than to be influenced by words alone, even such powerful ones. The speaking style of frowning and angrily pointing while speaking angrily as part of covert hypnosis in public speeches is not used by Obama alone, but also was used by at least one other hypnotist in history who got millions to follow him. 191 192 193 390

An Examination of Barack Obama’s 190 Jackie Mason on Obama’s change in every major position, See amazing video of Obama at 4:40 changing his position on Iran at http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=4169200353336147 16&ei=uffkSIHzBZjUqAOqg-GZCw&q=jackie+mason+obama+iran&vt=lf . http://www.theblackvault.com/article-print-8227.html . See also, “He also maintained his almost hypnotic power over his entourage and the masses” http://www.grolier. com/wwii/wwii_hitler.html Also, One of the books Hitler is believed to have been particularly interested in was the work of the French psychologist Gustave Le Bon. Le Bon (1841-1931), had written a book entitled Psychology of the Masses. It had been translated into German in 1908, and records show a copy was delivered to the library frequented by Hitler that same year. Le Bon’s book describes his theories on crowds and their behaviour. He had identified that group behaviour could be manipulated by hypnotic suggestion, and that few individuals in a crowd possess a sufficiently strong personality to resist such suggestion. http://ezinearticles.com/?Inspiration,-Motivation-and-the-Link-to-Hypnosis---Article-Five&id=988 173 Obama is even taking away your ability to rationally judge and scrutinize what he is putting into your subconscious. One must wonder the true nature of a person who is willing to literally hypnotize us like children, in order to try and manipulate us into voting for him by sidelining our rational judgment. Obama is effectively saying, “the voter cannot be trusted to make this a logical decision, I will decide for them.” This is a frightening character trait suggestive of someone who almost believes he is some type of Messiah. Obama’s hyper-confidence alone is frightening. He is neither simply confident nor overconfident nor even simply arrogant. Obama’s aura almost suggests he believes himself to be Messianic, and his right to the Presidency 391

Mind Control Secrets long overdue and unquestionable. Not to mention his right to hypnotize millions to get that Presidency absolute. There was a moment during the Clinton primaries, where Bill Clinton made some strong statements against Obama, and Obama’s reaction to the former President was clearly one of being annoyed. It is questionable what type of psychological g-d complex or other abnormality would make Obama look down upon a former President as annoying. Obama’s insulting hand gestures provide more insight into his disturbing true nature that he successfully hides 99% of the time, that of someone who uses psychologically manipulative subconscious techniques to implant second-grade school-yard insults in the minds of unaware voters. Obama’s use of hypnosis on millions of people without our knowledge nor permission is unparalleled subterfuge. What kind of person presumes that they have the right to hypnotize Americans like children, and use mind control techniques which circumvent our rational judgment? But even more amazingly, what type of person runs for President of the United States with such behavior? - repeatedly flashing such insulting hand gestures at his opponents, trying to send subconscious messages? It is beyond obnoxious. Only a disturbed individual would think he is slippery enough to get away with something like this. Only a disturbed person would think they should get away with something like this, and with no accomplishments having never run anything become leader of the free world. Only a disturbed individual who thinks he can do absolutely anything would try, because to any sane person running for President, the risks of being caught would outweigh the potential rewards of such behavior. The hypnosis, trying to fool an entire nation, the obscene hand gestures towards his opponents again and again. Obama’s actions present the frightening picture of a genuinely perverted man, an 392

An Examination of Barack Obama’s egomaniac hypnotist with a g-d complex grown from his ability to get millions to eat out of his hand. The fact that he refers to his own message as a light shining down from above. The fact that he refers to himself as an epiphany. The fact that he does hand gestures to make it look like he is parting the water like Moses. The fact that he does all those other things to make people like Nancy Pelosi come out and say he is ‘sent by g-d.” One must also wonder what would happen to this country if Obama won, and only afterwards was it uncovered how he used hypnosis to gain the Presidency. What if upon discovery, many said they would not have voted for him otherwise? Those entrusted with protecting our democracy must do a better job protecting it. Our entire nation was almost lost to a con-man. The media may avoid this story for a number of reasons. Maybe it is too complicated for them, doesn’t fit a sound byte mold, or maybe cannot be delivered in a 60 second news story before moving on. Then again, it may be the most watched news story from now until the election. This story must break. People must know what is happening and those who help spread this word may be looked back on as heroic defenders of democracy. Let’s learn from history, not learn that we can repeat it. Our democracy is on the line. Compare the angry frowning and angry pointing and speaking style of Obama http://www.mikefrancesa.com/wordpress/?p=101 1 Compare the angry frowning and angry pointing and speaking style of Obama 18:00minutes into his California Democratic National Convention speech with the individual on this video http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=-21 1746012802428229&ei=h-PESJCLBqfcqAO3s5S3BQ&q=adolph+hitler+speech+1933&vt=lf 393

Mind Control Secrets The effects of his hypnosis must be cancelled out by people starting to take a rational look at who he is, including the media. It is certainly a concern that this type of hypnosis is so effective that even after learning what Obama is doing, many may still not believe and accept that Obama is hypnotizing them and that they might not otherwise vote for him. 194 It is my hope that the effects of all of Obama’s hypnotic and subconscious tactics are wiped away and neutralized completely. ..that everyone now be allowed to think and make logical and rational decisions.

394

Mk Ultra From the Internet, for informational purposes only. “The control over a person’s behavior ostensibly achieved in hypnosis obviously nominates it for use in the difficult process of interrogation.” So begins a CIA study of “Hypnosis in Interrogation” which appeared in the agency’s classified journal Studies in Intelligence. Could placing interrogatees under trance help loosen their lips? That was one of many operational uses of hypnosis that the CIA pondered and tested. The Studies in Intelligence article, which was written in 1960 by Edward F. Deshere, sheds some light on the CIA’s interest in hypnosis, but it tells only a tiny, incomplete part of the story. Given the potential power of hypnosis to unlock the secrets of the mind, Deshere found it “surprising that nobody . . . seems to have used it in this way.” He searched the literature and consulted top experts, but found no intelligence agency that “admits to familiarity with applications of the process [of hypnosis] to interrogation.” In fact, such applications had already been tested by the CIA and others, but it appears that Deshere—like most CIA officers at the time—was not privy to information about MKULTRA, the agency’s super-secret program of mind and behavior control research. The program, launched in 1953 to expand on previous CIA investigations of related topics, would last until 1963.

395

Mind Control Secrets In the mid-1970s, congressional committees investigating MKULTRA discovered that the CIA had become involved with a startling array of brainwashing techniques. The methods studied under MKULTRA included electroshock, subliminal communication, sensory deprivation and stimulation, the use of drugs (from “truth serum” to hard narcotics to LSD), and yes, even hypnosis. Many of these experiments were conducted on unwitting human subjects, and several MKULTRA projects are listed among the most appalling CIA abuses on record. (See Dossier’s documented feature on MKULTRA for more information.) Hypnosis, in fact, had attracted the interest of military and intelligence agencies years before MKULTRA. In The Search for the “Manchurian Candidate,” a thorough history of the CIA’s mind control work, author John Marks devoted an entire chapter to the study and use hypnosis. “No mind-control technique has more captured popular imagination—and kindled fears—than hypnosis,” Marks noted. For the CIA officials tasked with turning mental abilities (and vulnerabilities) into Cold War weapons, “hypnosis offered too much promise not to be pursued.” The CIA’s first major involvement with hypnosis originated in the Office of Security, which in 1950 formed special interrogation squads—each of which was staffed with an expert hypnotist—for the purpose of evaluating potential foreign agents and defectors from enemy countries. Code-named BLUEBIRD, the program was put under the command of Morse Allen, a former officer of both Naval Intelligence and the State Department, who developed an avid interest in hypnosis when he joined the CIA’s Office of Security. (Shortly thereafter, BLUEBIRD took on the new codename ARTICHOKE, the project that directly preceded MKULTRA.) 396

Mk Ultra According to Marks, not only did Allen consult with and employ some of the top academic experts on hypnosis, he also conducted his own experiments: “He asked young CIA secretaries to stay after work and ran them through the hypnotic paces—proving to his own satisfaction that he could make them do whatever he wanted. He had secretaries steal SECRET files and pass them on to total strangers, thus violating the most basic CIA security rules. He got them to steal from each other and start fires. He made one of them report to the bedroom of a strange man and then go into a deep sleep.” Allen recorded the observation that “this activity clearly indicates that individuals under hypnosis might be compromised and blackmailed.” Those were helpful abilities for a spy agency, to be sure, but Allen later envisioned a more extreme use of hypnosis. In 1954 he hypnotized another secretary, and convinced her while in the trance to pick up and shoot an (unloaded) gun at another secretary. The implications were serious: agents could conceivably be induced to assassinate a target without knowing what they were doing. However, Allen had learned enough about hypnosis to be skeptical that such an operation could actually be pulled off. No one could be sure that such experimental successes could be carried over into the operational realm. Hypnosis was surely attractive, but it was also unreliable; there were simply too many variables in how subjects might act under hypnosis or under the power of post-hypnotic suggestion. One CIA psychologist who was heavily involved in later hypnosis research, John Gittinger, saw promise but pratfalls with the technique. “Predictable absolute control is not possible on a particular individual,” he concluded, and absolute control, after all, was the objective. The pre-programmed assassin remained an elusive goal. 397

Mind Control Secrets Still, the CIA would do everything in its power to identify intelligence uses of hypnosis. In 1977, the agency informed Congress that of the 149 subprojects that were launched under MKULTRA, eight dealt with hypnosis—including two that studied “hypnosis and drugs in combination.” Hypnosis research was conducted by several renowned scientists whose funding would later be traced to the CIA. At major universities and top research institutes, as well as military bases and prisons, subjects were put into trance in experiments that were intended first and foremost to advance the CIA’s ability to operationalize hypnosis. In 1960, the CIA’s counterintelligence (CI) staff became involved in the effort. Intent on discovering and improving on the Soviet Union’s mind games, the CI offi cers saw hypnosis as a “potential breakthrough in clandestine technology,” as it was described in one CIA document. For the CI staff, interest in hypnotism went beyond the theoretical into the operational. In July 1963, the CIA issued a 128-page “Counterintelligence Interrogation” manual, a document that was not made public until 1997. Among the tactics described for “coercive” interrogation of “resistant sources” was hypnosis. (ParaScope has made available both an online and a print version of this startling document.) “The problem of overcoming the resistance of an uncooperative interrogatee is essentially a problem of inducing regression to a level at which the resistance can no longer be sustained,” the manual said. “Hypnosis is one way of regressing people.” The manual cited the work of Martin Orne, a famous psychologist who received several CIA subsidies under MKULTRA for his research on hypnosis and interrogation. Like other experts, Orne concluded that hypnosis would probably be of marginal use for this purpose. To the CI

398

Mk Ultra staff, Orne’s generally skeptical view of the technique was “somewhat too cautious or pessimistic.” The manual suggested, for example, that a CIA interrogator “could tell a suspect double agent in trance that the KGB is conducting the questioning, and thus invert the whole frame of reference” for the interrogatee. “[O] nce the subject is tricked into believing that he is talking to friend rather than foe, or that divulging the truth is the best way to suit his own purposes, his resistance will be replaced with cooperation. The value of hypnotic trance is not that it permits the interrogator to impose his will but rather that it can be used to convince the interrogatee that there is not valid reason not to be forthcoming.” The manual added that hypnosis “offers one advantage not inherent in other interrogation techniques or aides: the posthypnotic suggestion.” In certain cases, the manual instructed: “[I]t should be possible to administer a silent drug to a resistant source, persuade him as the drug takes effect that he is slipping into a hypnotic trance, place him under actual hypnosis as consciousness is returning, shift his frame of reference so that his reasons for resistance become reasons for cooperation, interrogate him, and conclude the session by implanting the suggestion that when he emerges from trance he will not remember anything about what has happened.” Although the CIA’s hypnosis work had advanced considerably by the early 1960s, you wouldn’t know it from reading Deshere’s report for Studies in Intelligence. At the same time, Deshere does have plenty to say about potential roles for hypnosis in the spy trade, exploring several crucial questions about the utility of the technique. Can interrogatees under trance be made to tell the truth and nothing but the truth? Can they be hypnotized without their quiescence 399

Mind Control Secrets or their knowledge? Can they, though post-hypnotic suggestion, be turned into virtual spy-robots to do the CIA’s bidding? Can amnesia be induced by the hypno-handlers to erase memories of spy missions? After conducting a lengthy analysis, Deshere concluded that there was probably some use for hypnosis in interrogations, of a very limited nature. He wrote that “the hypnotic situation, rather than hypnosis itself, could be used to relieve a person of any sense of guilt for his behavior, giving him the notion that he is helpless to prevent his manipulation by the interrogator.” Deshere described how such an operation could work: “A captive’s anxiety could be heightened, for example, by rumors that the interrogator possesses semi-magical techniques of extracting information. A group of collaborating captives could verify that interrogees lose all control over their actions, and so on. After such preliminary conditioning, a ‘trance’ could be induced with drugs in a setting described by Orne [the MKULTRA researcher discussed above] as the ‘magic room,’ where a number of devices could be used to convince the subject that he is responding to suggestions.” Once the interrogatee was persuaded that he was under the control of his handlers, Deshere reasoned, “the individual could legitimately renounce responsibility for divulging information, much as if he had done it in delirium.” Deshere’s elaborate plan was pretty dry stuff, when compared to some of the more grandiose CIA hypnosis schemes hatched during the early years of the Cold War. Just how far did the CIA take its investigation of the uses of hypnosis? We may never know all of the answers, but this once-secret report offers more clues as to why the trance technique was added to the CIA’s arsenal of mind control weapons.

400

Mk Ultra CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY WASHINGTON 25, D. C. OFFICE OF THE DIRECTOR 25 APR 1956 MEMORANDUM FOR: The Honorable J. Edgar Hoover Director, Federal Bureau of Investigation SUBJECT: Brainwashing The attached study on brainwashing was prepared by my staff in response to the increasing acute interest in the subject throughout the intelligence and security components of the Government. I feel you will find it well worth your personal attention. It represents the thinking of leading psychologists, psychiatrists and intelligence specialists, based in turn on interviews with many individuals who have had personal experience with Communist brainwashing, and on extensive research and testing. While individuals specialists hold divergent views on various aspects of this most complex subject, I believe the study reflects a synthesis of majority expert opinion. I will, of course, appreciate any comments on it that you or your staff may have. (signed) Allen W. Dulles Director ENCLOSURE A REPORT ON COMMUNIST BRAINWASHING The report that follows is a condensation of a study by training experts of the important classified and unclassified information available on this subject. 401

Mind Control Secrets BACKGROUND Brainwashing, as a technique, has been used for centuries and is no mystery to psychologists. In this sense, brainwashing means involuntary reeducation of basic beliefs and values. All people are being reeducated continually. New information changes one’s beliefs. Everyone has experienced to some degree the conflict that ensues when new information is not consistent with prior belief. The experience of the brainwashed individual differs in that the inconsistent information is forced upon the individual under controlled conditions after the possibility of critical judgment has been removed by a variety of methods. There is no question that an individual can be broken psychologically by captors with knowledge and willingness to persist in techniques aimed at deliberately destroying the integration of a personality. Although it is probable that everyone reduced to such a confused, disoriented state will respond to the introduction of new beliefs, this cannot be stated dogmatically. PRINCIPLES OF HUMAN CONTROL AND REACTION TO CONTROL There are progressive steps in exercising control over an individual and changing his behaviour and personality integration. The following five steps are typical of behaviour changes in any controlled individual: 1. Making the individual aware of control is the first stage in changing his behaviour. A small child is made aware of the physical and psychological control of his parents and quickly recognizes that an overwhelming force must be reckoned with. So, a controlled adult comes to recognize the overwhelming powers of the state and 402

Mk Ultra the impersonal, “incarcerative” machinery in which he is enmeshed. The individual recognizes that definite limits have been put upon the ways he can respond. (Approved for Release) (62-80750-2712X) (Date: 8 FEB 1984) 2. Realization of his complete dependence upon the controlling system is a major factor in the controlling of his behavior. The controlled adult is forced to accept the fact that food, tobacco, praise, and the only social contact that he will get come from the very interrogator who exercises control over him. 3. The awareness of control and recognition of dependence result in causing internal conflict and breakdown of previous patterns of behaviour. Although this transition can be relatively mild in the case of a child, it is almost invariably severe for the adult undergoing brainwashing. Only an individual who holds his values lightly can change them easily. Since the brainwasher-interrogators aim to have the individuals undergo profound emotional change, they force their victims to seek out painfully what is desired by the controlling individual. During this period the victim is likely to have a mental breakdown characterized by delusions and hallucinations. 4. Discovery that there is an acceptable solution to his problem is the first stage of reducing the individual’s conflict. It is characteristically reported by victims of brainwashing that this discovery led to an overwhelming feeling of relief that the horror of internal conflict would cease and that perhaps they would not, after all, 403

Mind Control Secrets be driven insane. It is at this point that they are prepared to make major changes in their value-system. This is an automatic rather than voluntary choice. They have lost their ability to be critical. 5. Reintergration of values and identification with the controlling system is the final stage in changing the behaviour of the controlled individual. A child who has learned a new, socially desirable behaviour demonstrates its importance by attempting to as—apt the new behaviour to a variety of other situations. Similar states in the brainwashed adult are (SECTION DELETED BY CIA) pitiful. His new value-system, his manner of perceiving, organizing, and giving meaning to events, is virtually independent of his former value—system. He is no longer capable of thinking or speaking in concepts other than those he has adopted. He tends to identify by expressing thanks to his captors for helping him see the light. Brainwashing can be achieved without using illegal means. Anyone willing to use known principles of control and reactions to control and capable of demonstrating the patience needed in raising a child can probably achieve successful brainwashing. COMMUNIST CONTROL TECHNIQUES AND THEIR EFFECTS A description of usual communist control techniques follows. 1. Interrogation. There are at least two ways in which “interrogation” is used: a. Elicitation, which is designed to get the individual to surrender protected information, is a form 404

Mk Ultra of interrogation. One major difference between elicitation and interrogation used to achieve brainwashing is that the mind of the individual must be kept clear to permit coherent, undistorted disclosure of protected information. b. Elicitation for the purpose of brainwashing consists of questioning, argument, indoctrination, threats, cajolery, praise, hostility, and a variety of other pressures. The aim of this interrogation is to hasten the breakdown of the individual’s value system and to encourage the substitution of a different value-system. The procurement of protected information is secondary and is used as a device to increase pressure upon the individual. The term “interrogation” in this paper will refer, in general, to this type. The “interrogator” is the individual who conducts this type of interrogation and who controls the administration of the other pressures. He is the protagonist against whom the victim develops his conflict, and upon whom the victim develops a state of dependency as he seeks some solution to his conflict. 2. Physical Torture and Threats of Torture. Two types of physical torture are distinguishable more by their psychological effect in inducing conflict than by the degree of painfulness: a. The first type is one in which the victim has a passive role in the pain inflicted on him (e.g., beatings). His conflict involves the decision of whether or not to give in to demands in order to avoid further pain. Generally, brutality of this type was not found to achieve the desired results. Threats of torture were found more effective, as fear of 405

Mind Control Secrets pain causes greater conflict within the individual than does pain itself. b. The second type of torture is represented by requiring the individual to stand in one spot for several hours or assume some other pain-inducing position. Such a requirement often engenders in the individual a determination to “stick it out.” This internal act of resistance provide a feeling of moral superiority at first. As time passes and his pain mounts, however, the individual becomes aware that it is his own original determination to resist that is causing the continuance of pain. A conflict develops within the individual between his moral determination and his desire to collapse and discontinue the pain. It is this extra internal conflict, in addition to the conflict over whether or not to give in to the demands made of him, that tends to make this method of torture more effective in the breakdown of the individual personality. 3. Isolation. Individual differences in reaction to isolation are probably greater than to any other method. Some individuals appear to be able to withstand prolonged periods of isolation without deleterious effects, while a relatively short period of isolation reduces others to the verge of psychosis. Reaction varies with the conditions of the isolation cell. Some sources have indicated a strong reaction to filth and vermin, although they had negligible reactions to the isolation. Others reacted violently to isolation in relatively clean cells. The predominant cause of breakdown in such situations is a lack of sensory stimulation (i.e., grayness of walls, lack of sound, 406

Mk Ultra absence of social contact, etc.). Experimental subjects exposed to this condition have reported vivid hallucinations and overwhelming fears of losing their sanity. 4. Control of Communication. This is one of the most effective methods for creating a sense of helplessness and despair. This measure might well be considered the cornerstone of the communist system of control. It consists of strict regulation of the mail, reading materials, broadcast materials, and social contact available to the individual. The need to communicate is so great that when the usual channels are blocked, the individual will resort to any open channel, almost regardless of the implications of using that particular channel. Many POWs in Korea, whose only act of “collaboration” was to sign petitions and “peace appeals,” defended their actions on the ground that this was the only method of letting the outside world know they were still alive. May stated that their morale and fortitude would have been increased immeasurably had leafl ets of encouragement been dropped to them. When the only contact with the outside world is via the interrogator, the prisoner comes to develop extreme dependency on his interrogator and hence loses another prop to his morale. Another wrinkle in communication control is the informer system. The recruitment of informers in POW camps discouraged communication between inmates. POWs who feared that every act or thought of resistance would be communicated to the camp administrators, lost faith in their fellow man and were forced to “untrusting individualism.” Informers are also under several stages of 407

Mind Control Secrets brainwashing and elicitation to develop and maintain control over the victims. 5. Induction of Fatigue. This is a well-known device for breaking will power and critical powers of judgment. Deprivation of sleep results in more intense psychological debilitation than does any other method of engendering fatigue. The communists vary their methods. “Conveyor belt” interrogation that last 50-60 hours will make almost any individual compromise, but there is danger that this will kill the victim. It is safer to conduct interrogations of 8-10 hours at night while forcing the prisoner to remain awake during the day. Additional interruptions in the remaining 2-3 hours of allotted sleep quickly reduce the most resilient individual. Alternate administration of drug stimulants and depressants hastens the process of fatigue and sharpens the psychological reactions of excitement and depression. Fatigue, in addition to reducing the will to resist, also produces irritation and fear that arise from increased “slips of the tongue,” forgetfulness, and decreased ability to maintain orderly thought processes. 6. Control of Food, Water and Tobacco. The controlled individual is made intensely aware of his dependence upon his interrogator for the quality and quantity of his food and tobacco. The exercise of this control usually follows a pattern. No food and little or no water is permitted the individual for several days prior to interrogation. When the prisoner first complains of this to the interrogator, the latter expresses surprise at such inhumane treatment. He makes a demand of the prisoner. If the latter complies, he receives a good meal. If he does not, he 408

Mk Ultra gets a diet of unappetizing food containing limited vitamins, minerals, and calories. This diet is supplemented occasionally by the interrogator if the prisoner “cooperates.” Studies of controlled starvation indicate that the whole value-system of the subjects underwent a change. Their irritation increased as their ability to think clearly decreased. The control of tobacco presented an even greater source of conflict for heavy smokers. Because tobacco is not necessary to life, being manipulated by his craving for it can in the individual a strong sense of guilt. 7. Criticism and Self-Criticism. There are mechanisms of communist thought control. Self-criticism gains its effectiveness from the fact that although it is not a crime for a man to be wrong, it is a major crime to be stubborn and to refuse to learn. Many individuals feel intensely relieved in being able to share their sense of guilt. Those individuals however, who have adjusted to handling their guilt internally have difficulty adapting to criticism and self-criticism. In brainwashing, after a sufficient sense of guilt has been created in the individual, sharing and self-criticism permit relief. The price paid for this relief, however, is loss of individuality and increased dependency. 8. Hypnosis and Drugs as Controls. There is no reliable evidence that the communists are making widespread use of drugs or hypnosis in brainwashing or elicitation. The exception to this is the use of common stimulants or depressants in inducing fatigue and “mood swings.”

409

Mind Control Secrets 9. Other methods of control, which when used in conjunction with the basic processes, hasten the deterioration of prisoners’ sense of values and resistance are: a. Requiring a case history or autobiography of the prisoner provides a mine of information for the interrogator in establishing and “documenting” accusations. b. Friendliness of the interrogator, when least expected, upsets the prisoner’s ability to maintain a critical attitude. c. Petty demands, such as severely limiting the allotted time for use of toilet facilities or requiring the POW to kill hundreds of flies, are harassment methods. d. Prisoners are often humiliated by refusing them the use of toilet facilities during interrogation until they soil themselves. Often prisoners were not permitted to bathe for weeks until they felt contemptible. e. Conviction as a war criminal appears to be a potent factor in creating despair in the individual. One official analysis of the pressures exerted by the ChiComs on “confessors” and “non-confessors” to participation in bacteriological warfare in Korea showed that actual trial and conviction of “war crimes” was overwhelmingly associated with breakdown and confession. f. Attempted elicitation of protected information at various times during the brainwashing process diverted the individual from awareness of the deterioration of his value-system. The fact that, in most cases, the ChiComs did not want or need such intelligence was not known to the 410

Mk Ultra prisoner. His attempts to protect such information was made at the expense of hastening his own breakdown. THE EXERCISE OF CONTROL: A “SCHEDULE” FOR BRAINWASHING From the many fragmentary accounts reviewed, the following appears to be the most likely description of what occurs during brainwashing. In the period immediately following capture, the captors are faced with the problem of deciding on best ways of exploitation of the prisoners. Therefore, early treatment is similar both for those who are to be exploited through elicitation and those who are to undergo brainwashing. Concurrently with being interrogated and required to write a detailed personal history, the prisoner undergoes a physical and psychological “softening-up” which includes: limited unpalatable food rations, withholding of tobacco, possible work details, severely inadequate use of toilet facilities, no use of facilities for personal cleanliness, limitation of sleep such as requiring a subject to sleep with a bright light in his eyes. Apparently the interrogation and autobiographical material, the reports of the prisoner’s behaviour in confinement, and tentative “personality typing” by the interrogators, provide the basis upon which exploitation plans are made. There is a major difference between preparation for elicitation and for brainwashing. Prisoners exploited through elicitation must retain suffi cient clarity of thought to be able to give coherent, factual accounts. In brainwashing, on the other hand, the fi rst thing attacked is clarity of thought. To develop a strategy of defense, the controlled individual must determine what plans have been made for

411

Mind Control Secrets his exploitation. Perhaps the best cues he can get are internal reactions to the pressures he undergoes. The most important aspect of the brainwashing process is the interrogation. The other pressures are designed primarily to help the interrogator achieve his goals. The following states are created systematically within the individual. These may vary in order, but all are necessary to the brainwashing process: 1. A feeling of helplessness in attempting to deal with the impersonal machinery of control. 2. An initial reaction of “surprise.” 3. A feeling of uncertainty about what is required of him. 4. A developing feeling of dependence upon the interrogator. 5. A sense of doubt and loss of objectivity. 6. Feelings of guilt. 7. A questioning attitude toward his own value-system. 8. A feeling of potential “breakdown,” i.e., that he might go crazy. 9. A need to defend his acquired principles. 10. A final sense of “belonging” (identification). A feeling of helplessness in the face of the impersonal machinery of control is carefully engendered within the prisoner. The individual who receives the preliminary treatment described above not only begins to feel like an “animal” but also feels that nothing can be done about it. No one pays any personal attention to him. His complaints fall on deaf ears. His loss of communication, if he has been isolated, creates a feeling that he has been “forgotten.” Everything that happens to him occurs according to an impersonal; time schedule that has nothing to do with his 412

Mk Ultra needs. The voices and footsteps of the guards are muted. He notes many contrasts, e.g., his greasy, unpalatable food may be served on battered tin dishes by guards immaculately dressed in white. The first steps in “depersonalization” of the prisoner have begun. He has no idea what to expect. Ample opportunity is allotted for him to ruminate upon all the unpleasant or painful things that could happen to him. He approaches the main interrogator with mixed feelings of relief and fright. Surprise is commonly used in the brainwashing process. The prisoner is rarely prepared for the fact that the interrogators are usually friendly and considerate at first. They make every effort to demonstrate that they are reasonable human beings. Often they apologize for bad treatment received by the prisoner and promise to improve his lot if he, too, is reasonable. This behaviour is not what he has steeled himself for. He lets down some of his defenses and tries to take a reasonable attitude. The first occasion he balks at satisfying a request of the interrogator, however, he is in for another surprise. The formerly reasonable interrogator unexpectedly turns into a furious maniac. The interrogator is likely to slap the prisoner or draw his pistol and threaten to shoot him. Usually this storm of emotion ceases as suddenly as it began and the interrogator stalks from the room. These surprising changes create doubt in the prisoner as to his very ability to perceive another person’s motivations correctly. His next interrogation probably will be marked by impassivity in the interrogator’s mien. A feeling of uncertainty about what is required of him is likewise carefully engendered within the individual. Pleas of the prisoner to learn specifically of what he is accused and by whom are side-stepped by the interrogator. Instead, the prisoner is asked to tell why he thinks he is held and what he feels he is guilty of. If the prisoner fails to come 413

Mind Control Secrets up with anything, he is accused in terms of broad generalities (e.g., espionage, sabotage, acts of treason against the “people”). This usually provokes the prisoner to make some statement about his activities. If this takes the form of a denial, he is usually sent to isolation on further decreased food rations to “think over” his crimes. This process can be repeated again and again. As soon as the prisoner can think of something that might be considered self-incriminating, the interrogator appears momentarily satisfied. The prisoner is asked to write down his statement in his own words and sign it. Meanwhile a strong sense of dependence upon the interrogator is developed. It does not take long for the prisoner to realize that the interrogator is the source of all punishment, all gratification, and all communication. The interrogator, meanwhile, demonstrates his unpredictability. He is perceived by the prisoner as a creature of whim. At times, the interrogator can be pleased very easily and at other times no effort on the part of the prisoner will placate him. The prisoner may begin to channel so much energy into trying to predict the behaviour of the unpredictable interrogator that he loses track of what is happening inside himself. After the prisoner has developed the above psychological and emotional reactions to a sufficient degree, the brainwashing begins in earnest. First, the prisoner’s remaining critical faculties must be destroyed. He undergoes long, fatiguing interrogations while looking at a bright light. He is called back again and again for interrogations after minimal sleep. He may undergo torture that tends to create internal confl ict. Drugs may be used to accentuate his “mood swings.” He develops depression when the

414

Mk Ultra interrogator is being kind and becomes euphoric when the interrogator is threatening the direst penalties. Then the cycle is reversed. The prisoner fi nds himself in a constant state of anxiety which prevents him from relaxing even when he is permitted to sleep. Short periods of isolation now bring on visual and auditory hallucinations. The prisoner feels himself losing his objectivity. It is in this state that the prisoner must keep up an endless argument with the interrogator. He may be faced with the confessions of other individuals who “collaborated” with him in his crimes. The prisoner seriously begins to doubts his own memory. This feeling is heightened by his inability to recall little things like the names of the people he knows very well or the date of his birth. The interrogator patiently sharpens this feeling of doubt by more questioning. This tends to create a serious state of uncertainty when the individual has lost most of his critical faculties. The prisoner must undergo additional internal conflict when strong feelings of guilt are aroused within him. As any clinical psychologist is aware, it is not at all difficult to create such feelings. Military servicemen are particularly vulnerable. No one can morally justify killing even in wartime. The usual justification is on the grounds of necessity or self-defense. The interrogator is careful to circumvent such justification. He keeps the interrogation directed toward the prisoner’s moral code. Every moral vulnerability is exploited by incessant questioning along this line until the prisoner begins to question the very fundamentals of his own value-system. The prisoner must constantly fight a potential breakdown. He finds that his mind is “going blank” for longer and longer periods of time. He can not think constructively. If he is to maintain any semblance of psychological integrity, he must bring to an end this state

415

Mind Control Secrets of interminable internal conflict. He signifies a willingness to write a confession. If this were truly the end, no brainwashing would have occurred. The individual would simply have given in to intolerable pressure. Actually, the final stage of the brainwashing process has just begun. No matter what the prisoner writes in his confession the interrogator is not satisfied. The interrogator questions every sentence of the confession. He begins to edit it with the prisoner. The prisoner is forced to argue against every change. This is the essence of brainwashing. Every time that he gives in on a point to the interrogator, he must rewrite his whole confession. Still the interrogator is not satisfied. In a desperate attempt to maintain some semblance of integrity and to avoid further brainwashing, the prisoner must begin to argue that what he has already confessed to is true. He begins to accept as his own the statements he has written. He uses many of the interrogator’s earlier arguments to buttress his position. By this process, identification with the interrogator’s value-system becomes complete. It is extremely important to recognize that a qualitative change has taken place within the prisoner. The brainwashed victim does not consciously change his value-system; rather the change occurs despite his efforts. He is no more responsible for this change than is an individual who “snaps” and becomes psychotic. And like the psychotic, the prisoner is not even aware of the transition. DEFENSIVE MEASURES OTHER THAN ON THE POLICY AND PLANNING LEVEL 1. Training of Individuals potentially subject to communist control. Training should provide for the trainee a realistic appraisal of what control pressures the communists are likely to exert and what 416

Mk Ultra the usual human reactions are to such pressures. The trainee must learn the most effective ways of combating his own reactions to such pressures and he must learn reasonable expectations as to what his behaviour should be. Training has two decidedly positive effects; first, it provides the trainee with ways of combatting control; second, it provides the basis for developing an immeasurable boost in morale. Any positive action that the individual can take, even if it is only slightly effective, gives him a sense of control over a situation that is otherwise controlling him. 2. Training must provide the individual with the means of recognizing realistic goals for himself. a. Delay in yielding may be the only achievement that can be hoped for. In any particular operation, the agent needs the support of knowing specifically how long he must hold out to save an operation, protect his cohorts, or gain some other goal. b. The individual should be taught how to achieve the most favorable treatment and how to behave and make necessary concessions to obtain minimum penalties. c. Individual behavioural responses to the various communist control pressures differ markedly. Therefore, each trainee should know his own particular assets and limitations in resisting specific pressures. He can learn these only under laboratory conditions simulating the actual pressures he may have to face. d. Training must provide knowledge of the goals and the restrictions placed upon his communist interrogator. The trainee should know what 417

Mind Control Secrets controls are on his interrogator and to what extent he can manipulate the interrogator. For example, the interrogator is not permitted to fail to gain “something” from the controlled individual. The knowledge that, after the victim has proved that he is a “tough nut to crack” he can sometimes indicate that he might compromise on some little point to help the interrogator in return for more favorable treatment, may be useful indeed. Above all, the potential victim of communist control can gain a great deal of psychological support from the knowledge that the communist interrogator is not a completely free agent who can do whatever he wills with his victim. e. The trainee must learn what practical cues might aid him in recognizing the specific goals of his interrogator. The strategy of defense against elicitation may differ markedly from the strategy to prevent brainwashing. To prevent elicitation, the individual may hasten his own state of mental confusion; whereas, to prevent brainwashing, maintaining clarity of thought processes is imperative. f. The trainee should obtain knowledge about communist “carrots” as well as “sticks.” The communists keep certain of their promises and always renege on others. For example, the demonstrable fact that “informers” receive no better treatment than other prisoners should do much to prevent this particular evil. On the other hand, certain meaningless concessions will often get a prisoner a good meal. g. In particular, it should be emphasized to the 418

Mk Ultra trainee that, although little can be done to control the pressures exerted upon him, he can learn something about controlling his personal reactions to specific pressures. The trainee can gain much from learning something about internal conflict and conflict-producing mechanisms. He should learn to recognize when someone is trying to arouse guilt feelings and what behavioural reactions can occur as a response to guilt. Finally, the training must teach some methods that can be utilized in thwarting particular communist control techniques: Elicitation. In general, individuals who are the hardest to interrogate for information are those who have experienced previous interrogations. Practice in being the victim of interrogation is a sound training device. Torture. The trainee should learn something about the principles of pain and shock. There is a maximum to the amount of pain that can actually be felt. Any amount of pain can be tolerated for a limited period of time. In addition, the trainee can be fortified by the knowledge that there are legal limitations upon the amount of torture that can be inflicted by communist jailors. Isolation. The psychological effects of isolation can probably be thwarted best by mental gymnastics and systematic efforts on the part of the isolate to obtain stimulation for his neural end organs. Controls on Food and Tobacco. Foods given by the communists will always be enough to maintain survival. Sometimes the victim gets unexpected opportunities to supplement his diet with special minerals, vitamins and other nutrients (e.g., “iron” from the rust of prison bars). In some instances, experience has shown that individuals 419

Mind Control Secrets could exploit refusal to eat. Such refusal usually resulted in the transfer of the individual to a hospital where he received vitamin injections and nutritious food. Evidently attempts of this kind to commit suicide arouse the greatest concern in communist officials. If deprivation of tobacco is the control being exerted, the victim can gain moral satisfaction from “giving up” tobacco. He can’t lose since he is not likely to get any anyway. Fatigue. The trainee should learn reactions to fatigue and how to overcome them insofar as possible. For example, mild physical exercise “clears the head” in a fatigue state. Writing Personal Accounts and Self-Criticism. Experience has indicated that one of the most effective ways of combatting these pressures is to enter into the spirit with an overabundance of enthusiasm. Endless written accounts of inconsequential material have virtually “smothered” some eager interrogators. In the same spirit, sober, detailed self-criticisms of the most minute “sins” has sometimes brought good results. Guidance as to the priority of positions he should defend. Perfectly compatible responsibilities in the normal execution of an individual’s duties may become mutually incompatible in this situation. Take the example of a senior grade military offi cer. He has the knowledge of sensitive strategic intelligence which it is his duty to protect. He has the responsibility of maintaining the physical fi tness of his men and serving as a model example for their behaviour. The offi cer may go to the camp commandant to protest the treatment of the POWs and the commandant assures him that treatment could be improved if he will swap something for it. Thus to satisfy one responsibility he must compromise another. The offi cer, in short, is in a constant state of internal confl ict. But if the offi cer is given the relative 420

Mk Ultra priority of his different responsibilities, he is supported by the knowledge that he won’t be held accountable for any other behaviour if he does his utmost to carry out his highest priority responsibility. There is considerable evidence that many individuals tried to evaluate the priority of their responsibilities on their own, but were in confl ict over whether others would subsequently accept their evaluations. More than one individual was probably brainwashed while he was trying to protect himself against elicitation. CONCLUSIONS The application of known psychological principles can lead to an understanding of brainwashing. 1. There is nothing mysterious about personality changes resulting from the brainwashing process. 2. Brainwashing is a complex process. Principles of motivation, perception, learning, and physiological deprivation are needed to account for the results achieved in brainwashing. 3. Brainwashing is an involuntary reeducation of the fundamental beliefs of the individual. To attack the problem successfully, the brainwashing process must be differentiated clearly from general education methods for thought-control or mass indoctrination, and elicitation. 4. It appears possible for the individual, through training, to develop limited defensive techniques against brainwashing. Such defensive measures are likely to be most effective if directed toward thwarting individual emotional reactions to brainwashing techniques rather than toward thwarting the techniques themselves.

421

15 August 1955 —

(note Declassified) SECRET CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY WASHINGTON 25, D. C. 19 JUN 1964 (Commission No. 1131) MEMORANDUM FOR: Mr. J. Lee Rankin General Counsel President’s Commission on the Assassination of President Kennedy

SUBJECT: Soviet Brainwashing Techniques 1. Reference is made to your memorandum of 19 May 1964, requesting that materials relative to Soviet techniques in mind conditioning and brainwashing be made available to the Commission. 2. At my request, experts on these subjects within the CIA have prepared a brief survey of Soviet research in the direction and control of human behavior, a copy of which is attached. The Commission may retain this document. Please note that the use of

certain sensitive materials requires that a sensitivity indicator be affixed. 3. In the immediate future, this Agency will make available to you a collection of overt and classified materials on these subjects, which the Commission may retain. 4. I hope that these documents will be responsive to the Commission’s needs. (SIGNED) (DECLASSIFIED) Richard Helms (By C.I.A.) Deputy Director for Plans (letter of ) (--------------------------) Attachment CD 1131 SECRET MEMORANDUM SUBJECT: Soviet Research and Development in the Field of Direction and Control of Human Behavior. 1. There are two major methods of altering or controlling human behavior, and the Soviets are interested in both. The first is psychological; the second, pharmacological. The two may be used as individual methods or for mutual reinforcement. For longterm control of large numbers of people, the former method is more promising than the latter. In dealing with individuals, the U.S. experience suggests the pharmacological approach (assisted by psychological techniques) would be the only effective method. 423

Mind Control Secrets Neither method would be very effective for single individuals on a long term basis. 2. Soviet research on the pharmacological agents producing behavioral effects has consistently lagged about five years behind Western research. They have been interested in such research, however, and are now pursuing research on such chemicals as LSD25, amphetamines, tranquillizers, hypnotics, and similar materials. There is no present evidence that the Soviets have any singular, new, potent drugs to force a course of action on an individual. They are aware, however, of the tremendous drive produced by drug addiction, and PERHAPS could couple this with psychological direction to achieve control of an individual. 3. The psychological aspects of behavior control would include not only conditioning by repetition and training, but such things as hypnosis, deprivation, isolation, manipulation of guilt feelings, subtle or overt threats, social pressure, and so on. Some of the newer trends in the USSR are as follows: a. The adoption of a multidisciplinary approach integrating biological, social and physical-mathematical research in attempts better to understand, and eventually, to control human behavior in a manner consonant with national plans. b. The outstanding feature, in addition to the interdisciplinary approach, is a new concern for mathematical approaches to an understanding of behavior. Particularly notable are attempts to use modern information theory, automata theory, 424

Mk Ultra and feedback concepts in interpreting the mechanisms by which the “second signal system,” i.e., speech and associated phenomena, affect human behavior. Implied by this “second signal system,” using INFORMATION inputs as causative agents rather than chemical agents, electrodes or other more exotic techniques applicable, perhaps, to individuals rather than groups. c. This new trend, observed in the early Post-Stalin Period, continues. By 1960 the word “cybernetics” was used by the Soviets to designate this new trend. This new science is considered by some as the key to understanding the human brain and the product of its functioning—psychic activity and personality—to the development of means for controlling it and to ways for molding the character of the “New Communist Man.” As one Soviet author puts it: Cybernetics can be used in “molding of a child’s character, the inculcation of knowledge and techniques, the amassing of experience, the establishment of social behavior patterns . . . all functions which can be summarized as ‘control’ of the growth process of the individual.” 1/Students of particular disciplines in the USSR, such as psychologist and social scientists, also support the general cybernetic trend. 2/ (Blanked by CIA) 4. In summary, therefore, there is no evidence that the Soviets have any techniques or agents capable of producing particular behavioral patterns which are not available in the West. Current research indicates that the Soviets are attempting to develop a technology for controlling the development of behavioral 425

Mind Control Secrets patterns among the citizenry of the USSR in accordance with politically determined requirements of the system. Furthermore, the same technology can be applied to more sophisticated approaches to the “coding” of information for transmittal to population targets in the “battle for the minds of men.” Some of the more esoteric techniques such as ESP or, as the Soviets call it, “biological radio-communication,” and psychogenic agents such as LSD, are receiving some overt attention with, possibly, applications in mind for individual behavior control under clandestine conditions. However, we require more information than is currently available in order to establish or disprove planned or actual applications of various methodologies by Soviet scientists to the control of actions of particular individuals.

References 1. Itelson, Lev, “Pedagogy: An Exact Science?” USSR October 1963, p. 10. 2. Borzek, Joseph, “Recent Developments in Soviet Psychology,” Annual Review of Psychology, vol. 15, 1964, p. 493-594. The first letter and attachment are from DECLASSIFIED DOCUMENTS 1984 microfilms under MKULTRA (84) 002258, published by Research Publication Woodbridge, CT 06525. Some original markings were not retyped, but the content is the same. The second letter and attachment are from the Warren Commission documents. Notice should be paid to the different tone Helms gives to his letter, keeping in mind he 426

Mk Ultra was found guilty of lying to Congress. He places greater emphasis on “Soviet” practices and tries to diminish breakthroughs gained by Americans. Some thought should be given as to WHY the Warren Commission sought such documents (remembering that ALLEN DULLES was a member of that Commission). They were exploring the Manchurian candidate theory. It was revealed during the Church Committee hearings of 1975 that Helms had been in charge of Project AMLASH, a program to assassinate Castro (Cuba), Trujillo (Dominican Republic), Diem (RVN), Schneider (Chile) using MAFIA figures John Roselli and Santos Trafficante to do the job. Care was used to insure lines appear in same length and order. Page length will have to be adjusted if you desire to print this. Look for other specials soon. David John Moses.

427

Appendix 2

Glossary of Common NLP Terms Our primary goal is to provide you with reference experiences for the attitudes that characterize the NLP way of perceiving reality and for the trail of techniques that have been generated as a consequence. Since many people desire a map (no matter how vague) of the territory before proceeding with their journey, we also offer this glossary of terms. We trust that you understand that dictionary definitions are, of necessity, “circular” and are most useful when they direct you to the reference experiences. Accessing Cues—Behaviors that are correlated with the use of a particular representational system; i.e., eye movements, postures, breathing, etc. Analog Change—A change which varies continuously; e.g., a dimmer control for lights or a shift in body position. Analog Marking—Emphasizing a part of a sentence using verbal or nonverbal means; e.g., a louder tone or a hand gesture. Anchor—A trigger that leads to an experience as fully and completely as possible (with all the senses); looking out from one’s own eyes. Auditory—Referring to the sense of hearing. 429

Mind Control Secrets

Backtrack—To review or summarize. Break State—To change a person’s state dramatically. Behavioral Flexibility—The ability to vary one’s behavior in order to elicit a response from another person. Calibrate—To “read” another person’s verbal and nonverbal responses and associate specific behaviors with specific internal processes or states. Calibrated Loop—An ongoing interaction in which specific behaviors of each person trigger specific responses in the other. Chaining Anchors—Firing anchors sequentially in order to direct a person’s experience along that sequence. Channel—One of the five senses or representational systems. Chunk Size—The size of the object, situation, or experience being considered. This can be altered by chunking up (a broader focus), chunking down (a more specific focus), or chunking sideways or laterally (focusing on others of the same type of class). For example, beginning with a car, “chunking down” might be to a Ford, “chunking up” might be to a means of transportation, and “chunking sideways” might be to a plane or train. Collapsing Anchors—Firing anchors simultaneously in order to promote integration of the experiences.

430

Glossary of Common NLP Terms Complex Equivalent—A linguistic term to describe the complex set of behaviors that equal a certain nominalization in a person’s map of reality; e.g., the behaviors that are “proof” that a certain person “loves” you. Congruent—When all of a person’s internal strategies, behaviors, and parts are in agreement and working together. Contrastive Analysis—To determine the differences between the submodalities of two or more representations. Conversational Postulates—Behavioral presuppositions which are part of the culture and language patterns but are not identified overtly; e.g., “Do you have a watch?” leads the other person to tell you the time. Critical Submodalities—The submodalities which most determine a person’s response. Crossover Mirroring—Matching a person’s rhythms but with a different type of behavior. Deep Trance Identification—See second position. Digital Change—A change which is all-or-none, on-or-off with no steps or positions in between the ends; e.g., a light is on or off, language. Dissociated—Experiencing from a perspective other than your own. Driver—The most crucial submodality so that changing it “automatically” changes many other submodalities.

431

Mind Control Secrets Dovetail—To fit together more than one outcome, story, etc. Ecology—Considering the effects on the whole system instead of on just one part or one person. Embedded Command—Nesting a command so that it is grammatically not a command but is marked out as a command by your analogs; e.g., “It might be worthwhile considering how to do that! Eye-Accessing Cues—Movements of a person’s eyes that indicate the representational system being used. Firing an Anchor—Repeating the overt behavior that triggers a certain response. First Position—Experiencing the world from your own perspective or being associated into yourself. Flexibility—Having more than one choice in a situation. Future Pace—Rehearsing (mentally and physically) so that a specific behavior will occur naturally and automatically in a future situation. Generative Intervention—An intervention that solves the presenting problem and also generates other changes that make the person’s life better in many other ways. Gustatory—Referring to the sense of taste. Incongruent—When two or more of a person’s parts or programs are in conflict. 432

Glossary of Common NLP Terms

Installation—Acquiring a new strategy or behavior. Kinesthetic—Referring to the sense of feeling. May be subdivided into tactile feelings (Kt—physically feeling the outside world), proprioceptive feelings (Kp—internal body sensations such as muscle tension or relaxation), and meta feelings (Km—“emotional” responses about some object, situation or experience.) Lead System—The representational system initially used to access stored information. Leading—Guiding another person in a specific direction. Lost Performative—A linguistic pattern in which the person performing the action or judgment is missing from the sentence. Map of Reality—A person’s perception of reality. Mask—See perceptual filter. Meta-Model—A model of language patterns that focuses attention on words people use to delete, distort, generalize, limit, or specify their realities and also provides a series of outcome specification questions useful for recovering lost or unspecified information and or loosening rigid patterns of thinking. Metaphor—Usually a story, parable, or analogy that relates one situation, experience or phenomenon to another.

433

Mind Control Secrets Meta-Outcome—The outcome that is more general than the stated one; e.g., getting my self-respect back is the meta-outcome in “Killing that person will get my self-respect back.” It is the “chunked up” outcome, so that killing that person becomes only one member of a class of behaviors that can be used to recover self-respect. Meta-Person—Being in third positions. Milton Model—A categorization of language patterns useful for delivering a message in such a way that the person readily accepts it. Mirroring—Approximately matching one’s behavior to that of another person. Modal Operators—A linguistic term for the way one judges or evaluates actions; e.g., choice, possibility, impossibility, desire, necessity. Modality—One of the five senses. Modeling—Observing and specifying how something happens or how someone thinks or behaves, and then demonstrating the process for others. Negative Command—A command that is marked out with analogs although it is grammatically stated in the negative; e.g., “Wouldn’t that be a good idea!” Nest—To fit one thing (outcome, story, etc.) within another. Nominalization—A linguistic term for the words which result from the process of taking actions (verbs) and converting 434

Glossary of Common NLP Terms them into things (nouns) which actually have no existence as things; e.g., you can’t put them in a wheelbarrow. Examples of nominalizations are “love,” “freedom,” “happiness,” “respect,” “frustration,” etc. See complex equivalent. Olfactory—Referring to the sense of smell. Organ Language—Words that refer to specific body parts or activities; e.g., “Get off my back,” “pain in the rear,” etc. Outcome—Desired goal or result. Pacing—Matching or mirroring another person’s verbal and/or nonverbal behavior. Useful for gaining short-term rapport. Parts—Metaphoric representations of different facets of a person’s strategies, programs, “personality” or ego states; e.g., the “parts” that want you to be safe, independent, in control, loved, respected, spiritual, etc. To be distinguished from the specific behaviors adopted by the “parts” to get their positive outcomes. Perceptual Filter—An attitude, point of view, perspective or set of presuppositions about the object, person or situation. Also called a “mask.” Polarity Response—A response which reverses, negates, or takes the opposite position from the previous statement. Predicates—Process words or words that express action or relationship with respect to a subject (verbs, adverbs and adjectives). The words may reflect the representational system being used or they may be nonspecific; e.g., “That 435

Mind Control Secrets looks good,” “Sounds right to me,” “That feels fine,” or “I agree.” Preferred Representational System—The representational system which a person habitually uses to process information or experiences; usually the one in which the person can make the finest distinctions. Process Words—See predicates. Quotes—A method of expressing the desired message in quotations as if someone else said it. Rapport—A condition in which trust, understanding, harmony, and cooperation has been established. Reframing—A process by which a person’s perception of a specific behavior is altered. Usually subdivided into context, meaning, and six-step reframing. Remedial Intervention—An intervention that only solves the presenting problem. Representational Systems—Referring to the five sense of seeing (visual), hearing (auditory), feeling (kinesthetic), tasting (gustatory), and smelling (olfactory). Resource State—The experience of an ability, attitude, behavior, characteristic, perspective, or quality that is useful. Second Position—Experiencing the world from the perspective of another person.

436

Glossary of Common NLP Terms Secondary Gain—The positive or desired result (often hidden) of a seemingly undesired or problem behavior. Sensory Acuity—The ability to use the senses to make distinctions between different bits of incoming information. Sensory Based—Information which is correlated with what has been received by the five senses (as opposed to “Hallucinations”). Separator State—See break state. Shift Referential Index—To take the perspective of someone else but to keep your own criteria. Six-Step Reframe—A process in which an undesirable behavior is metaphorically separated from the desired outcome of the “part” so that the “part” can more easily adopt new behaviors that satisfy its positive intention and do not have the undesirable effects of the original behavior. Sorting Polarities—Separating tendencies or “parts” that pull a person in opposite directions. Stacking Anchors—Using the same anchor for a number of resources. State—A state of being or a condition of body/mind or an experience at a particular moment. Stealing an Anchor—Identifying an anchored sequence (stimulus-response) and then firing that anchor.

437

Mind Control Secrets Stimulus-Response—The repeated association between an experience and a particular response; e.g., Pavlovian conditioning. Strategy—A sequence of mental and behavioral steps which leads to a specific outcome; e.g., decision, learning, motivation, specific skills. Submodalities—The subdivisions of the processing of the representational systems; e.g., visual information can be divided in black-and-white, color, 2-D, 3-D, bright, dim, clear, fuzzy, moving, still, large, small, etc. Switch Referential Index—To take the perspective and the criteria of someone else. Synthesia—An overlap between representational systems such as “see/feel” (feelings overlap with what is seen) or “hear/feel” (feelings overlap with what is heard). Tag Questions—Negative questions tagged onto the end of a sentence in order to diffuse polarity responses; e.g., “Don’t you?” “Can’t you?” “Aren’t you?” etc. Tape Editing—A process of reviewing past behavior and then future pacing in order to alter future responses in similar situations. Third Position—Experiencing the world from a distant position, outside all the persons in the interaction (as an “Observer,” “Fair Witness,” “Guardian Angel,” etc.).

438

Glossary of Common NLP Terms Transderivational Search—The process of searching back through one’s memories to find a reference experience. Translating—The process of rephrasing words from one representational system into another.

439

Bio Dr. William Horton was trained in crisis/hostage negotiation by the FBI at the FBI Academy in Quantico, Virginia. He is a licensed psychologist, an alcohol and drug counselor, and went through the Red Cross training for Critical Incident Stress Debriefing training. A veteran of the Army and Naval Reserve, Dr. Horton is considered one of the leading experts in subconscious communications. He has hypnotized over 100,000 people in his career! He has won more awards in the field of hypnosis than anyone in the last few years. He has lead trainings in hypnosis and NLP all over the world. His first book, Primary Objective, Neuro-Linguistic Psychology and Guerrilla Warfare, is being considered for a feature film. He has coauthored the best-selling Selling Yourself to Others: the New Psychology of Sales. He used these skills to overcome an injury and receive a black belt in three styles of karate. Join us and see why Dr. William Horton was awarded the Rexford North Award, the highest award in the field of hypnosis. He has also won the 2001 Educator of the Year from the International Association of Counselors and Therapists and the highest award from the international Hypnosis Hall of Fame.

For Training in NLP, Hypnosis, and Mind Control Techniques contact Dr. Horton 941-408-8551 www.Drwillhorton.com www.nfnlp.com 441